Home

674-2005 Bid Opportunity

1. Project No 674 2005 List of Contents Section 00000 Alternate Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre Section Title Pages Division 16 Electrical 16010 Electrical General Requirements 24 16106 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts 4 16107 Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts 2 16111 Conduits Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 6 16122 Wires and Cables 7 16131 Splitters Junction Pull Boxes Cabinets and CSTE s 4 16132 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes and Fittings 5 16141 Wiring Devices 9 16151 Wire and Box Connectors 0 1000 V 1 16191 Fastenings and Supports 2 16192 Mechanical Equipment Connections 3 16193 Miscellaneous Apparatus and Appliances 2 16195 Work in Existing Building S 16421 Service Entrance Board 6 16426 Secondary Switchgear 120 208V amp 347 600V 4 16432 Instrument Transformers 2 16440 Disconnect Switches Fused and Non Fused Up to 1000 V 2 16450 Grounding Secondary 4 1646 Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary 4 1647 Panelboards Breaker Type 4 16475 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 7 16477 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 3 16478 Fuses Low Voltage 2 16485 Contactors 2 16496 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters Class A 2 16505 Lighting Equipment 5 6519 E
2. metres and shall be minimum 8 for all circuits longer than 35 metres 5 All branch circuit wiring and conduit shall be installed to minimize voltage drop Install additional conduit runs as required to take the most direct and shortest route to outlets light fixtures etc 3 2 Installation in Raceways 51 Install wiring as follows mI In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16111 12 In underground ducts in accordance with Section 16106 23 In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with Section 16116 4 Ensure conduits are dry and free of debris before pulling cables a Colour coding and identification as per this section 26 Vires in outlet junction and switch boxes not having a connection within box shall not be spliced but shall continue unbroken through the box wl Branch circuits exceeding 21 metres shall be 10 AWG branch circuits exceeding 35 metres shall be 8 AWG 3 3 Installation of Single Conductor Cables wil Single conductor cables shall be installed one cable diam apart on suspended cable tray or channel supports and shall be clamped with aluminum cable clamps Cables shall be terminated using non magnetic connectors Cable armor shall be grounded via an aluminum plate at the supply end and isolated via an insulating plate at the load
3. PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 WORK INCLUDED zl The Work includes furnishing all labor materials tools equipment and documentation required for a complete and working Integrated Security Management System as specified in this section and as provided by Johnson Controls This scope of Work shall cover the requirements for the access control alarm monitoring and integrated systems as issued by mI The City of Winnipeg 22 It shall cover the operational specifications software and hardware for a new Integrated Security Management System to be installed at the USERS office facilities at 41 700 Assiniboine Avenue 1 2 RELATED WORK 1 General Terms and Conditions included in the Contract Documents 2 Division 16 Ta REFERENCES 21 Design and operation of the system shall conform to the following referenced codes regulations and standards as applicable 241 Canadian Electrical Code CEC 12 70 3 UL 294 and UL 1076 as required where applicable 4 FCC Rules and Regulations PS Part 15 Class A or B as applicable 56 Applicable Local laws regulations and other codes 47 CE mark as and where applicable 8 C Tick mark as and where applicable 9 Degrees of protection provided by the controller enclosure 1 NI EMA 250 minimum Type 2 2 IEC 529 minimum IP 21 Project No Alternat 674 2005 P2000
4. certified v2 24AWG solid copper conductor NES insulated with suitable plastic dielectric material FT 4 rated 4 When mixing multiple dissimilar signals the 25 pair Category 3 cable must support distances up to 100m 5 DC resistance 9 4 ohms 100m maximum 6 Mutual capacitance 5 6pF 100m 7 Characteristic Impedance 100 ohms 15 at 1 to 100MHz 28 Worst Pair Attenuation dB 100m MHz dB 1 00 2 6 4 00 56 8 00 8 5 10 00 91 57 16 00 T3 29 Worst Pair Near Crosstalk NEXT dB at 100m MHz dB 1 00 41 4 00 32 8 00 2 10 00 26 16 00 23 lt 2 Data backbone cabling shall consist of 21 Category 6 UTP 4 pair cable as specified in Clause 2 19 Horizontal Cabling 2 Multimode Optical Fiber 241 CSA or ULC certified 2 Insulation shall meet 4 rating 23 Core diameter 62 5 micron 3 micron 4 Cladding diameter 125 micron 2 micron pS Colored Fiber diameter 900 micron 15 micron 6 Numerical Aperture 0 275 0 015 d Buffering diameter 890mm 50mm 8 Proof strength 100 000 psi minimum 9 Fiber 1055 sd 3 5 dB km at 850nm maximum 22 1 0 dB km at 1300nm maximum 10 Bandwidth 21 200MHz at 850nm minimum 32 600MHz at 1300 nm minimum 11 Minimum bending radius of 20x cable diameter during installation and 10x cable diameter after installation minimum or as per manufacturers recommendations 12 Distribution sytle Project No 674
5. Alternate Emergency 120 208V amp 347 600V Page 2 Communication Centre PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Rating wall Secondary switchgear indoor 347 600V 3 phase 4 wire 60 Hz or 120 208 V 3 phase 4 wire 60 Hz as indicated on drawings Minimum interrupting capacity rms symmetrical as indicated on drawings but in any case no less than 14 000 Amps RMS symmetrical at 600 Volts and 10 000 Amps RMS symmetrical at 208 Volts Amperage rating as indicated on drawings 2 2 Enclosure 1 Distribution sections to contain 41 Molded case circuit breakers sized as indicated 2 High conductivity aluminum bus z3 Panel covers 4 Hinged doors with lock All locks to be keyed alike 2 Blanked off spaces for future units 23 Metal enclosed wall or floor mounted dead front indoor CSA Enclosure or 2 Sprinklerproof construction to suit local authority having jurisdiction which includes panel cover on distribution section 4 Switchboard to be CDP type 5 Access from front 2123 Busbars el Three phase and full capacity neutral bare busbars continuous current rating as indicated on drawings self cooled extending full height of cubicle suitably supported on insulators 49 Main connections between bus and major switching components to have continuous current rating to match major switching components Busbars and main connections 99 30 conductivity aluminum 4 Tin plated joints
6. operators for event trigger conditions aL Equal to 2 Not equal to 223 Greater than 4 Less than 29 gt Greater than or equal to 6 lt Less than or equal to 5 Logical Operators for Triggers The SMS shall the provide the following event trigger logical operators to allow the user to attach one or more of the logical operators with one or more of the event triggers and card actions listed above to program a custom sequenc 57 Or Time Zones The SMS shall provide define time zones with the following of events the capability for the user to identification and configuration parameters Alphanumeric name 22 Alphanumeric description Y ad 3 Allowance for up to eight periods during each day of the week and each and four inactive four active of three different holiday types 4 Any day of holiday Communications Pertaining to network based comn server and S321 CK7xx series controll the year may be each defined as one of designated as a three holiday types nunications between the ers MI Communications between th Server and the CK7xx series controllers can optionall y support a redundant network path Thus the loss of communications on the primary network path automatica communications to be established via without operato
7. PANEL SCHEDULE UA300 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 emefmemeann enm GAELECTRIC STOISCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 22 of 26 02 03 200810 39 AM PANEL UB300 LOCATION RM 132 FED FROM CDP UPS B LOCATION RM 104 m VA FTri TAPE LIBRARY 1000 2810 NETWORK RACKS 4 12 NETWORK RACKS 2810 5 6 RACK pM 482 1500 a z Load Designation TOWER RACKS TOWER RACKS TOWER RACKS 412 1500 TOWER RACKS np lt S o5 US 2 e gt da ce e 3 SEE e US EE 5 aa fee o o Us fo o oS e o wh wh a e e a 5 6 j 4 12 STORAGE TOWERS TAPE LIBRARY EM 2810 5 1650 STORAGE TOWERS P 15 45 1650 o psu 2 2810 350 16 2 2 e Je 1 e E z eo wo gt 3 gt amp 17 B 4 TAPE LIBRARY m STORAGE TOWERS 350 7 30A 1650 2810 48 1650 STORAGE TOWERS 19 49 1650 2 2 10 1
8. analysis of the data Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable 53 The heat detector shall have a nominal rating of 135 F 57 C 190 detectors to be provided in the Boiler Room or where indicated on plans 4 The heat detector shall have a minimum linear spacing rating of 60 foot 21 3m centers and be suitable for wall mount applications 25 Heat detectors noted or specified as WP or moisture proof shall be an epoxy sealed moisture proof type detector c w dedicated addressable monitor module SiGA CT1 CT2 Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 16 Communication Centre Two Stage 2 10 Ionization Smoke Detectors 21 The intelligent analog ion detector shall utilize unipolar ionization smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable 2 The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt smoke temperature aging and humidity The information shall be stored 4 in the integral processor and transferred to the analog
9. at Cal e a n the i implementing Should an Boxes y temporary conneci services during Work in the Sec coordinate the shut downs wit out the Work at a time and in ully schedule all disruption the duration of same is kep pproval a written all necessary material and equipment extra cost repairs without extra cost of Winnipeg and Contract Adminis brought Should any t to the Contract attention prior to Wor E Refer existing syst Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec concis least 120 hours in advance of performing Work and ty of Winnipeg s written consent tion 1601 tion tion tion 132 tion tion ere existing services such as electrical power etc are required to be disrupted and or th the City of Winnipeg a manner acceptable to and or shut downs and to sched the ul he building shall remain open and in normal operation during e construction period ire alarm absolute minimum of each and to cra 5 t prior TO tions be required to maintain existing building and provide all upply and install labour at no tem be damaged the satisfaction of the City If existing equipment shown on drawings is defective make full it shall be k completion to General Condit adhere to that schedule
10. Provide field dimensions required by electrical suppliers and sub subcontractors In cases where fabrication is required prior to field dimensions being available check all related drawings and obtain clarification from Contract Administrator if necessary be Main distribution and utility metering shop drawings mus approved by local utility prior to submission to Contract Administrator ct ct Incomplete submissions will be returned for updating and re submittal without Contract Administrator s review Mounting Heights X Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centre line of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise 4 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated verify before proceeding with installation Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise EM Local switches 1220mm Project No Alternat 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Emergency Requirements Page 17 Communication Centre wd Wall receptacles 21 General 400mm 2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater 200mm 23 Above top of counters or counter splashback 175mm 4 In mechanical rooms 915mm 3 Panelboards annunciators etc 2000mm to top 4
11. Luc harge shall be Charger circuitry shall tery charging current sufficient to replac tery discharge power within 10 ter battery is recharged charge until next emergency operation temperature compensated and microprocessor trolled to prolong ba tery Overvoltage Protection s voltag XC bypass ter al The ols ated to convert AC power ds the pr for support Output Converter times the d life There shall be DC overvoltage protection so that set limit automatically and critical load will be transferred UPS will s term inverter shall denote solid state equipment power from input convertor or ting the critical load At t t there shall b thr indep or each phas Th ctable hing at ut low lse with modulated fied AC output 20 kHz oad Capability T a load current have electronic c e to components T st any magnitude of ol logic shall ity is exceeded Balance Elec so invert above frequency magnet PWM he inver connec sense and disconnec cal AC load without the requiremen The UPS shall transfer t tronic controls shal that an unbalanced indicat ter ted rs shall using insulated gate bipol the audible tic components design capable of loads exceeding he load 1 be provided loading will ndently control produce 50 ar t
12. Technician C Kyle NN Date November 22 This document is printed on recycled paper SMS ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION CENTRE Approved By Reference CB Setup Date Detail Sheet JAN 2006 ED 10 SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com AA File No 05 015 01 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba INDICATION DETECTOR Locanr Main Fleer South By Rom 207 Roon 207 1 392 8 8 g Room 207 ub o w 072 1 828 Imi fo 22888 213 Photocopy N E 21 40 1 468 By aAtair ele le fe le E k je jE Technician C Kyle Date November 22 2004 This document fs printed on recycled paper SMS ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Drawn By Approved Byl Reference SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ona COMMUNICATION CENTRE 58 EE Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Dat
13. o 2 o WE Jo o a gt je 6 e m 6 ROOM RECEPTACLE gt 55 gt gt 0 U 2 m m 2o 4 9 gt gt O m m A o Ol ol lt 8 o 8 gt T SHUNT TRIP RM 131 N U M e US A gt FE M M U c c XI gt Sal o o m gt 2 gt I 21 2 5 Y 2 A amp JA 5 5 N a gt RM 129 0 gt 7 7 m m 0 gt gt 2 2 m m gt gt 4 m 2 a 2810 e U a gt M e RM 103 tan tA tA tA ves oo ON tA To Do 20 om w gt gt I m gt 2 e N 58 2 l le 63 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADSTOTAL PH A 5350 NOT INCLUDING PART1 CAPACITY TOTAL PH B 5600 NOT INCLUDING PART1 MOUNTING SURFACE FLUSH TOTAL PH C 7400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 REMARKS TOTAL 48460 INCLUDING PART 1 l PANEL SCHEDULE gt ENGINEERING EG PART 2 SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Strest Winnipeg MB Canada 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR Telephone 204 775
14. 8 9 001 e 9 001 5 00 J ee V 001 ee e e V i 00 eo 9 1 001 518 21212122 EIELEIE IEIEIRIEIEEZ D E o zt 9 g 129 2 23 me 0 Q S v 5 w c Dl o 5 X Ao 9 E 9 2 D 2 5 5 3 0 et A D gt z B 8 fn 8 5 2 5 2 S 2 5 5 jueuudinb3 jsenboy LO GLO SO vd 3NIOSINIS Aun urity Schedule 3SINIBOINE PARK DRIVE amber 05 015 01 a Notes uognqusng JOPUOW UOnisog 100 1 9 2 3 Auto Door Equipment JojeJedo uedo Jojoejeg Request for Exit aoea 1x3 penoy 10914 9514 9 3 3201 youmg e201 piegi 9 4 EE 1 Door 115 A 122 125 126 128 130 132 201 201 07 03 2006 Door Security Schedule 3 18 PM Page 2 of 4 9L y J0 oDeg 9002 20 20 S9JON 1oo SJOOp Bur
15. ET Unless specified provide control transformers controlling more than one relay and narrow type heaters shall be mounted in a separate matching enclosure adjacent to the heater PART 3 EXECUTION Svr Electric Heaters and Cables 41 Install wire and connect all convection type baseboard and fan forced wall heaters c w thermostats positioned as indicated on the drawings 22 Where remote thermostats are indicated in public areas such entrances washrooms corridors and other unsupervised areas install heavy duty ventilated plastic guards 2 9 Make power and control connections 4 Install relays transformers and thermostats 12 Interconnect heater relays to be controlled from one common thermostat Project No 674 2005 Motor Starters Section 16811 Alternate Emergency to 600 V Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 23 Wires and Cables Section 16122 4 Motor Control Centre Section 16820 1 2 Shop Drawings and Product Data 21 Submit sh Submittal op drawings in accordance with Section 01300 S 2 Indicate 21 Mounting method and dimensions 2 Starter size and type 23 Layout o
16. PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 1611 and Conduit Fittings 43 Fastenings 6 Supports Section 1619 152 Location 1 Locate splitters junction and pull boxes as indicated or as needed for each system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Splitters 1 Sheet metal enclosure welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position Sprinklerproof 22 Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated 3 Minimum three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters 4 Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit the hazardous classification 29 Weatherproof where installed outdoors 6 Enclosures in other areas to suit environment 2 2 Junction and Pull Boxes sl Welded steel construction with screw on flat covers for surface mounting 2 Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around for flush mounted pull and junction boxes 3 Cast type with gasketted covers wher xposed to weather 4 Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit the hazardous classification Project No 674 2005 Splitters Junction Section 16131 Alternate Emergency Pull Boxes Cabinets Page 2 Communication Centre and CSTE s Cabinets Type E sides sheet handle
17. VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 CAPACITY 225A PH B 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 REMARKS 80800 INCLUDING PART 1 PANEL SCHEDULE UB300 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 SIIS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0201 Fax 204 772 2153 emermemeeann eam GAELECTRIC STONSCHEDU LESWMST PNL XL S PANEL SCHEDULE 24 of 26 07 03 2008 10 38 PANEL UA400 FED FROM CDP UPS A TRAINING DESK TRAINING DESK 200 TRAINING DESK 1200 TRAINING DESK n TRAINING DESK TRAINING DESK 1200 TRAINING DESK 15A 1200 1 TAPE STORAGE ROOM 130 15A 8 TAPE STORAGE ROOM 130 15A 9 Lise SLE LOCATION RM 131 LOCATION RM 104 bkr Load No 15 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W CAPACITY 225A MOUNTING CUSTOM REMARKS VA PH A PH B PH C TOTAL ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE SIM S ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ONS Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 smefmemeann enm GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESIMST PNLXLS PANEL SCHEDULE 25 of 26 PANEL SCHEDULE UA400 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 07 03 200610
18. Manufacturers zx Cutler Hammer Schneider Square D Siemens Project No 674 2005 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426 Alternate Emergency 120 208V amp 347 600V Page 4 Communication Centre PART 3 EXECUTION 24d Installation zx Locate switchboard as indicated and mount securely plumb true and square to adjoining surfaces 2 Connect load side of breakers in distribution cubicles to distribution feeders 23 Check factory made connections for mechanical security and electrical continuity 4 Check trip unit settings against co ordination study to ensure proper working and protection of components Pes Where floor mounted arrange for switchboard to be mounted on 100mm housekeeping pad END Project No Alternat 67 4 2005 Communication Centre Section 16432 Page 1 Instrument Transformers PART 1 GE ERAL Electrical Related Work Specified PART Service 347 600V Main Dis Switchboards Main amp tie General Requirements Entrance Elsewhere Section 16010 Board Section 16421 tribution Air Ckt with CDP Brkrs Section 16422 Dist n 347 600V Main Distribution Switchboard Breaker Type Product Data Air Circuit Section 16423 Submit product data in accord
19. a gt gt m t a a Co o en gt gt e gt c VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS 13714 CAPACITY 225A PH B 11960 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 11111 REMARKS 36785 PANEL SCHEDULE ED 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ONS Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 amp me memecann enm GNELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LEBWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 4 of 26 07 03 200810 39 AM PANEL EF LOCATION RM 132 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 Designation 3 A 950 2012 0012 135 Load SPARE SPARE SPARE 3 g 5 ERE gt EM gt JE aek k po m 22 U U gt a gt M js CON JE E le o o 1 JE E a gt e a gt gt gt M a gt gt fl 2 lm e 8 T 42 3 VOLTAGE LOADS PH A 162 CAPACITY 225A 1085 MOUNTING CUSTOM 1700 REMARKS 2947 PANEL SCHEDULE EF 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 07 Ma
20. ction el ectricall by the Co All circu are corre provided ntract its shal Administra Administrator as a part test values measured date of person making with of be neatly recorded After all tests have each test report shall contain a that all results were satisfactory equipment d in the presence of the Contract te that all equipment furnished and t of this section of the contract y in the required manner as determined ll be tested to ensure that the circuit numbers ct and and installed that the proper neutral conductors have been Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternat Emergency Requirements Page 19 Communication Centre Voltage tests shall be conducted and transformer taps adjusted or other corrective measures carried out as directed by the Contract Administrator Refer also to 4 1 Care Operation and Start Up el Carry out on site testing and commissioning of all high voltage and low voltage switchgear including Visual inspection 22 Operational tests 3 Meggar tests 4 Contact resistance tests 25 Phasing checks 6 Metering Sd Relay operation 28 Fluid levels 19 Hi pot tests 2 Submit a report that includes test results observations summary etc Test report to clearly state that all results are acceptable Cutting and Patching
21. Raintight connectors and fittings c w O rings Steel set screw connectors and couplings Insulated throat ror use on weatherproof or sprinklerproof enclosures Raintight couplings to be used for surface conduit installations exposed to moisture or sprinkler heads Explosion proof in hazardous areas to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction Expansion Fittings for Rigid Conduit Weatherproof expansion suitable f 4 fittings with internal bonding assembly or 100 or 200 mm linear expansion Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection in all directions Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel Fish Cord Polypropylene c w 3m spare length at each conduit end EXECUTION Installation Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass Conceal conduits excep rooms Use rigid galvanized si t in mechanical and electrical service teel threaded conduit where specified Use epoxy coated conduit in corrosive areas Project No 674 2005 Conduits Conduit Section 16111 Alternate Emergency Fastenings and Page 3 Communication Centre Conduit Fittings TO Use electri
22. Special Source Q Factory panels wit test generat transfer switch h specifications ter replacement ilter r filt E uality Control and Contract Administratorp lements replacement elements er elements 2 sets of fuses for control panel tools for unit 3 pairs of ear protectors 1 set of belts servicing tor set including engine accessories etc send certified test rior to shipping e to ensure results alternator control compliance to the Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 4 Communication Centre ES Site Test 21 Provide on Site testing of complete generator set installation including engine alternator control panels transfer switch and accessories environmental system fuel system etc Testing shall be performed by factory trained representative of the diesel generator set supplier 22 Ensure room environment control is operational and that all controls required for generator set operation are fed from emergency circuits 3 Notify Contract Administrator 7 days in advance of on site test 4 Tests 41 Test procedure 1 Prepare blank forms and check sheet with spaces to record data At top of first sheet record 1 Date lt 2 Generator set serial no i3 Engine make model serial no 4
23. Cutting patching and repairs to existing surfaces required as a result of the removal and or relocation of existing equipment and piping and or installation of new equipment and piping in existing building s to be included by Div 16 Electrical in Bid Submission price Division 16 Electrical to employ and pay appropriate Subcontractor whose work is involved for carrying out work described above Perform all cutting and patching required for installing electrical systems Division 16 shall retain services of Contractor to carry out actual work involved in cutting wall openings floor openings and the like and in patching up after installation has been completed Division 16 shall mark all openings required for conduits cables ducts and the like Cutting to be neat sizes Patch all edges such as cover plates etc Hide cut edges qat in the opinion of Contract Administrator cutting of holes has been improperly performed i e too large for conduits or cables Division 16 Electrical to do all patching as per original specifications and all costs will be borne by him Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 Page 20 Tat Excavation and Excavate and services as indicated over se
24. Electric discharge 1 Tungsten halogen lamps Incandescent lamps to lders Lampho lders CSA C10 to CSA HID lamps to ANSI C78 series Fluorescent lamps to ANSI C78 Ballasts to CSA C22 2 No 74 and CSA C22 2 No 84 C22 2 No 84 series Plastic lenses and diffusers ULC labelled Luminaire Details Provide supporting devices pl outlet boxes where required Provide lenses or diffusers of indicated Acrylic lenses used with f be a K 12 pattern wit Provide gasketting Recessed luminaires shall be suitable for mounting in stops and barriers to prevent light th a minim X Luminaires shall carry the CSA label to CSA C22 2 No 43 to CSA C22 2 No 74 Incandescent and electric discharge fixtures to CSA C22 2 No aster frames junction boxes and glass or acrylic material as luorescent luminaires shall um of 125 3mm thickness Include finishes to Section 16010 and as indicated t leaks the particular type of ceiling where the luminaires ar mounted Lamps Provide lamps as indicated Fluorescent lamps T12 shall 20 000 hours cool whi Incandescent lamps to b 130 volts inside frosted xten unle te unles to ded service type rated 2500 hours Ss indicated otherwise be rapid start 3100 lumens rated S other indicated Project No
25. P2000 System Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 10 4153 or re display i He Map layer indica associated with the top system layer 44 flash Sta Intercom Station received for a s connect or disconnect t map can display tion Idl set ts current sta the output point tus In addition set reset S by clicking on t tation on the map and t Id e Sta SMS up 57 indicate a status of Events a map rat 9 Loop Tamper loop indicate a status of set Cameras 8 from 10 input consists of the window 2 Alarm moni alarms in the q can be inputs 23 User de allows t t poin 4 Alarm inpu and sorted by column to direc to displ shall provide the toring window displays ueue and the number of alarms pending Users can select user unlocked icons will or unknown f eit Events can her points and the inp handling portion of point contacts and tly access map layer associated descriptions appear in the form of tes tha Station Busy tion Call Request 25 Reader Terminals following icons 6 Panels Panel down I O Terminals or Status will unknown a system panel tatus of secure the system the alarm monitoring following
26. construction is completed Insert as part of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals Operation and Maintenance Manuals Provide Operation and Maintenance data for Voice and Data Communications Pathway for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 Submittals Include o Technical data illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers lt 2 Copy of approved shop drawings with corrections completed and marks removed except for reviewed stamps 13 Complete Record Drawings Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternat Communication Centre Communications Pathway Emergency Page 3 PART 2 2 1 wal i2 2 2 2 3 21 22 PRODUCTS Materials Equipment and materials to be CSA or ULC certified Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA or ULC certified obtain special approval from local Electrical Inspection Department or authority having jurisdiction Submit for Contract Administrator s approval a duplicate list of shop drawings for this project prior to placing of orders for same Equipment Backboards Equipment backboards shall be 19mm3 4in plywood backing located as shown on drawings Cable Tray Trough type Cable Tray 1 Cable Tray and fittings to EEMAC F5 1 1977 m Ladder type Class Cl to CSA C22 2 No 126 M1980 230mm9in rung spacin
27. features designed to assist The SMS shall allow customer define parameters to assure FDA Part to FDA Title 21 Code of 11 concerning electronic to 11 compliance The Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre P20 Security Management 00 Section 16902 Page 25 Integrated System following are general SMS Video Audi activity alarms changed 22 Au t Trail and more are acknowledged Part 11 requirements applicable to the s The SMS shall provide valuable time stamped reports to monitor day to day operator such as how the hardware is contro led when when cardholder records are The SMS software shall limit thorized Users system access only to authorized individuals Authorized users shall combination of user name and password these individuals hall for periodica Additiona y and s ly multiple invalid login attempts and shall be identified by their unique The passwords shall be configured to change have a minimum password length the software shall disable user access on provide for automatic 23 log off due to user inactivity Record Validation The SMS software shall provide a tampering tool to detect unauthorized record icat ture modi signa ion 5 5 The SMS shall validate digital pointing
28. Communication Centre Emergency Security System Integrated Management Section 16902 Page 2 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Security Management System 5 5 integrating multiple building alarm management database partitioning monitors CCTV switches be capable of inter and digital video MIS interface with CCTV and Intercom intrusion detect ion shall be capable of unctions including access control video imaging and badging acing to closed circuit television recording DVR and interfacing with intercom equipment controlling elevators cardholder information and queries from external sys mai trix shall also as well as allowing tem databases For this project the card access is integrated The system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories listed for UL 294 Burglar Alarm Systems job shall carry the UL 294 and UL Access Control Systems PC s and all and UL control Bidders shall state their product The system shall be modular in nature 1076 Proprietary lers furnis 1076 labels as required hed on the is found on UL s certification website and shall provide the corresponding URL and will permit expansion in both capacity and functionality through the addition of controllers card readers number of cards and sensor
29. S p S be granted nediately the date and time when permission If this is not specified then h time when 5 local global stopping date and try exit synchronization SMS E un Special Access the SMS s requirement ntry Exit Enforcement application shall be expanded to include system wide readers allow synchronization of badge status across multipl This feature is not recommended for medium and large less using panels CK7xx of version 2 5 h Disabil hall provide special access setting up a door s access ts for assisted access according to This feature shall e or higher that allows time to be different to satisfy ADA Americans wit up Additionally relay in conjunction with the granting of assisted access Port gl 1 SMS s installa config Email Set 2 The be used tion ured at ttings SMS s to sen to three special access flags cardholder that Configuration hall al assigned to system applications during sof Some of these values must match the panel hall all d e mail requires special access at the SMS shall provide the activation of an ADA low changing default port ities Act The system shall provide and then assign them to a a door values that tware the values ow settin
30. Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 2 Communication Centre PART 2 Detailed instructions to permit effective operation maintenance and repair Technical data el Schematic diagram of components controls and relays 42 Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers ed Certified copy of factory test results Source Quality Control Complete equipment including transfer mechanism controls relays and accessories factory assembled and tested Tests 21 Operate equipment both mechanically and electrically to ensure proper performance 1 2 Check selector switch in 4 positions Test Auto Manual Engine Start and record results 23 Check voltage sensing and time delay relay settings 4 Check Automatic starting and transfer of load on failure of normal power 2 Retransfer of load when normal power supply resumed 23 Automatic shutdown 4 In phase monitor operation where provided PRODUCTS Materials Meters to 17 Instrument transformers to CAN3 C13 Contactors to NEMA ICS Automatic Transfer Switch Three phase contactors mounted on common frame in double throw arrangement mechanically and electrically interlocked solenoid operated with CSA sprinkler proof enclosure To have integral bypass Rated 347 600V 60 Hz Refer to drawings for amperage rating Main contacts sil
31. Input Suppressed Output Reset Output Set Door Unlocked Panel version mismatch Muster Operable Muster Degraded Muster Inoperable 30 Control Points pa The SMS shall allow input points to be defined as control points when used in input output linking and event processing sequences of operation Control points shall not enter the alarm queue and shall not require that an operator acknowledge them when they change state The control point activity will however be automatically logged to the history file 31 Workstation Control ERI The SMS shall allow workstations to be assigned a name and to have the following capabilities 4 Be identified as either workstation only or workstation video badging 22 Have a time zone to define the period to be in use 28 Assign message filtering to define the messages that can be transmitted to the workstation 4 Have an enable disable toggle button to allow or deny operator login at the workstation 32 Real time Printer T The SMS shall have the ability to print either to a network accessible printer or to an LPT port The toggle button may b ither enabled or disabled to allow real time printing and the following print parameters may be independently defined Alarms Access grant Access denied B
32. Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards Project No Alternat 674 2005 Grounding Emergency Secondary Communication Centre Section 16450 Page 3 Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to steel Make grounding connections in radial configuration only street side of connections terminating at single ground water pipe Avoid loop connections Bond single conductor metallic armoured 14 supply end and provide non metallic ent All complete with boxes junction boxes pull boxes conduit system shall be continuous but s serve as the equipment grounding means be sized according to the Canadian E conduit runs containing feeders and branch an insulated green ground wire bonded to all outl equipment enclosures ing point cabl ry pl es circuits with to cabinet at ate at load end shall be et etc The hall not be relied on to Ground rical Code but Elect minimum 12 AWG All locknuts and coupli tightened All flexible conduit shall in wire and shall be properly grounded thro conductors shall shall be ngs shall be securely clude ugh an talled in all approved A separate ground conductor shall be ins or plastic duct runs and shall be connec grounding of the system A minimum 43 0 AW
33. mmus o Roan 208 Sake By Hoon 102 101 IM IDCATII Hignnis al Yrs amp 2 1 d 1 B10 810 810 un iii 1 810 By 101 EH By Holler Roos Boiler Roca 2310 TEG Technician C Kyle Date November 22 2004 This document is printed on recycled paper CONSTRUCTION OF AN Al TERNATE SMS Engi um 7 FAL LE EMERGENCY Drawn By Approved Reference n ineering v nsSulung Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ona COMMUNICATION CENTRE AA 0 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet 5 5 5 zn 5 2 2 5222 _ 100 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG e ee 23 2 SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R2H ONS COMMUNICATION CENTRE A Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet sms smseng com ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba Ili TR Ir SUPERVISION 8 E 8 TAE PE Merth Stpir IRE By Cantro Stair 300 Roon 303 By JAR ili K
34. PART 3 condition and include an audible alarm to indicate module failure Non Linear Panelboard El The panelboard shall be approved to CSA specification C22 2 No 29 M1989 The TVSS device shall be UL 1449 Component Recognized The TVSS device shall have passed all UL testing required by the UL 1449 standard Panelboard markings shall include clamp voltage at the TVSS terminals as well as clamp voltage at the panelboard line terminals 22 The unit shall be top or bottom feed according to requirements circuit directory shall be located inside the door 3 The box shall be code gauge steel The box size shall be as indicated on the associated schedules drawings 4 The main bus shall be aluminum and rated for current required 9 The unit shall be provided with branch circuit breakers All available types of circuit breakers can be provided as required No modification to the interior of the unit shall limit the selection of circuit breakers 6 The unit shall include a 200 rated neutral assembly with aluminum neutral bus 7 The unit shall be provided with an insulated ground bus and a safety ground bus 8 The field connections or main breaker 9 The unit shall be constructed with flush or surface mounted trim and shall be in a EEMAC 1 enclosure 10 The panelboard shall be supplied with the appropriate branch breaker positions and nominal current rating as indicated on the assoc
35. The use of colored backboards connections covers or labels are an approved method of color coding for the cross connect Ei Te UT elds sting P Cabling Testing shall be made in accordance with EIA TIA TSB67 and 292 of nu ac CO i3 te 4 9 la 6 pe EIA TIA 568A Annex A Test kit must have been calibrated re calibrated within one ar prior to test results submitted Provide a dated paper copy the calibration re calibration report Include serial mber s firmware version and date of manufacturer An credited laboratory that is traceable to NIST must have mpleted the calibration Only special adapters and or special patch cables or OEM of St kit are allowed to be used to perform a Channel Link test Test results must show a headroom figure for each cable Test reports must be from software firmware that is the test version Test kit must test for stray noise on the cable prior to rforming test Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 17 Communication Centre Cabling 7 The following tests shall be performed and recorded all the individual Voice and Data Communications cables from both directions using a level 2 tester at 100MHz sweeps 21 Continuity or wiremap testing consi
36. Weight Input Output zb Video 21 val Digital Disk Recorder Power Source Power Consumption t Operat t Operat Dimensions 7 16 x 13 3 4 approx Video DVR WJ HD316A or approved equal W x H x 9 Input 1 75 o 120V AC approx ting Temperature ting Humidity Standard Hard Disk Drive Unit Bay for additional HDD Unit 60 Hz D 5 kg hm NTSC co with au multipl 22 with au 8 input Cascade Video O s tomatic exed con 1Vp p 75 o termination 85W 45 1 m 1 420 x 88 x 350mm 20 9 lbs posi 14 Less than 90 160GB bay 160GB 16 9 16 te video signal ing through trol data hm NTSC co tomatic 9 16ch Input utput 1Vp p 75 active looping 592 1 75 o termination 8 inp posi ut 1 8ch 1 te video signal BNC ing through 2 BNC 1 75 oh NTSC co 8 hm through hm with automatic 8 input 9 16ch 2 itor Ou tor Termina pin Video Ou 4 25 D sub 6 S termin 7 1 term Moni Moni 15 al Video Outp inal tpu termination NTSC com m 1 posi C te video signal nput 1 8ch 1 BNC
37. h one watchdog circuit al ind cylinder locked dow Opening of include a watchdog circuit itor the proper operation of every syst for all the mod d ted by staff IN PROGRESS chnology t per individual module processor to tem processor ules are not considered All components must be housed in an approved enclosure door with a viewing t expose live components removable hinge the panel door must no reset cleared tion via pullstation key switch ne out will cause all to go into general evacuation rate all annunciators and in addition to the be modular in construction with multi distributed processing Systems Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 8 4410 SH or wiring prevent any obstruction management procedures or The base system board mu loops as shown on the dr 1 5 A each as shown on t trouble relays alphanumeric LCD annunci 24 VDC supply communica digitally controlled bat CEC he system must be fully equired logical sequenc oftware timers accurate unctions The timers ma econd to four hours HY he system sof unctions including annu and damper control Fh rH The system must be capab The total system one way than 2 5 seconds on a sy System communication bet DCLB via
38. ta with th lemen The SMS shall provide redundancy er ous that 1 the impact of system failure I Sys to view and ac commands Regional Sites e central Si ted using Microsoft a tem It knowledge prin ubset with share granted Enterpris Site system Each S essen ailure de be undancy sys tected nt Sas apaci able to suppor access groups te alarm input poin or any combina ts or up tion in be and taken over by the tems available DL380 Packaged Cl ication and backup functions ter recovery system back capabilities using NSI tware to provide database mirroring and the function uster Redundancy A high availability ter system with failover and fail uster ty to accommodate the up to o 8 000 tween Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 28 Communication Centre System 4 Up Server via an Central transactions panel s events 6 25 torage capabil 6 levels of a Ethernet TCP IP ne online data storage expandable as sys ity of up arm priorit zd A cardholder 8 255 iss minim um of ten 10 to 200 000 cardhol individual twork tem resources allow lders y Each badge shall be ue levels per card
39. 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Section 16747 Page 10 Voice and Data Communications Cabling channel shall meet the r hardware provided quirements specified with the connecting Jacks shall be an unshielded T568A wiring configuration Ca Patch Panels tegory 3 Patch Panels shall be Cat jack on face to d configuration to termina cabling system All patch panels one manufacturer Designation strips shall be provided for each jack A1 10 terminations on rear of panel shall be CSA or ULC approved and shall 8 position 8 conductor modular Wiring te 2 pairs per port on telephone backbone tegory 3 be of cables shall be terminated in numerical sequence and labeled as per approved labelling scheme Ca Patch Panels shall be 8 position face to 110 terminations on rear of T568A tegory 6 Patch Panels 8 conductor modular jack on f panel Wiring patterns to be All patch panels shall be CSA or ULC approved and shall be of one manufacturer Termination blocks shall have the following characteristics 21 Type all plastic insulants 22 Termination type insulation displacement dry gas tight 3 Vire Size supported 24AWG 4 Retermination rate greater than 200 L5 Wire insertion force 24AWG 59 127 Newtons 6 lire retention force 24AWG 81b
40. Manufacturers t and materials to be CSA or ULC ternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA obtain special approval Administrator s approval this project as specified prior there or ULC certified Where from local Electrical tment or authority having jurisdiction termination hardware shall be of one list placing a duplicate to lowing is a list of approved manufacturers for the voice and data cabling system Additional approved manufacturers for miscellaneous hardware shall be as noted in specif ad 2 Equipment Equipment Systimax Racks racks shall meet Constructed of lightweight color Complete Rack h sides of Rack h facilita Equipmen 1 ardware must ardware shall dimensions mounting with steel ANSI E Ei ications IA 310 steel the equipment rack 22 33 4 foo hole pattern Screw size Each equipment electronics s Acceptable Manufacturer tprint 10 24 thread be provided with a top cable trough te cable management rack or cabinet designa hall be provided with a s Tripp Lite I charcoal gray or black in mounting hardware provide vertical wire management on both t rack frames shall meet the following specifications 7ft x 20 3in x 3in with 18 5 16in center 20 3in length x 15in depth 5 8in
41. Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 23 Communication Centre Two Stage watt input over a frequency range of 50 to 13000 Hz Provide a flat white baked enamel finish Coat the speaker backboxes with a resonance damping material Flush mounted speakers to be Type 1 surface mounted speakers to be Type 2 PART Use tra Cd axi fre on Str cir zt End of Line Devices eight ohm re entrant horn speakers with matching nsformers parallel connected to supervised 70 volt signal page cuits Provide input power taps at 1 2 4 7 5 Watts Provide al sensitivity of 88 db at 10 feet for a 2 Watt input over a quency rage of 400 to 4000 Hz Mount flush or surface as shown the plans obes shall be ULC listed and operate on supervised alarm cuits at 20 to 24V DC Strobe shall have a red filter Provide high impact plastic red end of line plates with Screw terminations as required for all conventional circuits amp bell circuits As Built Riser Diagram Remote alarm system riser diagram Refer to Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements EXECUTION Installation Install systems in accordance with CAN ULC S524 DFC 410 M manufacturer s requirements authorities having jurisdiction etc power supply as indicated on drawings Locate and install manual alarm sta
42. fer to the normal source Engine cool down provision Factory set at 4 minutes 29 Adjustable close differential voltage sensing on all phases of the normal source Pickup voltage adjustable from 85 510V to 100 600V of nominal Dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 of pickup Factory set at Pickup 90 540V Dropout 855510 6 Adjustable close differential voltage sensing on two phases of the emergency source Pickup voltage adjustable from 85 510V to 100 600V of nominal Factory set at Pickup 95 570V 7 Adjustable frequency sensing of emergency source Pickup adjustable from 90 54 Hz to 100 60 Hz Factory set at Pickup 95 57 Hz 8 Three spare normally open auxiliary contacts and three Spare normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided 2 4 Accessories zal Pilot lights to indicate switch position green for normal red for standby mounted in panel Lamps to be LED type 22 Solid neutral lt 3 Auxiliary relay to provide 8 N O and 8 N C contacts for remote alarms 4 Solid state electronic monitors Voltage sensing three phase with time delay and circuit opening closing arrangement 22 Under Over frequency sensing with adjustable differential for nominal frequency of 60 Hz with 2 N O and 2 N C contacts repetitive accuracy plus or minus 0 2 Hz
43. SPARE gt I so gt A m 2 N gt S gt N gt SPARE ls fe S gt e gt gt CALL TAKERS 1 OFFICE 124 1R E e gt ja N o jo e gt RERBA e fe OFFICE 124 1R SPACE gt a gt N a TELEPHONE BACKBOARD gi gt WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 4 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 4 WIRING CLOSET 125 N e e a gt S 8 gt gt B co e e a gt gt e e e WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 5 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 5 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 5 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 1 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 1 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 1 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 2 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 2 nN e gt A e e a gt N e gt A e e Ss gt gt ja o o ie e gt 2 e 5 ES gt a gt 8 gt e e e e e M gt a a a 7 FP 8 8 gt gt a BEI WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 2 SPACE 15512125 212 20 WIRING CLOSET 125 28 58 1600 RACK 3 SPACE Serer 20A WIRING CLOSET 125 29 B 59 1600 3 22121 WIRING CLOSET 8125 30 C RACK 3 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS PH A
44. any one power semiconductor sha to ba tion o PFC t in prot 1 be part of an assembly known as which provides power to ly improving input power usage to tection against and overvoltage conditions introduced on primary AC source hall sus hall have output f ttery Under no conditions shall ttery exceed 2 RMS utility ut convert utage and prior inp to UPS er shall automatically restart ttery recharge loads teria listed in ANSI tain category A amp B input ll not cause ilter to minimize AC power after a utility automatic end of discharge and Project No 67 Alternate Emer 4 2005 Communication gency Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 6 Inver Gener 21 contr regul outpu one f sele Switc witho of pu speci Overl 1 regul full indic shall damag again contr criti fuses Phase me phase volta displ 2 Upon restoration of u tility AC power af ter utility AC power outage and after automatic end of discharge shutdown input converter shall automatically restart assume the inverter and bat ttery recharge loads configurable for automatic or manual restart shall be user selectable from UPS control panel or remote terminal tery Recharge
45. steel lock and catch f Type T sheet steel cabinet keys flush or with hinged door containing 19 mm 615 fir plywood backboard surface mounted as indicated hinged door and return flange overlapping or surface mounting latch lock 2 Cabinets to be Provide other systems cabinets as specified and located on 10 SEL 12 drawings CUSTOMER SERVICE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE Refer to Single Line Distribution Schematic for Amperage Voltage amp KAIC ratings Enclosure shall be CSA 3R rated padmount design free standing Single or double outer doors with 3 point latching and padlocking provision Service entrance approved by Manitoba Hydro Service entrance approved including individual Dead front construction c w Continuous 13 x 25mm ground bus 5 Constructed from 12 Ga Standards Paint finish shall Urethane over zinc based rust inhibitive primer 61 gray minimum steel tepped bus assembly of tin plated aluminum Integral barriers welded sub breakers Refer to single line distribution schematic if required IAW CWB 47 1 be 2 coats of outdoor UV and rust resistant Color to be ASA Lug prov contract isions for line and load conductors Coordinate with the or amp utility for all lug sizes Minimum provisions are 4 2 2 hole NEMA
46. 4 External bypass switches shall meet the following 24 Provide in separate sprinklerproof enclosures by pass switches located as shown on drawings 2 By pass switches shall be totally enclosed sprinklerproof dead front fabricated from formed and welded 12 gauge steel and front accessible only Enclosure shall be painted uniformly with two coats of ASA61 grey Prior to painting enclosure shall be cleaned and throroughly phosphatized Enclosure to have a door with lock Locks shall be keyed the same as the panelboards i3 By pass switches shall be moulded case non auto type as indicated on drawings Breakers shall contain auxiliary contacts for breaker position These contacts shall be wired to by pass position indicating lights Interrupting capacity of breakers to match rating of upstream breakers feeding the by pass switch 4 Enclosure shall have a 120 Volt section at the top by pass indicating lights The 120 Volt section shall be barriered from the circuit breaker section This section shall contain transformer if required fusing terminal strips for all wire terminations heavy duty watertight neon indicating lights etc as required All wiring shall be identified Refer to drawings v9 Bus bars shall be tin plated copper braced to withstand a short circuit current of 50 000 Amperes symmetrical at 600 Volts Neutral bus where required shall be full size Ground bus shall be copper 6 Supply and install slide bolt type int
47. 8 15 JINGAHDS YOLOW 410 y 31003 25 YOLOW SEO CITAS LO SLO SO gor INYA YYYd 3NIOSINISSV 004 129fo4g oc SL NOISIAIG Ag HJTIOHLNOO HOS de voe A80c 8 OLL WY WOO 4 91419513 9 088 LY LOANNOOSIG 3GlAOSd 2919 0 8 GL NOISIAIG A8 H3TIOHINOO HOS 82 de Vvor agoz OL ee Wes WOO LV3H3MW 51919573 voa LINA LV LO3NNOOSIG E GL NOISIAID HJTIOHLINOO MOS 0 agoz 29 LEL Wa WOO LWAHSY OIH bO3T13 coya LINN LV LOANNOOSIC Le Ov VN Ol GL NOISIAIG MATIONLNOO HOS d voe ze SOL WY WOOD LV3H38 5913155713 cod LINN LY LOANNOOSIC 3GalAOMd 6 8E VN L SL NOISIAID HS3TIOHINOO NOS 959 agoz 0L Wa WOO IV3H3 41 0273 LINN LV LOANNOOSIC 26 O VN d vol 15 1 5 SL NOISIAIG S IOHLNOO Q39VMOVd SHE V dd29 A009 09 WOOD 21519913 LINN LY LO3NNOOSIG l dV IMVHO de vs e ev Lr d3 A80c LSVAHLYON LINN 4na dwv 3OdS IMVHD dcVsc 66 83 A80c 1SV3HLYON LINN 5 l d wvO 69 89 H3 Agoz 996 2004 LINN Sino oL d voe oL 19 99 H3 80z 99 2 4004 LINN ONISN3Q
48. Exit Lights Section 16519 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL Electrical Related Work Specified El sewhere General Requirements Section Lighting Equipment PART 2 Product Data Section 16010 16505 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 PRODUCTS E finish required Letters reading EX No external Exit Lights General universal canopy mount Extruded aluminum 2 00 mm Face plate to remain captive for relamping Housing Slim Line 2 0 mm I Lamps LED light bar type c w internall Designed for 10 years of continuous operat 153 mm high x 20 mm wide white f TIA X thick stencil ace thick heavy duty extruded aluminum white powder coat finish c w snap out directional arrows and Entire fixtures to meet CSA C860 white powder coat Ly mounted transformers as tion without relamping aceplate on red glass holes or slots to eliminate light leaks Built in switch over relays for 12 Volt DC operation Units c w punch out directional arrows as required Units c w universal mounting canopies as required Shall comply with CSA 860 Project No 674 2005 Exit Lights Section 16519 Alternate Emergency Page 2 Communication Centre PART 3 EXECUTION 24d Installation
49. colour Eme with an additional 75 m appropriate adjacent to tape the 150 mm as listed below identified Paint or ot shall not be used 23 Color code wire in cond follow Phase A Phase Phase Neutra Ground 5 B b red ack C b 1 white green ate wires and cables with appropriate connectors in an and smaller shall have solid coloured as listed below and larger and single conductor cables s shall be identified at each outlet box and termination with a 150 mm band of coloured vinyl tape of the rgency power feeders m band of band of the coloured Neutral shall be provided red vinyl tape installed USE phase identification and ground conductors shall be her means of colouring the insulation uit and single conductor cables as 4 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout project 5 Use colour coded wires in communication cabl hout system throug 6 Identi contac marker 7 Refer tors 5 fire alarm y control conductors in motor control panels etc with my to 16010 for additional requirements es matched equipment lar cloth wire END Project No 674 2005 Splitters Junction Section 16131 Alternate Emergency Pull Boxes Cabinets Page 1 Communication Centre and CSTE s
50. exceed 3000mm providing and information is given before Locate light switches on latch side of doors Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of door Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternat Emergency Requirements Page 10 Communication Centre Load Balance Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads lighting operating at time of acceptance Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes Measure phase voltage at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2 of rated voltage of equipment Submit at completion of work report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards dry core transformers and motor control centres operating under normal load State hour and date on which each load was measured and voltage at time of test Provide copy of report in all maintenance manuals Conduit and Cable Installation Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete Sleeves through concrete Schedule 40 steel pipe sized for free E passage of conduit and protruding 50mm each side E If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors remove before conduit installation X Install cables conduit and fittings to be embedded or plastered
51. le shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic Ag with the loop contro arm status The modu of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes 6 North American The dual input modul Dix 1727 64mm le shall be suitable deep 1 gang 1 square box with 1 gang cover reen LED shall ller A red LED le shall be capable flash or mounting on 1 2 38mm deep 4 Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 20 Communication Centre Two Stage 287 8 Termin The terminal in put module shal S shall following environment 9 of addressing s Sin d 2 D1 gle sat provid The Humidity It shall be possible P or rotary switches Devices using DI t be acceptable hall no Signal tell nput int Temperature ligent 0 93 RH Module Single I app 2 sit ap Con Epr sha 3 fau 4 LED fla ed Nort deep 6 side of the assem 2 the 8 the swi Control The 24 Vdc Sys where amp rating of Control 2 Cems The position of the relay contact sys tches Relay Modul intelligent micro processor based Control Relay Module shall provide one to control control relay shall on 24 vdc liances The perso e to suit c ersonalit troller Si na
52. rate of rise heat detector CRI3S CE 90 awe m dC wm mam SA date smote tam duersmote daear _ f g ah 5 uS A 2 5 CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION CENTRE SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com Setup Date JAN 2006 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG CONTROL EQUIPMENT TEST RECORD Every line must have the appropriate marking in the space provided Y YES 2 plaNot Applicable tested correctly did not test correctly not provided on this fire alarm system sls CONTROL PANEL TESTS Power on indicator Y M Common Visual Trouble Signal Common Audible Trouble Signal Trouble Signal Silence Switch KM 5 Main Power Supply Failure Trouble Signal Ground Detection Trouble ye amp ve Alert Signal Operation 0 7 Alarm Signal Operation 0 Automatic Transfer From Alert Signal to Alarm Signal Acknowledge Switch Operation Alarm Signal Silence Inhibit Alarm Signal Silence Operation Alarm Signal Silence Visual Indication Alarm Signal Silence Subsequent Alarm Alarm Signal Silence Automatic cut out Timer Input Circuit Alarm amp Super
53. 1 4 il 2 1 9 wall 21 particular unit s manufactured by s Three phase circuit strength ntenan om ion an dm anual upplied and not upplier and ce Data ain speci mechanical and tenance data for diesel generator for fied in Section 16010 d Maintenance Manual instructions for general description of units manual engine to permit Operation and maintenance instructions for engine alternator control panel automatic transfer switch bypass switch battery charger battery fuel system ventilation system exhaust system accessories etc ffective operation maintenance and repair 12 Technical data 1 Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers 22 Schematic diagram of electrical controls 23 Flow diagrams for Fuel system 22 Lubricating oil 3 Cooling system 4 Certified copy of factory test results 25 Certified copy of Site test results 6 Maintenance and overhaul instructions and schedules Complete set of service manuals ar to b th as those issued to factory trained technicians out S Precise details for adjustment and setting am of time delay relays or sensing controls which are required on Site adjustment 8 Maintenance Mater Include 2 fuel ials Spare parts list 2 lube oil f 2 air cleane
54. 118 121 WASHROOM RECEPTACLE 100 1R RM 120 WASHROOM RECEPTACLE 100 1R RM 120 2 gt k N gt I c m A m U z Q 20 O m gt e 1 7 m 0 gt e e e e e gt gt 27 A w gt a gt ERC 6 dl 30A 15A psu RECEPTACLES RM 112 1700 200 2R ERC 7 E p 15A p HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES 1000 27 200 2R RM 111 112 15A WASHROOM RECEPTACLE 1000 7 28 100 1R RM 113 BASEBOARD HEATER ROOM 120 gt WASHROOM RECEPTACLE 100 1R RM 113 e ag 500 m 15A ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE 100 11 RM 115 a 15 ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE 10 100 18 RM 115 15 ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES 11 100 2 115 n 15A SPARE 12 Ww Uu uu m m 15A 3R HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES w 21 101 VOLTAGE 120 208 30 4 LOADS PH A 1920 CAPACITY 225A PH B 3000 MOUNTING SURFACE REMARKS PANEL SCHEDULE ND PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H 0 3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STOYSCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL NE LOCATION RM 201 FED FROM 2CDP A LOCATION RM 115
55. 2 Clearly identify zones on control panels devices etc Identify wires and cables with wire markers to indicate zone numbers Identify wiring in each box panel cabinet etc Coding of identification to meet with the approval of the Contract Administrator 35 Wiring and Conduit wl Install wiring in an independent conduit system y2 Install device backboxes to form part of the conduit system Conduit to be sized to accommodate the wiring being installed 3 6 Testing wilt The complete system shall be tested in the presence of the Contract Administrator and the City of Winnipeg s representative on completion of the Work Tests shall demonstrate that the CCTV System will function in an acceptable manner 3v Installation 21 Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 8 Tests 21 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 END LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE Project 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE SMS EI Project Number 05 015 01 124 FIXT APPROVED TYPE LAMPS VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION NOTES MANUFACTURERS oq i 2x4 RECESSED DIRECT INDIRECT C W DIMMING BALLAST 2 T5 HO 120V ALTER QVL2GPFSS255120BFDIMR 2x4 RECESSED DIRECT INDIRECT AX 2 T5 HO 120 MATCH TYPE AA EXCEPT ALTER QVL2GPFSS255120B NO DIMMING BALLAST AB 40W 120 ALTER QVW8SPF0S2FT120SBR TTS RECESSED 2
56. 225A PH B 20650 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 20650 REMARKS TOTAL 64600 NOT INCLUDING PART 2 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PANEL SCHEDULE UA300 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 eme Aeman enm G ELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 21 of 26 07 03 2008 10 30 PANEL UA300 LOCATION RM 132 FED FROM CDP UPS A LOCATION RM 104 Load Ck bkr Phase VA 600 A 3P 62 65 Designation Load Designation VA 91 gt fe E TOWER RACK 4412 TOWER RACK 4 12 TOWER RACK 412 TOWER RACK 412 TOWER RACK 4112 TOWER RACK 4 12 TOWER RACK 42 5 FOOT RACK 4412 SPARE VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W PH A 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 CAPACITY 225A PH B 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 5400 NOT INCLUDING PART1 REMARKS TOTAL 80800 INCLUDING PART 1 E gt n EMIT sB e gt a ES E 3 gt E E 38 UL kl P aN wS FP C S 20A
57. 273 24 continuous circuit tha 29 over respo 26 Loop A number of T Monitoring a system ele nse to syste Offline commu contr accor 27 relay 28 29 910 nication wit oller contin ding to the Output Th h ues in Point utu s LEDs Panel coni Polling See Con Password A combination o each SMS operator Terminals are interrogated at regular intervals by S activi dition Ey in which a controller is not Guard Tour stations can either be Tours can be selected randomly or may be time intervals con m the system of a change of Legacy Refers to 5320 and controllers Line Supervision Circuit via electrical electrical integrity of t tacts that open or close to state D6xx series D620 TI D620 U and The process of monitoring an electrical and software systems to verify the he supervised circuit terminals connected in series in a tarts an e process of m ment or point an P A con d ends at the controller aintaining a vigilant watch d taking appropriate action in in the server rol modules troller In the offline mode the to make access decisions and process alarms formation stored at its local database Control extern al devices such as signals etc numbers and or letters unique to the controller to establish
58. 3 In phase monitor M Elevator Emergency Mode Bypass Keyswitch 10cal m A keyswitch shall be provided to bypass the elevator emergency mode during testing only This will allow the elevators to function normally during a transfer switch test 6 For each elevator controller provide the following auxiliary contacts Two auxiliary contacts that are closed when on normal power and open when on emergency power 52 One auxiliary contact that is closed except for an adjustable period of time 0 to 50 seconds adjustment set initially at 15 seconds prior to power supply transfer in either direction from normal to emergency or from emergency to normal 27 Provide a contact output to each UPS 2 to close when the generator is supplying power to the building Contact is used to disable UPS battery charging Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternate Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 5 Communication Centre 25 Bypass 21 The transfer switch shall either come with an integral bypass or shall be cabled to an external bypass mechanism 44 The bypass mechanism shall be constructed so as to provide no interruption to the load during operation 2 The bypass mechanism shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent any chance of connecting the utility and emergency sources 3 The bypass mechanism shall give visual indication of each position
59. 5 8in 1 2in spacing 1 2in length ted with space for active urge suppressor power bar BR 12 Additional approved manufacturer Cabletalk DL Custom Hubbell Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 7 Communication Centre Cabling 2 4 Wall Mounted Equipment Racks Wall mounted equipment racks shall meet ANSI EIA 310 Constructed of lightweight steel charcoal gray or black in color Complete with steel mounting hardware Rack hardware must provide vertical wire management on both sides of the wall mounted equipment rack Wall mounted equipment rack frames shall meet the following Specifications 21 dimensions 4810 x 20 31 deep with 18 5 16in center mounting 42 hole pattern 5 8in 5 8in 1 2in spacing pa screw size 10 24 thread 1 2in length Each equipment rack or cabinet designated with space for active electronics shall be provided with a surge suppressor power bar Acceptable Manufacturer Tripp Lite fIBR 12 Additional approved manufacturers Cabletalk DL Custom Hubbell Wall Mounted Equipment Cabinets Wall mounted equipment cabinets shall meet ANSI EIA 310 Constructed of lightweight steel charcoal gray or black in color Complete with steel mounting hardware Cabinet hardware must provid
60. 514 59520 sow uj 90504 2 Jeyddns payddns sjoejuoo jo yas e euop si uonouni yxe oj 1senbes JOOP jo opis si e jeu Ajunoes uonouny jsenba eu oiued Joop sJ9jai 59529 JSOU BE 88 5 uoyng Jejddns eyewpieu Aq uoyng 00 ol 5 Se 8 55 2 5 Jodo Jeiddns Aq Joop lt ony ge uedo uo eseoje ISN 5 uedo pjou oneuBej PioH c 35 5 Jopejeg einoes y 5 ejyeumibej Jey woux Ajunaes yo 0 S Jopejep eu ou esr uonnq 0 sanba e jo Aq pue payddns josuas BYU si 40129 9p Fam en lt JO epis at eog d Burey s yxa e jeu mouy 2 Ajunoes 0 s yxe oj 1senbei 2 9 uonoes 0845 uogng sanba st 5841 58 el 3 ed uw B o x Section 08710 i jen
61. 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 10 Communication Centre 4 Alternator output breaker Circuit breaker bolt on moulded case temperature compensated for 40 deg C ambient dual thermal magnetic trip 5 Voltage control rheostat mounted on the inside of the control panel and to be screwdriver 6 Operating lights panel 1 Normal power pilot adjust type with locking nut mounted light Emergency power pilot light 3 Green pilot lights for breaker on and red pilot lights for breaker off d Solid state indicator lights for alarm with set manually reset NO NC form C contacts wired to terminal block for remote annunciation on el Low fuel level 2 Low battery voltage or high battery voltage 255 Ventilation failure 4 Engine high temperature above 110 Engine low lube oil pressure at 80 6 Low coolant 8 Solid state controller for automatic shutdown and alarms with 1 set manually reset NO NC form C contacts wired to terminal block for remote annunciation on ed Engine overcrank 2 Engine overspeed RS Engine high temperature shutdown at 115 4 Engine low lube oil pressure shutdown at 40 25 Short circuit 6 Alternator over voltage 29 Push to test lamp buttons TI Ald devices Structural St Complete
62. Administrator and the City of Winnipeg s tions for phasing and staging of Work and Comply with instructions regarding working hours necessary to maintain the building in operation Coordinate complete ins if required talla with Utili ties tion of relocated utility services to ensure minimum interruption of Project No 674 2005 Work in Existing Section 16195 Alternat Emergency Building Page 2 Communication Centre PART 2 service Coordinate the transfer of the existing hydro service point to the new service point with the Hydro utility in order to keep power interruptions to a minimum Existing Devices in New Construction Where existing devices receptacles switches etc presently mounted on a wall which will be covered with a new finish provide an extension ring coverplate etc or relocate as required to mount the device to the new wall Where existing conduits pass vertically through a floor area relocate those conduits to be installed concealed in a new wall or surface mounted in a service area Extend conduit wiring etc as required Existing junction boxes in walls and ceiling spaces required to maintain existing circuits shall remain accessible Where services are concealed within walls floors or ceilings and cannot be visually identified Contractor shall provide electronic scanning d
63. RM 110 FED FROM 2CDP A LOCATION RM 115 Designation Designation VA va 2 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15 WALL RECEPTACLES 1R 300 1 22 300 2R RM 110 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15A ES 15A WALL RECEPTACLES 1R 300 2 23 300 2R RM 110 FLOOR RECEPTACLE P WALL RECEPTACLES 1R 300 3 c 24 300 2R RM 110 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15A PEZ 15A WALL RECEPTACLES 1R 300 4 25 150 1R RM 110 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15A mg 1R 300 5 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15A 1R 300 C FLOOR RECEPTACLE PT 15A 1R 300 FLOOR RECEPTACLE 15A 16 300 FLOOR RECEPTACLE Pa 15A 1R 300 gt m gt gt 25 uU gt A m gt EE o FEE a 42 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4 PH A 431 CAPACITY 225A PH B 3866 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 3866 REMARKS TOTAL 12048 PANEL SCHEDULE NC 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL X S PANEL ND LOCATION RM 115 FED FROM 2CDP A LOCATION RM 115 Designation Ckt _ bkr Phase Load VA Trip EEF3 15A EEF2 RECEPTACLES RM 121 2R 3R RM 116
64. boxes Project No 674 2005 Outlet Boxes Section 16132 Alternate Emergency Conduit Boxes Page 3 Communication Centre and Fittings 2 9 Service Fittings 21 Pedestal type high tension receptacle fitting 5 square low profile 2 piece steel frame with black plastic housing for two duplex receptacles Bottom plate with knockout and BX connector for centered installation 22 Pedestal type low tension fitting 5 square low profile 2 piece steel frame with black plastic housing to accommodate two amphenol jack connectors Bottom plate with slot for conduit entry 23 Pedestal type Combination Telephone Receptacle Fitting 5 x 10 low profile 2 piece steel barriered frame with black plastic housing to accommodate two duplex receptacles and two amphenol jack connectors Bottom plate with BX connector in power section and slot for conduit entry in telephone section 4 Raised floor outlet boxes Viremould AC10105 2 c w all necessary outlets faceplates and accessories Carpet or tile flange as per Architectural PART 3 EXECUTION 3 21 Installation 21 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits 22 Fill boxes with paper sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction Remove upon completion of Work 3 For flush install
65. h level an ies and sets ambient Environmental Thresholds approximately six times an hour The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature humidity other contaminates as well as detector aging The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to long term environmental changes The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 50 and 100 of the allowable environmental compensation value 8 Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the learned base line sensitivity The base line sensitivity information shall be permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 15 Communication Centre Two Stage 29 Each detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five sensitivity settings 10 The intelligent analog device and the analog loop controller shall provide increased reliability and inherent survivability through intelligent analog conventional operation The device shall automatically change to stand alone conventional device operation in the event of a loop controller polling communications failure In the analog convention
66. installation of any work 2 Contractor shall notify Contract Administrator for a final distribution inspection prior to energizing distribution system All distribution equipment shall be left with covers removed to allow a thorough inspection 14 6 Guarantee 21 Guarantee the satisfactory operation of all work and equipment supplied and installed as a part of this section of the Specifications 2 Replace forthwith at no additional material or labour cost any part which may fail or prove defective within a period of twelve 12 calendar months after the final acceptance of the complete installation provided that such failure is not due to improper usage or ordinary wear and tear X 523 No certificate given payment made partial or entire use of the equipment by the City of Winnipeg or their representative shall be construed as acceptance of defective workmanship or materials 4 This general guarantee shall not act as a waiver of any Specified guarantee or special equipment guarantees covering a greater length of time Tod Identification of Equipment 1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows and as indicated in other specification sections 22 Nameplates m Lamacoid 3mm thick plastic engraving sheet shall be white with black letters or as directed mechanically attach
67. proper couplings shall and of ighting fixture to be relocated used for tial power sources shall tems Provide separate conduit system for emergency distribution All conduit runs passing across expansion joints of the building shall Refer to 1 All steel tom conduit syst 6010 for identification requirements t th jurisdiction Surface Conduits Clearance be installed utilizing approved expansion fittings bonding devices Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines and tems in hazardous areas to be rigid galvanized requirements of the authorities having Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1 5 m Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels indicated Do not No power driven pins portion of the conduit Concealed Conduits Do not ins tall horizontal Do not ins tall Ramset locate conduits less than water lines with minimum of 75 mm shal Do not pass conduits through structural members except runs in masonry walls 150 mm parallel to steam at crossovers ll be utilized to secure as or hot any conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings Project No 674 2005 Conduits Conduit Section 16111 Alternat Emergency Fastenings and Page 5
68. purchase of this equipment at a later date Div 16 to allow all material handling markups overhead and profit etc in their bid 22 The UPS system will be supplied by Powerware 4 Refer to 16010 for Additional Information T2 Standards sali UPS shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of current revision of the following documents Where a conflict arises between these documents and statements made herein the statements in this specification shall govern ail ANSI C62 41 EEE 587 2 CSA 22 2 Nos 10 21 23 FCC rules Part 15 Class A 4 National Electrical Code NFPA 70 5 OSHA 6 UL Standard 1778 2 UPS shall be UL listed per UL Standard 1778 and shall be CSA certified 22 UPS shall be tested to 51 62 41 Categories A amp B with no damage to unit Description 21 UPS Module 44 Voltage Input output voltage of UPS shall be user selectable via front panel controls 600 Volts 52 Input 347 600 Volts thr phase wye 4 wire plus ground 23 Output 120 208 Volts thr phase wye 4 wire plus ground a2 Output Load Capacity 1 Specified output ORN lagging power factor 0 7 lagging power factor lagging to 0 9 leading power factor load capacity of UPS shall be rated in kVA UPS shall UPS shall supply rated kVA from 0 5 to also supply rated kW from 0 7 Project No 674 2005 Uninterruptible Section 16610 Alternate Emergency Power System Page 2 Commu
69. tion LE e first line the REAL TI ME the ALARM Z p ONE NUMB ER second line The system a S shall maintenanc he operato EXT ACK bu ot an addi aiting he buzzer o3 zd e alert the number o and t hall display th r shall acknowl tton tional will silence hall press udibles to he RESET b d Print a rec zone or dev message Al user specif the ALARM SI the operator shal To silence audible devices E a the green NORMAL LED shall D shall light and the BUZZER shall he 80 character LCD shall indicate MESSAGES WAITING he TYPE of AL be capable of setting the sen analog sensors by point and be capable of displaying value of the sensor by device and or tradition vectoring the value to the printer utomatically identify any analog sensor which prior to false alarming led and the buzzer wil alarm pending he TIME THAT THE ALARM OCCURRED user specified messag sitivity of all the anal and al input The system shall becomes dirty ge the alarm by pressing the and Time Controls Switches shall tion to allow manual the control panel ARM The og silence providing there is If there are additional alarms acknowl
70. 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab terminate each conduit in surface type box 17 Where conduits become blocked remove and replace blocked section Do not use liquids to clean out conduits 18 Dry conduits out before installing wire 19 Conduit to be sized as per Canadian Electrical Code or as shown on drawings Note that the sizes of branch circuit conductors scheduled and or specified on the drawings are minimum sizes and must be increased as required to suit length of run and voltage drop in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Where conductor Sizes are increased to suit voltage drop requirements increase the conduit size to suit Project No Alternat Emergency 674 2005 Communication Centre Conduit ts Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings Section 16111 Page 4 20 21 22 423 24 23 26 Running threads will not be pern used Not less sufficient than 900mm length 3 0 to allow to any location within a 6 the connection of recessed light be used for each fixture un continuous No circuits fed from emergency or essent be run in the same conduit as other syst rOWS of flexible conduit the 1 ft 1 8m radius ting fixtures ess shall be A separate drop to ixtures are mounted in nitted
71. 16475 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCT Service S Entrance Switchboard uppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 Standard for Safety Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors and UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters Suppressors shall be independently tested with the Category C3 high exposure waveform 20kV 1 2 50us 10kA 8 20us per ANSI IEEE C62 41 1991 Suppressors shall provide redundant suppression modules between each phase conductor and the neutral conductor and between the neutral conductor and ground Suppressor manufacturer shall provide certified test data confirming a fail short failure mode Visible indica operation shall indica urren t path H tion of proper s be e suppressor shal Small provided T 1 incorpora te which phase as well as which uppressors shall meet or exceed t g or plug in he following cri uppressor connection and he indicator lights shall module is fully operable te copper bus bars for the surge gauge round wirin all not be used in the path for surge curren urge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to e bus bars for reliable low impedan connections t diversion tions teria 41 Maximum si
72. 23 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 4 Wires and Cables Section 16122 25 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes Section 16132 and Fittings 6 Wiring Devices Section 16141 24 Disconnect Switches Fused Section 16440 and Non Fused up to 1000V 1 22 System Description 41 Make all required electrical connections to devices equipment appliances etc furnished by other trades or the City of Winnipeg as indicated or implied on the drawings or in the Specifications 22 Provide and install miscellaneous electrical components where required 1 5 3 Coordination 1 Verify electrical supply characteristics of all equipment prior to rough in Report any discrepancies immediately Revise wire sizing device type connection type breaker size etc as required to accommodate the electrical supply characteristics of the equipment supplied by other trades Project No 674 2005 Miscellaneous Section 16193 Alternate Emergency Apparatus and Page 2 Communication Centre Appliances PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 General sil Provide all required electrical devices components conduits fittings wiring disconnects and miscellaneous equipment to make all connections to equipment Be familiar with the apparatus being supplied and carefully 2 2 2 wall PNE 2 429 PART 3 SIN 21 2 coordinate and cooperate with the supplier installe
73. 25 Horizontal elbows end plates drop outs vertical risers and drops tees wyes expansion joints and reducers where required 6 Fittings manufactured accessories for approved cable tray Radii on fittings 600mm24in minimum zd Provide conduit to tray adaptors for the termination of all conduits terminating at the cable tray 8 Cable tray to be c w 100mm4in high center barrier 2 9 Cable tray to be suspended using 13mm1 2in threaded rods or larger as required with double locknuts below the tray and single lock nuts above 10 Finish natural aluminum 11 Acceptable Manufacturers Burndy Canadian Strut Pilgrim Pursley Unistrut Newton Chatsworth 2 4 EMT Conduit 1 Refer to Section 16111 F2 Minimum trade size shall be 19mm3 4 in 223 Flexible conduit shall only be utilized for connections from modular furniture to junction boxes 4 The use of 90 degree Condulets is not allowed 2 3 PVC Underground Conduit eM Refer to Section 16111 22 PVC conduit shall be heavy duty rigid spec schedule 40 type with 6 4mm1 4in wall 2 6 Outlet Boxes eL Spider Outlet Boxes 21 Flush wall mounted 1 2 4 or 6 gang outlet boxes c w knock outs on top and bottom of each gang 2 Minimum depth 70mm2 3 4in 23 Accepts standard type duplex outlets 4 Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations 5 Acceptable manufacturer Spider Mfg 22 Electro Galvanized Outlet Box
74. 5 emergency power transient protection gaps transzorbs required current Vdc The power s power supply shall fault features AH batt rectifiers Provide a suitable dot matrix printer to log all system activity pri cross zoning etc nt reports etc regul for system operation and alarm conditions power or reserve shal ators filters and surge The system de consistently standby power l provide 24 Vdc operati The power supply shall wit including the EMI fil The power supply shall ly regulated power limi pro lec ries of either gel Upon AC power fai to bat drive all bells or as required to meet occupancy lure The system shall have supply within O1VDC the power s tery back up and power the syst horns and strobes code for t located at security desk 24 VDC output standby power from gel cell BC 90 requirements including necessary vices whether ng and be of h ter spark provide ted 24 vide diagnostic LEDs to low battery and sys trolyte or nickel cadmium notify the ure The tem ground AH to 60 types upply shall transfer for a minimum of 30 tem for 24 hours and the syst then minutes he particular building the capability of polling any system power to determine battery voltag
75. AUXILIARY CONTROL Q MARK QMKRSA BY DIV 15 STELPRO R 841D HEATER SCHEDULE 1 of 1 GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST HTR XLS 07 03 2006 3 19 PM Wd 81 6 9006 50 20 10 JINGAHDS A972 SIXZALOO LSWISSTNGSHOS GLS OlHLO3 3 amp 9 10 510 80 JequinN S3H 1N39 NOILVOINDIWIWOO LIV LI9 9IG3IN VI V d 324I 3 321 10d 32efojg awoa awoa dM NOlRI31X3 51997198 dM ALVS LV WOO 3INI dM awoa dM Ol H LX3 dM 3HOnH31X3 YOLINOW WOOZLNI dood SNIT _ SNISNOH ILWL NVd NOV J31nqaHos ALIMNDAS N L Y 2 001 163 6 8 001 302 1 1 8 9 00 154 1 YANYOO MN YOWALXS 9 HOMALXS S 32V4 1SV3 v LSM 3OII3 LX3 AS HOMALXS 2 YANYOD MS YOMALXA L y 10 Wd 8L 9002 20 10 einpeuos Ajunoes joo V 0L V 60l E 201 2 V SOL e V vOL 9 0 WALSAS 399 OL 00 MOOG OLNY MOOTH3LENI LO3NNOO
76. Boxes General wal Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22 1 2 Sectional boxes shall not used without specific approval of the Contract Administrator 53 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped 4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices 29 347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices c w holes on centres to reject all other switches 6 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one System are grouped if In finished areas switch convenience receptacle voice data and blank cover plates shall be stainless steel In finished area ceilings junction and pull box covers shall be solid covers painted to match the finish of the adjacent surface 8 In moist or dusty areas gasketted watertight or dust tight boxes and covers shall be provided 9 Explosion proof in hazardous areas to suit requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 22 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes 21 Electro galvanized steel device boxes for flush installation minimum size 102 mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings as required RA Electro galvanized steel device boxes for flush installation in drywall and minimum size 102mm square outlet boxes with extension and square cornered ta covers as required Project No 674 2005 Outlet Boxes Section 16132 Alternate Emergency Conduit Boxes Page 2 Communication Centre and Fittings 53 Electro galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connec
77. Breaker Type Communication Centre Section 16471 Page 3 PART 3 Equipment Identification Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements Nameplate for each panelboard size 5 engraved as indicated Complete circuit directory with location and load of each circuit Manufacturers Acceptable Manufacturers Siemens EXECUTI ON ation Install and square to adjoining surfaces Except in public areas install U channels Where practical U channels Mount panelboards to Connect loads to circuits Connect branch circuit Common neutrals shall except for GFI protec which shall not share conductors shall be showing be shared by ver ted branch circui neutrals with ot Trims of installation with wall recessed equipment will instal Finish parking lo poles t panel enclosures to Locate all panelboards as shown on the indicating the front Wiring in panelboards shall be neat and set neutral conductors shall be identified Cutler Hammer height specified in Sect Electrical General Requirements or as indicated Schneider Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely neutral conductors to common neutral tically adjacent breakers ts and dimmer circuits identified with mylar cl the
78. CK720 and CK705 shall provide an alternate communications path to the server via a secondary IP ad IP address netw be established connection usin se An alarm s controller moth be activated wh alarm state and 9 A SPDT tam of the controll whenever th n condition The be suppressed to be recognized as an input point dress such that in the unlikely ev ork is down an alternate communicat 5321 controllers communicate via g a third party device n the primary tions path may Ethernet ummary relay shall be built in erboard If so programmed the enever a connected alarm poin whenever soft alarms become per switch shall be attached er enclosure The CO the CK7xx alarm relay shall transfers to the active to the inner surface tamper switch shall change state closure door is opened to signal the SMS of the tamper switch input shall be user programmable to to be Project No Alternat 674 20 Emergenc 05 Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Security Management System Section 16902 Page 31 513 processed by the alarm queue at at an opt CK720 an ional pri d CK705 described above 10 The the controller s appl X af da ter the tabase operator entered parame 2d Li controlle configura configura failure o 12 W transacti 13 The
79. Discharge Ala ery Battery Reserve A CO Lamp Load on UPS Al New Al Audible Alarm Bypass Alarm m Condition m Condition ar Test Reset Pushb T CES 2 g wi Gr rm larm Red Red Red utto shall be provided in a NI the following features LED th een ke other UPS alarn on these al he user shall through the LCI 21 Interface shal capability with Liebert Sit Sitemaster 200 Provide programmed inputs the emergency generator is running Communications Options lay board with eight hall be provided ually programmabl of a number of UPS events to func alarms from able to trigger n ns 1 te monitoring Red ED 1 iD ED D n D 8 16 2A 2B These input The UPS shall be The relays shal le to activate based on a sel combination alarms shal ll be provided by printed circuit area of the UPS cabinet double pole be ection Each relay shall be programmable tion based on any one alarm or any Any alarm or group o nultiple relays l accept up to two alarm board hall have two sets rated for 2 Amps at 30 VDC 0 6 Amps at of 1 be total of form C 125 VAC Isolator option shall accept eight tomer relay inputs ts shal ms exactl
80. Dry type transformers to CSA C22 2 No 47 CSA C9 22 Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project 229 Type ANN K rating to be minimum K 13 or as indicated on drawings Parking lot transformers need not be K 13 rated 4 3 phase 600V Delta primary 120 208V wye secondary 60 Hz copper windings 5 Voltage taps 4 2 1 2 two FCAN two FCBN 6 Insulation Class H 150 C temperature rise above 40 C ambient v4 Basic Impulse Level BIL standard 8 Hipot standard 9 Average sound level 50 db for up to 150 kVA amp 55 db above 150 10 Impedance at 75 deg C to be 3 to 5 for transformers up to 225kVA minimum 3 75 for 225 kVA transformers and 5 for transformers 300 and larger 11 Enclosure EEMAC 1 removable metal front panel sprinklerproof in sprinklered buildings Project No 674 2005 Dry Type Transformers Section 16461 Alternate Emergency up to 600 V Primary Page 2 Communication Centre 12 Mounting floor or wall 13 Finish in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 242 Transformers Non Ventilated 1 Epoxy potted K rating to be minimum K 13 or as indicated on drawings Parking lot transformers need not be K 13 rated 2 3 phase 600V Delta primary 120 208V secondary 60 Hz Voltage taps 4 2 1 2 two FCAN two FCBN 4 115 deg temp rise insulation system 29 Basic
81. FLOOR RM 126 SOLENOID VALVE RM 126 PRESSURE SWITCH G ELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_FA XLS FIRE ALARM SCHEDULE 1 of 1 07 03 2006 3 18 PM 2 FIRE ALARH SYSTEM INSTALLED AE ection SMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com Ar lt ipu wb D Nt MEE Lo FI E 5 i AR E Ae ie WAS INSPECTED AND LESTE Expires October 31 2005 DON November 22 2004 BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN IN ACCORDANCE WITH ULCS536 M97 _ rem Issued November 26 2004 CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION CENTRE 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG Please see report for details of inspection By Reference File No Setup Date Detail Sheet 05 015 01 JAN 2006 ED 1 Parky amp Recreation 700 Assiniboine Park Dr Winnipeg Mo System Manufacturer Model number l The Fire Alarm System functianed correctly under General Alarm condition 2 Location of the electrically furthest manual stations with main AC power aff l2 Floor by Room 207 NM 2 3 Floor by Centre Statr 3 3 Floor by South Stair 4 2 Floor by Centre Stair 5 2 Floor by South Stair 6 2 Floor by North Stair The Fire Alarm functioned correctly du
82. Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 22 Wires and Cables Section 16122 4 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes Section 16132 and Fittings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Electric Heaters will Provide install wire and connect all convection type baseboard and fan forced wall heaters c w thermostats sized and positioned as indicated on the drawings and schedules All heaters shall be rated for specified voltage constructed of minimum 18 ga steel as manufactured by Canadian Chromalox Company Ltd Westcan or approved equal 2 Remote thermostats shall be low voltage 24 Volts T87F3145 c w wall plate sub base covering ring and clear key lock cover for non and tamperproof locations 2 Provide also heavy duty ventilated plastic guards on remote thermostats located in public areas such as entrances washrooms corridors and other unsupervised areas Plastic guards to be Honeywell clear TG500A c w lock and two keys 4 All heaters with 3 phase power and all heaters in excess of 4000 watts shall be c w built in contactor controlled by thermostat All units in excess of 240 volts shall be c w built in contactor and control transformer Mo All heaters mounted on wall shall be above baseboard unless otherwise noted 6 Provide built in relays and control transformers in either the heater or on a separate matching blank heater section Project No 674 2005 Electric Heating Section 16800 Alternate Emergency Page 2 Communication Centre
83. French and must have all the following standard indications and control buttons clearly labelled in English and French A programmable key may be used to toggle the system prompt French languages Detection line circuit Conventional Zone Module interconnected by a s and printouts between This module shall be the English and monitoring shall be provided by a system card edge connector and shall be operated by the control panel Each circuit shall be capable of Class A or Class B wiring Each zone shall accommodate up to thirty 30 ric detectors flame and beam detectors ionization or photoelect as well as any quanti ty of shorting type contact devices Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 9 212 ES 14 16 An output tie shall shall be sy of operatin be operable by the cont circuits sh identificat ircuit for be provided by Controllable Signal stem interconnect th the unit g wi by rol X either Class control panel operation of DC audible devices Module A all ion report The open collec relay or LE The system event of a shall module shall tor outputs capable of iD activation on li
84. GELECTRIC STOYSCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 20 of 28 07 03 200610 39 AM PANEL UA300 LOCATION RM 132 FED FROM CDP UPS A LOCATION RM 104 TAPE LIBRARY m 1000 NETWORK RACKS 100 NEMESIS 77 NETWORK RACKS 1000 ee 1000 5 6 RACK 1500 Load Designation a c 818 ELE o gl 55 48 31 a gt gt TOWER RACKS e e w e TOWER RACKS vS m e a ja a gt joa jo a o Jo io E TOWER RACKS e s8 mE a 3 B x 5 a 442 20 1500 3 TOWER RACKS 4812 LE Q e STORAGE TOWERS 2P 2 10 1650 STORAGE TOWERS g e e 2 en e v ERE js gt aa la o in lo a la 2 2810 m STORAGE TOWERS 47 30A 2 2 10 m STORAGE TOWERS 19 a ekek 2 5 UR M MN 2810 o w US STORAGE TOWERS 51 30A A 2P 2 10 STORAGE TOWERS 2 10 M I vE STORAGE TOWERS e a 2 10 STORAGE TOWERS 2 10 23 gt SPARE EST 30A 29 59 30A Bess gt a VOLTAGE 120 208V 300 4W LOADS PH A 23300 CAPACITY
85. LOADS 16600 CAPACITY 225A PH B 16600 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 17600 REMARKS TOTAL 50800 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PANEL SCHEDULE UA100 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 07 06 SUAS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 eme ciemeann GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 17 of 26 07 03 200610 30 PANEL UB100 LOCATION RM 122 FED FROM CDP UPS B LOCATION RM 104 Designation Load Phase Trip rri CALL TAKERS 15A 1200 CALL TAKERS CALL TAKERS 15A CALL TAKERS CALL TAKERS CALL TAKERS CALL TAKERS 5 1 Designation 25 isi SPCO DISPATCH a gt e e SPCO DISPATCH N e e gt FE gt RADIO DISPATCH A N e a gt RADIO DISPATCH le sl gt ja MON jo jo 3 a c gt gt RADIO DISPATCH 22333 8 ET a gt e gt RADIO DISPATCH a gt e gt d ja m o jo 911 CONSOLES e gt 911 CONSOLES a fo N N Nw 19 o 5 gt DUTY INSPECTOR N e gt
86. This Section describes the materia requirements for transient voltage the protection of all AC electrical of lightning induced currents and internally generated and or capacitive load switching 153 References 21 Canadian Standards Association CSA 22 Canadian Electrical Code 3 American National Standards Institu Electronic Engineers ANSI IEEE 4 Underwriters Laboratories Canada U 1 4 Submittal for approval 4 1 Shop drawings the bid date 22 The submittals shall include za Dimensional drawing of each TVSS unit 22 CSA Approval te of rom the ef tching transients from inductive ls and installation surge suppressors circuits substation swit transients resulting TVSS for fects Electrical and product data and manufacturer s installation instructions shall be submitted for review ten days prior to 3 UL Standard 1449 Listing Standard for Safety Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors documentation 4 UL Standard 1283 Listing Electromagnetic Interference Filters documentation 45 IEEE C62 41 1991 Category C3 20kV 1 2 50 10kA 8 20us waveform clamping voltage test results from an independent test lab The test procedure shall be in accordance with IE C62 45 1987 Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Section
87. VOLTAGE 120 208 30 4 LOADS PH A 3916 CAPACITY 225A PH B 4466 MOUNTING SURFACE PH C 5316 REMARKS TOTAL 13698 PANEL SCHEDULE NA 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STDYSCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL NB LOCATION RM 122 FED FROM 2CDP A LOCATION RM 115 Designation d bkr Phase Load Designation Trip HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES 15A SPCO DISPATCH 1200 E z o 2 8 gt E RM 123 3R HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLE 15A NEN 15A MM SPCO DISPATCH RM 126 1R 100 2 23 1200 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLE FH 15A PRIA 15A RADIO DISPATCH RM 125 1R 100 C 24 1200 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES 15A 15A RADIO DISPATCH RM 122 3R 300 4 25 1200 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES 15A rae 15A RADIO DISPATCH RM 122 3R 300 5 26 1200 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES 15A PrE 15A RADIO DISPATCH RM 122 3R 30 7 1200 RECEPTACLE 1R 15A OW 15A 911 CONSOLE 7 28 1200 SPARE 15 911 CONSOLE 29 1200 a gt RM 130 e e gt DUTY INSPECTOR CALL TAKER CONSOLE 100 ROOM 122 a gt D o e e gt gt m om oiz o 50 mem ms al
88. active at any given time 29 shal fiel numeric Unlimit dat Sys lt I Th ed number of user de e or Boolean tem Software Server multi wit server operat or Microsoft Windows 2000 Server tasking and mult ti user cap operating systems 2 T tracked separately ined cardhol only one of which shall Ider fields to 40 operator workstation terminals connected to a of 500 000 historical with local and 50 000 badge numbers per be The SMS ds Each be capable of reporting on any or all of the fiel ld may be defined by the user as either al ability Windows 2003 Server or for Windows 2000 Server 3 T form o install he SMS f a co The SMS shal database whi items Badges Time Zones Holidays Access Gro Panels Workstatio INT EGRATI ON lation sect SMS functions software features s mplet and a det tions l be capable of pari ch must include but ct ct Cardholders ups Reader Terminals ns R R EM EQUI ENTS Video imagin e Johnson without the aol The int SMS server fields 2 Th station ct e communications betw and the SMS server shall be via tem integration Inc SMS V g syst Controls need f egration which sh shall provi all n th hall be fully document ailed descriptio
89. an allow send a me that will ssage to in turn or other event action Optional SMS shall companies and native language n i Dual Et n dialogs provide an internationalized framework users to work effectively in the SMS menus the language selected in their and d RRAS ection gher hernet ection CO that tion of not saving the following databases to Flash during a Write Flash operation available for panels CK7xx version 2 5 and higher ol Custom Card Formats x that version 2 2 or higher shall selected card forma lable avai 1 22 Access 29 Configuration databases such as tput ts Input Suppression Messages hall allow input points that enter suppression to be reported as being suppressed Input Ou Card Even The SMS s ted The SMS shal Groups Time Zones for panels CK7xx version 2 5 and higher no longer suppressed the c ll support up to eight can be down loaded to all S321 and Upon selection be stored in a separate database or sel PIN P lus 1 and C Duress lection The SMS shal K7xx panels version 2 2 and higher provide this option ts have been compiled Conf Ter Ala Soft av When the urrent input point stat custom card CK7xx panel custom c
90. and operat that the bac tion within t in X by one or more the syst format tor worksta orms specific syst kground with their addresses ar he facility to readers The server runs and communicates tion terminals tem t user card em ion ou created by ther than hardwired to an actual he circuitry of a monitored hat the electrical integrity of that sensing circuit has been compromised nput points or ou 11 Time Zone and hours of eek rani 2 ncl essages 3 Trouble oint which indicates t reak single fault and 4 User Definable e easily rogramming knowledg Transaction 4 hat or ati or 15 Workstation esponding to alarms Eg RATIONAL R R EM EQUI ENTS tem Capabilities General 22 Any SMS soft system f ys functions sh application softwar logic programming intended to provide Database Management connected points xperienc all be e and ot the f 87 5 5 X The SMS shall operate in client A condition within the circuit an equipment malfunct a wire to wire s tribute of an SMS funct tailored by an operator without exi A personal computer connec server comp tware and firmware required for the fol ully Custom soft ther cust lowing feat Ces
91. cable bends for rubber plastic or lead covered cables 8 times diameter of cable for metallic armoured cables 12 times diameter of cables or in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Maintain 150mm minimum separation between cables of different circuits Maintain 300 mm horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables When low voltage cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low voltage cables in upper position At crossover maintain 75mm minimum vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150mm between high voltage cables Maintain 300mm minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing other cables with fire alarm and control cables in upper position Install treated planks on lower cables 0 6 m in each direction at crossings After sand protective cover specified is in place install continuous row of overlapping 38 x 140 mm pressure treated planks as indicated to cover length of run Cable Installation in Ducts Install cables as indicated in ducts Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket to reduce pulling tension To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control cables reel off in same directio
92. circuit numbers of the circuits sharing the neutral her circuits recessed panelboards to be flush with wall ler to ensure that wal be deep enough to accept the equipment tion 1601 lls with typewritten legend showing Square D and plumb true surface mounted panelboards on group panelboards on common bus Neutral loth wire markers Coordinate match Site lighting drawings in associated circuit numbers by means of an arrow in as if laced A11 the panel with their Brady Markers Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Panelboards Section 16471 Breaker Type Page 4 10 All panelboards throughout the building shall be phased together such that the left hand centre and right hand panelboard busses represent phases A B and C respectively All indicating meters shall be identified to this sequence END Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Section 16475 Page 1 sec sec sec tion 16010 tion 164 tion 164 X LC PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wil Electrical General Requirements An Service Entrance Board 3 Panelboards Breaker Type 14 2 Summary 24
93. continuous power to the critical load 6 Inverter DC Protection 1 The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels el DC Overvoltage Shutdowns 2 DC Undervoltage Shutdowns End of Discharge al Overdischarge Protection x To prevent battery damage from overdischarging the UPS control logic shall automatically raise the shutdown voltage quibue setpoint as discharge time increases beyond fifteen 15 minutes The automatic shutdown voltage adjustment ramp shall be a linear function starting with 1 63 volts per cell at 15 minutes and increasing to 1 83 volts per cell at 90 minutes after beginning of battery discharge The shutdown voltage shall not be less than 1 67 volts per cell at 30 minutes and not less than 1 75 volts per cell at 60 minutes 8 Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment EL A manual control shall be provided to adjust the inverter output voltage from 5 of the nominal value Adjustment shall be made from the control pad on the front of the UPS E Output Frequency 1 The output frequency of the inverter shall track input frequency when input frequency is within limits and be controlled by an ocscillator When free running the oscillator shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output frequency to 0 1 for steady state and transient conditions Drift
94. controll a badge is presented at a reader instal elevator cabinet access control to assign cardholder access to various elevators ler may grant access to a floor or cabinet led in the allows the and doors in a facility using access group automatically 19 indiv Facility Code card number st idual uniqu ely iden n facil 520 withi of a physi re prev ity with Guard Tour tivated a Events can be tifies the f c time frame n a spec tour is cally visited I A coded number tored within each card key acility ts cards from one f a similar access control A sequence of transactions that ified being properly monitored by security personnel to confirm and record that t provides real time monitoring of guard Events are sequences of system commands or actions t a pre defined tivated and deac eeded ually or time or on an as n tivated either man tion to the which he card is valid This other in addi at which t acility being used at an system when performed your facility is The main purpose an area has been ensures that activities reporting if a guard arrives early or late to designated reade speci 21 fied at Input Point stations rs or input points regular Electrical es infor 22 D600
95. copper wires The system addressable 1 between alarm zones than 80 of full system to the operator during The door must be easily removable without tools to fire alarm during system maintenance procedures st provide awings plus 25 spare relays driver port active LED ator tion circuli he drawings plus 25 spare programmable communication network port auxiliary power limited programming port tery supervision field programmable X to one second for any e for fan and damper control the number of addressable circuits of alarm relays signal t and charger Perform any Provide 99 required timing y be individually programmed from one nciation tware must fully integrate all of the system alarm management sequence fan le of providing alarm i ndication in degrade mode by activating the addressable loop alarm led response to an alarm shall be no more stem configured to the ve ween transponders if oops must be DCLB with maximum capacity supplied must be in loop isolation capacity The addressable loop must not be loaded more The control panel shall have a two line by forty character backlit supertwist for any required viewing angle alphanumeric LCD display The operator control panel must be intuitive in design It must be fully bi lingual in English and
96. d The number of events that shall be stored is 512 after which the events will enter and leave the buffer in first in first out order Controls lt l UPS start up and shutdown operations shall be accomplished via the from LCD panel An advisory display and menu driven user prompts shall be provided to guide the operator through system operation without the use of additional manuals Push buttons shall be provided to display the status of the UPS and to test and reset visual Project No Alternat 674 2 Emergen 005 cy Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 11 and audible alarms local emergency power off shall also be provided On I sb Bat of load is suppl feal accessible 2 B iine tery T A guarded re attery Test The UPS shall be provided with a menu driven On st featur The test sh the ba Cure S lt I 52 23 defa 4 a5 If automatically do the fol Maintena Maintena 3 Phase sul A m shall be incorpora load the crit bypassin all control and monitoring circuits boards shall be Dual 1 bypass inverter be diffe Maintena source Input 1 levels Owe Co PO nce By nce By 4W Ou anuall al the ic g The in physi Input Configuration This configuration al terminals for an alternate separ o
97. display a window displaying the alarm history together with a time and date stamp of 12 Alarm response entry a window in which the operator characters describing 4 rom a list o alarm condition history display and the alarm response entry box shall all be part one summary window Separate windows or applications to support any of these three functions are unacceptable 15 Alarm colors the operator shall be able to recognize specific alarms by the color assigned to each Color assignment is based on alarm priority and alarm state Security Threat Level Alert m The SMS shall allow the user to configure badge and terminal security levels 0 to 99 by color and range Security levels shall be mapped to a five color Red Orange Yellow Blue Green system each of which can be set a numeric value range In the event of a security breach an authorized operator shall be able to quickly change access privileges including efficiently set reset the status of required security level Event Processing data for each event overrides to all readers to the Panel Card Events The SMS shall allow the user to define panel card events executed by the cardholder at a keypad card reader The user can define any of the following X 241 Alphanumeric event name numeric identifier only is unacceptable 22 Access
98. emergency power 2 Suitable for No 10 AWG for back and side wiring 53 Break off links for use as split receptacles 4 Double wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts Single receptacles CSA type 5 15 R 125 VAC 15 A U ground with following features sd Nylon face brown or ivory for normal power red emergency power 52 Suitable for No 10 AWG for back and side wiring Receptacles to be orange face isolated ground type where indicated Provide a separate insulated ground wire and a separate neutral for each isolated ground circuit Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project Acceptable manufacturers Hubbell Arrow Hart Bryant Pass amp Seymour Slater Catalogue No 5262 for all manufacturers Acceptable manufacturers for ground fault receptacles shall be 41 Arrow Hart GF 5242 m Bryant GFR 52FT 23 Hubbell GF 5252 4 Pass amp Seymour 1591 R Special Special Duplex safety receptacl lounges shall be Hubbell 56 62 wiring devices S in public waiting areas and public Receptacles to be grey face type for all circuits connected to UPS circuits Wiring Devices as indicated on drawings Pushbutton stations to be flush or surface mounted as required Units to be complete with up down or start stop buttons as required and green pilot light Range outlets to be NEMA 414 50 125 250V 50 Amp b
99. end of the cable A 3 0 AWG bare unless otherwise noted copper ground wire shall be installed with each feeder Cable bending radius shall be at least twelve times th overall cable diam and bends shall not damage or distort the outer sheath a2 Do not install PVC jacketted cables in circulating air plenums 3 Single conductor cables installed underground shall be installed in the installation configuration outlined in Appendix B of the Canadian Electrical Code to provide the allowable ampacity required for the feeder 3 4 Installation of Flexible Armoured Cable wal Type AC90 armoured conduit Cable be relocated to be of 1 sufficient to any locat shall be used for connections from 1 8M radius Systems to recessed luminaires in accessible ceilings length to allow the lighting fixture to tion within a 6 Cable Project No 674 2005 Wires and Cables Section 16122 Alternate Emergency Page 5 Communication Centre shall be clamped befor ntering the lighting fixture and shall be clipped befor ntering the conduit system junction box 39 Installation of Mineral Insulated Cables wil Mineral insulated MI wiring shall have a minimum of two hour fire rating unless otherwise noted Mineral insulated MI cables shall be as manufactured by Pyrotenax BICC Cables 1 Refer to drawings and specifications for MI po
100. g workstations The SMS shall provide the following three operating modes d Local All access decisions shall be made by the controllers This eliminates the need for panels to communicate with the server every time an access request is presented at a reader Local mode provides the best overall system capability however access will be denied to those badges not stored in the controller memory 22 Central access resi entire system to Central the slowest This mode is usef trictions on a global scale All access requests shall be forwarded the server for an access grant mode has the most impact on system performance ul when assigning throughout the or deny decision and should be used only when necessary Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 14 Communication Centre System 43 Shared Access decisions shall be mad ither at 18 x9 220 EA 222 23 the controller level or by t first search for a badge in mode If a badge s record is controller level the access he server Controllers will their memory as in Local not found at the to the server as in Central usef User defined Cardholder Database The SMS shall support an unl information for each cardholder alphanumeric text numeric date provide standard menu items whic define these cardholde
101. generating set mo teel Mounting sufficient s Assembly fit resiliently m Spring Sound insula table level 10 Provision for remote monitoring to be wired to a terminal block Base unted on structural steel base of trength and rigidity to protect assembly from stress or strain during transportation conditions on suit installation and under operating surface ted with vibration isolators and control console mounted type isolators wi adjustable for levelli ing tion pads for th adjustable side snubbers and installation between isolators and concrete base Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 11 Communication Centre 2 5 Exhaust System 21 Super critical grade exhaust silencer with condensate drain plug and flanged couplings 22 Fittings and accessories as required 3 Provide sound criteria as part of the shop drawing submission 2 6 Fuel System Fuel Tank Base Tank A UL listed dual wall sub base 750 gallon auxiliary fuel tank shall be provided which complies with local codes and ordinances The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections fuel gauge low fuel level alarm contact and leak leakage contact wired to indicating light on Genset control panel and a vent with locking cap 2 Division 16 to fill fuel tank After comple
102. has sufficient capacity to exhaust air through the plenum and area wells where specified to provide proper cooling 2 To maintain manufacturer s recommended engine temperature range at 10 continuous overload in ambient temperature of 40 deg C 3 Block heater thermostatically controlled liquid coolant heater to allow engine to start in room ambient 0 deg C 4 Provide flexible hose connections 29 Engine to have coolant temperature gauge 29 Fuel d Type A fuel oil to CGSB 3 GP 6c 26 Fuel system solid injection mechanical fuel transfer pump with hand primer fuel filters and air cleaner fuel rack solenoid nergized when engine running flexible fuel line connections fuel oil pressure gauge etc 41 Governor 421 Electronic type Steady state speed band of plus or minus 0 58 2 Isochronous speed regulation no load to full load 23 Adjustable isochronous to 5 droop Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Power Generation Section 16622 Diesel Page 7 4 Transient frequency variation shall not exceed 15 of rated frequency when full load at rated power factor is applied Recovery to stable operation shall occur within five seconds 8 Lubrication system m Pressur
103. interior CCTV cameras exterior pan tilt zoom CCTV cameras colour monitors digital video recorder c w all accessories for a closed circuit TV surveillance system 2 The system shall consist of the following components xli Colour solid state video cameras 2 Protective camera housing 3 Digital video recorder 16 camera 4 Mini UPS APC 4 RS1500 5b Single 17 video monitors 20 video monitors flat Screen 6 Term cabinets c w individual camera transformers 7 Wiring installed in a dedicated conduit system 2 3 CCTV Cameras 24 Fixed Type Dome Cameras m Cameras shall be Panasonic WV CW244 or approved equal 21 80mm 3 1 8 diameter compact colour dome camera for indoor use application 22 480 11 horizontal resolution Minimum illumination of 2 4 1 0 24 fc 4 50dB signal to noise ratio 9 Built in 2x variable focal lens 3 8 8 0mm 6 Electronic shutter from 1 60 to 1 10 000 sec Project No 674 2005 Closed Circuit TV Section 16920 Alternat Emergency CCTV System Page 2 Communication Centre 2 6 Built in aperture level sharp soft correction 28 Advanced digital adaptive Back Light Compensation BLC capability 29 Internal Line lock VD2 synchronization Line lock 24V AC operation only 10 Vertical drive VD2 sync capability with Panasonic system products 11 Video monitor output jack for on the spot checking of the lens angle
104. load Provide all call on any fail panel Wire speakers and strobe as class ed amplifier paging microphone located in main fire alarm B circuits Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 14 1 using both capable of X fire de time pat reliability an deceptive of fires capable of Detectors General Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications tection terns shall E fil digital Each and con broadcast and poll performing independent f algorithm shall measure sensor signal nbine different d distinguish real nuisance alarms be el combining ters shall no capabl informa intell data lt 2 decisions s flow between de Detectors not capable o all not be acceptabl h response ti 2 flash to co controller Both LEDs o status 4 Each de displaying communica Both L m nf A i n viewing BAS diagnostic syste the detecto 6 57 angle The detector shall be capable of identi This information shall be r codes m maintenance tion stored in t Signal patterns iminated by different f in
105. loop controller for retrieval using a Laptop Computer 253 The ion smoke detector shall operate in constant air velocities from 0 to 75 ft min 0 0 38 m sec and with intermittent air gusts up to 300 ft min 1 52m sec for up to 1 hour and meet the following standards b ULC Smoke Sensitivity Range 0 61 1 83 Obscuration ft 305mm 4 The ion detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C Humidity 0 93 RH non condensing Elevation Up to 5000 ft 1 524 m 249 The ion detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 foot 9 1m centers and be suitable or wall mount applications 6 Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent Analog Conventional operation to provide inherent survivability in the event of a communication failure with the Analog Loop Controller 25 11 Photoelectric Detector PH The intelligent analog photoelectric detector shall use a light Scattering type photo sensor to sense changes in air samples its surroundings The integral microprocessor shall dynamically lt rrom examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable 2 The photo detector shall continually moni
106. m m mi NM U z al m m m 4 3 gt gt al Io m m ol a gt JN 2 a gt 129 RECEPTACLE 1R 15A CALL TAKER CONSOLE RM 126 100 ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ROOM 122 a gt N e 1R OFFICE 124 R OFFICE 124 SPARE 15A SPARE 36 15A SPARE 37 15A TAPE STORAGE ROOM 130 38 1200 TAPE STORAGE ROOM 130 gt e gt a gt e 2 e o IT gt gt gt a gt g gt e e e e e e e e e CALL TAKER CONSOLE 15 pen ERC 4 ROOM 122 100 40 3333 CALL TAKER CONSOLE 15A Ed 40A 348 ROOM 122 100 41 3333 CALL TAKER CONSOLE ra 15A PESE 122 100 21 3333 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W 8633 CAPACITY 225A PH B 9033 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 8133 REMARKS TOTAL 25799 PANEL SCHEDULE ENGINEERING NB SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H 0 3 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 ILE 05 015 01 sms smseng com DATE 07 Mar 06 PANEL SCHEDULE 12 of 26 07 03 200610 39 AM PANEL NC LOCATION
107. menu permissions that the operator can access filters Input Point std Alarm ol T point input point point he SMS shall reporting reporting 12 Alarm 1 T facili suppre ty such that Input Point Suppression ssion period for each define to define which messages operator can see Reporting Delay allow the operator to apply an input delay period from 0 60 seconds for each terminal The default setting for each input delay shall be zero seconds assign the operator the system elements to addition the SMS shall alarms or he SMS shall provide an alarm input point suppression the operator may define a time zone individual input point Alarm conditions for suppressed input points shall not be recorded arc be rec Alarm zL 2 dynami functi 2 User definable graphic maps conditions ents in the system support t i sub map attachm v2 The SMS shall X vey 53 1 1 adjustment lists z9 The SMS software shall be capabl The quantity le hard disk storage space 6 The SMS shall provide a palette following categories of pre defined alarm I a user defined alarm located anywhere in the system The changes color and the internal sounder beeps when an alarm number by availabl TI EC 4 The hived by the system orded Graphics Maps c col
108. of the following identification and operating parameters Cardholder name first middle last 2 Cardholder type regular or visitor 3 Cardholder ID 4 Cardholder address 5 Cardholder phone number and extension number 6 Validation period using start and void dates 7 8 9 Department and Company fields from selection list user defined departments and companies Web access permissions Email address 10 Cardholder journal user entered notes associated with the cardholder 11 Unlimited number of user defined cardholder fields The SMS shall use these fields in filtering reports 42 The Cardholder application shall select automatically the name of a newly added cardholder in the list of cardholders the application shall also allow the display of cardholder badge transaction history 26 Badge Definition he SMS shall allow cardholders to be defined by any of the following badge identification and operating parameters on a per badge basis H 1 Badge number assignment a2 Badge type access or identification 59 Issue level 0 255 only 1 per badge 4 Badge facility code 25 Reason for issuing a badge damaged lost new not returned reissue returned stolen temporary visitor 6 Badge purpose to specify the badge s intention 2d Validation period using start and void da
109. operator to an alarm input point option requires user confirmation to the audit trail to the Project No Alternate Emergency Communication Centre System 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Security Management Page 11 14 ple 28 The system shall support both 2 state and 4 state alarm input point monitoring as call led for in this specification or as shown on the drawings 8 Alarm priority an alarm priority queue from 0 255 Individual wave sound assignment wil priority 11 be based on alarm 29 Alarm pop up alarm inputs that are designated as pop up by the operator shall take priority over any active non alarm window If the operator is viewing a non alarm window when a pop up alarm occurs the alarm queue window shall be automatically placed on top of all other windows to ces each condition X may enter free form text up to 255 how he she responded to a given alarm 13 The operator shall be able to select predefined response descriptions 14 The alarm instruction display X Or allow the operator to respond to the alarm condition 10 Alarm instruction display a window containing up to ten lines of user defined instructions which indicate to the operator how to respond to the selected alarm 11 Alarm condition history
110. same Notify such notification the contract price meet all or ordinances Care Operation and Start up Upon completion of the project equipment in the presence of representative and certification from the Ci the Contract Adminis the City of Winn terms hall c Electrical Supply Authority h all the satisf the Contract Administrator o conflictions with any regulation in accordance with such requirements wit In no instance shall the standard established by specifications and drawings be reduced by any of 7 shall be year 2000 compatible and shall unabbreviated unambiguous discrete Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22 1 except Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA specified otherwise to CSA 285 omply with the requirements the latest edition of the Provincial and Municipal Laws faction of those persons any discrepancies or B4 Failing hout change to these the codes rules demonstrate the operation of all ty of Winnipeg or his trator Obtain signed ipeg that such equipment was shown to be fully operational instruc Arrange and pay f Contrac and t tions have been provided or services of man Administrator to supervise start up of installation hat all necessary operating ufacturer s factory servic
111. secured with non corrosive bolts and Belleville washers wo Identify phases of busbars by suitable marking Project No 674 2005 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426 Alternat Emergency 120 208V amp 347 600V Page 3 Communication Centre 2 4 m 249 i 2 6 11 211 wal 12 2 8 zd 2 9 Grounding Copper ground bus not smaller than 50 x 6 mm extending full width of switchboard and situated at bottom Lugs at each end sized for grounding cables Molded Case Circuit Breakers The Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be manually operable fixed mounted c w frame size and trip settings as indicated Breakers feeding transformers 45 kVa and larger to be c w fully and independently adjustable LSI settings Finishes Apply finishes in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 21 Cubicle exteriors gray 2 Supply 2 spray cans touch up paint 375 Treated to inhibit rusting Equipment Identification Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements Nameplates 21 Provide a size 7 nameplate to indicate voltage amp rating and designation 1 2 Sub breakers Nameplates to indicate panel or equipment fed Metering Provide City of Winnipeg s metering where indicated on drawing Metering to be equal to metering provided in main distribution 16421
112. shall be by forced air with internally mounted fans to minimize audibl Fan power shall be shall be xcessive component ures ar be displayed on front panel for input tery Warning alarm shall be issued Automatic shutdown shall occur Operating erred to bypass is ded temperatur XC ectrically isolated from UPS UPS chassis shall have equipment ground terminal bonding shall be provided The term input converter shall denote solid state equipment and controls necessary to convert incoming AC Input conver e al ut Input UPS d full Batt so fac Cor l have overc EE 5 87 Li ou tp Fail Input loss cascading failures DC F VT ilter Battery e vo ripp ripp e vo Auto al AC p shut assume inverter and ba matic Res Upon res ower o down tage in tage into ba tart charger s ter shal e Power Factor Corrector verter whil 0 95 power put Protection UPS shal dervoltage cluding low energy surges d bypass source thout damper per cri 41 1980 IE Current convert active buil urrent UPS s miting ter shall automatically limit input ut overloads shall be supplied from input tery charger shall draw no more than 25 of load input current ure Protection lines shall be fused with fast acting fuses
113. shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 for the complete Fire Alarm system including s All devices 2 Control panels DGP s amplifiers graphic annunciators LCD annunciators printer accessories etc ed Zoning System including isolator locations 4 Programming of the Fire Alarm System 429 Connection to fire suppression system 6 All other components of the fire alarm system d Description of the operational sequences of the system 8 Complete set of drawings indicating location of all devices including analogue and signalling devices control and annunciator panels all interconnections to mechanical equipment to fire suppression systems and to existing computer room system all conduit routing and sizes all wire sizes types number and a riser for each control panel indicating all of the above 9 Pictorial drawings of control equipment indicating the location of the components and parts and their respectiv catalogue number and electrical characteristics 10 Interconnecting diagrams and cable manual 11 System descriptions of the actual installation 12 Maintenance instructions 13 Recommended spare parts list 14 Provide name address and telephone number of the manufacturer s service representative to be contacted during the warranty period 22 This information is to be revised to as built after construction is completed Insert as part of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals 1 6 Operation and
114. shutdown 4 Start up sequence aborted 25 Battery test enabled disabled System time set by operator 27 Load on bypass Alarm Messages 1 The following alarm messages shall be displayed zl Input voltage out of tolerance 22 Bypass voltage out of tolerance PES UPS on battery 4 Site wiring error 5 Output undervoltage 6 Output overvoltage El Incorrect input frequency 28 Output overload 49 Overload Phase A 10 Overload Phase B 11 Overload Phase C 12 Temporary overload 13 Charger failure 14 Battery failed test 15 Cannot execute battery test not recharged 16 Cannot execute battery test at this time 17 Logic error 18 Memory failure ROM 19 Memory failure RAM 20 UPS overtemp 21 External shutdown initiated remote or local activated 22 Fan failure 23 Charger battery voltage too high 24 Charger battery voltage too low 25 Charger blown fuse 26 Low battery shutdown 27 Low battery warning adjustable 1 to 99 minutes 28 DC bus overvoltage 29 PFC bus voltage high 30 PFC bus voltage low 31 PFC hardware shutdown 32 System shutdown impending due to over temperatur Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre U P ninterruptible ower System Section 16610 Page 10 10 hall be provided for remote by mimic the EOE by The signals low battery and on 33 Inver
115. studs for line conductors L ug provisions Tor load conductors min of 8 350 per phase amp neut tral Complete provision to bolt in util ity current transformers Bus shall be suitabl upgrade provisions le to accep ct ct and potential current transformer Stepped bus assembly c w current transformer upgrade provisions Provide remot metering cabinet on side of CSTE when indicated Project No 674 2005 Splitters Junction Section 16131 Alternat Emergency Pull Boxes Cabinets Page 3 Communication Centre and CSTE s Submit shop drawing to utility for approval prior to Contract Administrator review Cantruss wire support channel for line load conductors Quality assurance standard 1509001 94 Acceptable manufacturer J R Stephenson Mfg Ltd Acceptable manufacturer J R Stephenson Mfg Ltd EXECUTION Splitter Installation Install splitters and mount plumb true and square to the building lines Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise Junction Pull Boxes and Cabinets Installation Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor Install terminal block as indicated Install pull box
116. the building shall be ted trol Control panels for ted to emergency branch trol panels furnished branch circuit wiring for motors electric controls except controls supplied under Controls which have talled by P E force flows alternators domestic hot Sensors and wash basins integral all conduit be installed in interlocks Div 16 E wa jockey pumps and compressors solenoids part of supplying the ls for such items as etc wire to wire and connect control Control wiring shall Systems conduit for starters supplied by Project No Alternat Communication Centre Emergency 674 2005 Mechanical Connections Equipment Section 16192 Page 3 Wire and connect heating coils provided by Div Wire and connect motors 15 Fire Protection Wire and connect the flow installed on zones in the hi limit Sprinkl ler and St press the sprinkl ler and 8 fire alarm control panel Sprinkler shop drawings for the exact location of thermistor control devices to motor starters as per wiring diagrams provided by Div tandpipe ure and t tandpipe as cutouts for remotely mounted electric built in to large amper switches systems to separate indicated Refer to these switches Wire and conn
117. the study name project name project number date engineering company that prepared the study including address and phone number the engineers seal and signature etc 2 Table of Contents 53 Purpose of the study 4 The criteria for determining proper selectiv coordination protection adequacy etc eg describe when coordination is achieved minimum maximum tripping times and current values separation damage curves etc between curves safety margins 25 Summary stating that proper selective coordination proper protection adequacy of the equipment for the maximum available short circuit currents etc was achieved and listing any areas of compromise potential problems marginal adequacies etc Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Electrical General Requirements Secti Page on 16010 13 6 selec drawing ed The s 535 submitted 16 trips e pro tection kers wi LSIG set shall be included in the 17 18 Operat A cer equipment breaker se settings 1 21 points Verificat Tes the brea 5 All breakers shal coordination study The Short Circuit and Time Current Coordination St revised to as built conditions ting and Maintenance Manuals eac 1 ion of coordination ting of all circu
118. to module i Instrument checks lt I Carry out the following instrument checks at no load 50 load and 100 load against a calibrated and certified meter Input current 1 1 22 Input current PES Battery current 4 Battery voltage 5 Output voltage L L 6 Output voltage L N A Output current 4 Battery discharge tests 221 Measure the following at 20 minute intervals of battery autonomy with the UPS supplying full load sal DC bus voltage 2 DC bus current 2 Overall autonomy 55 Carry out a 2 hour system heat run test with the UPS supplying 100 load Measure the parameters indicated in Section A 6 Contractor shall tap internal transformers to suit best performance of the system in both the normal and bypass positions el Provide a load bank and connections and wiring for the load bank testing 25 50 100 110 125 and 150 8 Demonstrate that battery charging is disabled when the supply voltage is from the emergency generator 9 Demonstrate a maximum battery charging rate of 25 of capacity Manufacturer s Field Service Service Personn EE consisting of fact to the start up el maintenance The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ an organization tory trained field service personnel dedicated and repair of UPS and power Project No 674 200 Alternate Emergency 5 Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 15 equipment office
119. tware including tom application programming ted with the exis minals provide additional reader interfaces tput points to the SMS user defined period made he day during which event ts and Input Output linking events may occur Indicate some form of syst ude items such as access requests and general syst up of days of the ts such as Valid Card tem activity It may try of monitored tion single exists tion which may tensive computer hort ted to the main uter via local area ting the system and Server architecture llowing ting SMS adder tures are unacceptable The system shall create and maintain a master database all cardholder records and system activity for all Multiple data bases shall be able to be created each with its own password protection Project No 674 2 Alternate Emergen Communication Cen 005 P2000 Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 7 tre System Audit Trail ed The SMS shall maintain an audit trail file of operator activity and provide the ability to generate a report by operator time and date and type of activity The system shall allow the operator to direct the audit trail report to screen printer or file The audit trail feature shall record operator activity associated with Users Partitions B
120. ure shall k I and Mark II 24 The features and functionality will meaning t the maximum count 30 000 badges wi Controller Support be based on the hat the limits on badges will of the Mark I controller or upgrade memory expansion There that are applicable 1 8 and 8 Output 3 16 Input badge Modules 8 Input allow the customer to set the time for changes t as wel choices 5 s sg 2 29 2 down In each loaded fron Temporary Access Feature zi This feature s Lemporary access individual badge minut Down Start download af es after Download will occ load ase selected date and time perm ission for limited Temporary access shall 22 MS Enhanced The panels systems Start for access shall access is granted imn cifies t permission for access expires en Void cifi hat have been made to access and l as cardholders and badges changes ter the system has been idle for the last change ur at set time every day to be performed manually changes made to the cardholder data are n the server immediately hall allow the customer to define to any valid access Temporary access shall group for each be defined on a which shall grant the cardholder access within the normal time zone be based on the following parameters
121. vMOVd NOILV2C1 4544915 unosio own wn 2 9 514915 d H NOLON JINGAHOS YOLOW Pe JUUUC UCUJ LU 219 2410021 35 SIZAL 16 00010002151 0 910 50 1equinN JAYA 3NIOSINISSV 00 E JOOULODSIP 397 A009 3004 LINN SBNISN3QNOO 2 9 uodn nus 921 E MOOTH3INI ZLE We wvz adwe ALATA A000 81 921 LINN L NHY l MW3xvaugdevoz EZ ZZ 4N A80Z INOOM eg l 02 0L E 21 Ag0z WOO HOS yaioa ra LINN MOOTH3INI 0r qa 261 OLL LINN LL OV LINN 39VMOVd LINN MOOTH3INI 65 3 Z6L OLL WY LINN 91 5V LINN 39 vxXOvd LINN ONISN3QNOO MOO TH3INI 6140 8c a3 261 60L WY LINN SNINOLLIGNOD SL 2V LINN LINN M2OTH3ILNI 1 da Z6L 601 WY LINN 2 LINN 39 vMOVd LINN MOOTH3INI 21 8 93 VOL LINN L 2v LINN 39 vMXO
122. 0 Sec shall be installed in two speed starters It shall function only during the transition from HIGH SPEED to LOW SPEED where the Project No 674 2005 Motor Starters Section 16811 Alternate Emergency to 600 V Page 3 Communication Centre motor will be in a de energized state for a period of 30 seconds after initiation of this switching zd Provide and install time delay relay to sequence starting after power failure adjustable 0 120 seconds for motors 15 horsepower and larger 2 4 Control Transformer 1 Single phase dry type control transformer with primary voltage as indicated and 120V secondary complete with secondary fuse installed in starter as indicated 22 Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20 spare capacity PARES Finishes 1 Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions 2 6 Equipment Identification 21 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions 29 Manual starter designation label white plate black letters size 1 engraved as indicated 13 Magnetic starter designation label white plate black letters size 4 engraved as indicated 2 7 Manufacturers wall Acceptable manufacturers Allen Bradley Canada Ltd Cutler Hammer Canada Ltd System 89 Siemens Electric Limi
123. 0 V maximum 68 VA volt amperes for ballast with four 4 foot T 8 lamps to be 1 0 Amps at 120V maximum 4 Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be HPF auto regulator type Ballasts used in exterior luminaires shall be rated at 20 deg C starting Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Lighti ng Equipment Section 16505 Page 4 PART 3 ECUTION Installatio Install lum n inaires at locations wiring con accessories Install lum nections fittings required inaires and lens mat as indicate Install lum d luminaires Review all inaires parallel wit to be installed pl ceiling arrangement mounting as included f supported C 5 W b luminaires other Spaces are or and match the req onstruction c w all Co ordinate the ins trades ensuring types placing s before indicated hangers align erials in arch h building lin umb semblies rames Support fasteners shall be provided provided a conflic relocated t Contract Administrat Wiring Lamps with struc a more s tural members c w lamps all box covers and ers itectural details es Wall mounted c
124. 004 12efo4d LINN ONISN3QNOO MOOTHSLNI cod 264 Wa LINN DNINOLLIQNOO L 9v LINN LINN 5 HLIM MOOTH3INI Loa 261 We LINN ONINOLLIONOO LL OV LINN LINN 5 MOOTHALNI 2 81 29 ecl Wa LINN LINN LINN ONISN3QNOO MOOTHSLINI 21 29 ZL LINN 6 9 LINN DNISNSQNOO MOOTHSLNI 91 93 21 LINN 8 27 HNN LINN DONISN3QNOO MOOTHSINI 22 91 09 61 SZL WY LINN ONINOLLIOINOO LOV LINN LINN MOOTHALNI 218 zer 921 Wa LINN 9 2 LINN LINN ONISN3QNOO YOOTYILNI L 2d 28 921 LINN S OV LINN pov E Vid LINN MOO THZLENI 94 V3 QW9 A009 972 cel LINN ONINOILIGNOS ov d VOr 39vMOvd E Vld LINN NISNIANOO YOOTHILNI SHE 9 A009 972 cel WY LINN ONINOILIGNOO eov d VOb LINN 26 Wid LINN ONISN3ONOO M20 TH3LLNI 886 Var awo A009 9 cel Wei LINN b OV d Vor LINN 30
125. 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 FILE 05 015 01 sms smeseann 07 06 GAELECTRIC STDYSCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANE HEDULE 7 of 26 07 03 200610 39 AM PANEL EH PART 1 LOCATION RM 115 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 LIGHTING VESTIBULE 100 1 Designation Load Load Designation VA LIGHTING RM 112 EM 15A 15A re EXIT SIGNS 585 1 10 LIGHTING RM 112 113 117 119 ae 15A LIGHTING RM 115 276 2 390 LIGHTING RM 113 114 2 Ee e e e gt e gt CORR 100 3 LIGHTING RM 121 15 ELECTRICAL DOOR 260 4 300 VEST 111 15 ELECTRICAL DOOR 5 300 VEST 111 LIGHTING RM 119 120 LIGHTING RM 118 COORIDOR 101 BATTERY PACKS gt e gt 24 92 gt N SPARE a gt NES gt s IER sa UBER AMBAS TE 10 wed concen 87 SSNS St ES SONRISA eae gt gt _ m m m g gt ELECTRICAL RM 115 1R RECEPTACLE ELECTRICAL RM 115 1R RECEPTACLE A 15A AUTO DOOR 100 1 42 4 2 2 gt uU A e gt gt N e e e e US b Fr a e gt VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W 1855 CAPACITY 225A PH B 2503 MOUNTING SURFACE PH C 1464 REM
126. 1 CAPACITY TOTAL PH B 8200 NOT INCLUDING PART1 MOUNTING SURFACE FLUSH TOTAL PH C 10950 NOT INCLUDING PART1 REMARKS TOTAL 61589 INCLUDING PART 1 PANEL SCHEDULE ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 smsr smsann ILE XX XXX XX IDATE 07 Mar 06 GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL ED LOCATION RM 110 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 18 BASEBOARD HEATER BASEBOARD HEATER 2418 RM 110 BASEBOARD HEATER 2340 BASEBOARD HEATER Lo a a d z E 1R SERVER OFFICE 109 2810 17 E A als gt e gt gt gt e e gt a gt m B e 2 e Bi 5 e gt gt EN 2 d gt o gt m a gt A A a gt e gt P e gt g C a a gt a oa al gt gt E A ROOM 108 gt gt e gt 4 EN a Jo ns Mo m gt S gt 2 0 e N gt e ae e w N sE 58 gt o S e gt a gt ja 5 S iy 5 m a gt a gt gt
127. 1 0 or approved substitutes with the following functionality m The controller shall be a fully stand alone processor capable of making all access control decisions without the involvement of the server computer based on a set of parameters passed to the controller from the server 42 The controller shall support up to sixteen 16 card readers in addition to either 256 input points or 128 input and 128 output points It shall further support up to 12 facility codes per reader 40 unique holidays 32 access group and time zone pairs 2 3 Memory Requirements s Standard number of cards 15 000 expandable to 200 000 2 Minimum number of historical transactions 5 000 expandable to 50 000 at full card capacity 4 The controller shall require no firmware changes and shall use flash memor data and operat 5 The CK7205 connection of a and report prin via a built in 6 Each contr support hard wi readers of up 7 Communicat shall be via E Er to 4000 Ethernet TC IP at y modules to provide non vol ional code and CK705 controllers shall standard dot matrix printer f ting The printer shall connect to serial RJ45 port oller s a feet ions between he controller s 10Mbps support the direct or local transaction hall be provided with built red communications between the controller s tile storage of both the controller in hardware to and the server
128. 1 0m40in conduit and or cables used for electrical power distribution with voltages greater than 300V 23 300mm12in conduit and or cables used for electrical power distribution with voltages less than 300V 4 300mm12in fluorescent lighting 5 When horizontal cabling perpendicular to each other When a building lightning protect communications cabling shall not be installed closer than 1 8m6ft from any lightning protection system conductors is required to cross fluorescent lighting conduit and or cables used for power they shall cross tion system is utilized the All horizontal cabling that penetrates fire rated barriers must be provided with fire stop to meet local fire codes UTP Backbone Cabling Install cables individually manner system recommended by the cable manu hen a building lightning pro LAC Backbone cabling shall be installed in a star topology Cables shall be combed within cable tray in an organized Bridged taps shall not be used within the backbone cabling Ensure minimum cable bend radius and maximum pulling tension as turer is not exceeded CEC tion system is utilized the communications cabling shall not be installed closer than 1 8m6ft from any lightning protection system conductors Administration Labeling shall be as per EIA TIA 606 stan
129. 1 Ensure that 2 Gro terminations and accessory equipment under test conductor For mineral insulated M I cable co ordinate meggar voltage rating with manufacturer 22 Check insulation resistance after each termination to ensure that cable system is ready for acceptance testing are ground wires metallic armour and 2 3 High Potential Testing Conduct 4 Lea specified by voltage in accordance with kage Current Testing Raise voltage in steps from zero to maximum values as hipot testing at 100 of original factory test IPCEA recommendations X IPCEA for tested type of cable being 2 Hold maximum voltage for specified time period by IPCEA lt 3 Record leakage c which urrent at each step Provide Contract Administrator with list of test results showing location at of each test and include copies in Maintenance Manuals each test was made circuit tested and result ntir Remove and replac any of test criteria length of cable if cable fails to meet Z Project No 674 2005 Direct Buried Section 16107 Alternate Emergency Underground Page 1 Communication Centre Cable Ducts PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wal Excavation and Backfilling Section 02223 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 i3 W
130. 16600 CAPACITY 225A PHB 16600 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 16400 REMARKS TOTAL 49600 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PANEL SCHEDULE UB100 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 515 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada 013 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 nnm GNELECTRIC STO SCHEDU LES MST_PNLXLS PANEL SCHEDULE 18 of 26 07 03 200810 30 AM PANEL UB200 LOCATION RM 110 FED FROM CDP UPS B LOCATION RM 104 Designation 3 Designation SUPERVISOR RM 108 SERVER RM 109 RACK 1 SERVER RM 109 RACK 1 SERVER RM 109 RACK 1 SERVER RM 109 RACK 2 SERVER RM 109 RACK 2 SERVER RM 109 RACK 2 20A SERVER RM 109 58 RACK 3 SERVER RM 109 59 RACK 3 A n 20A SERVER RM 109 30 C 1600 RACK 3 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS 10800 CAPACITY 225A PH B 8400 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 8400 REMARKS TOTAL 27600 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE i PANEL SCHEDULE SIMS ENGINEERING UB200 MS Englneering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ___ 700 AS
131. 2005 Service Entrance Section 16421 Alternat Emergency Board Page 2 Communication Centre PART 2 Storage Store switchgear on Site in protected dry location Cover with plastic to keep off dust Coordination and Short Circuit Study Switchboard manufacturer to provide a coordination and short circuit study as per section 16010 and submit to Contract Administrator with switchboard shop drawings PRODUCTS Materials Service entrance board to CSA C22 2 No 31 Moulded case circuit breakers to CSA C22 2 No 5 Fuse holder assemblies to CSA C22 2 No 39 HRC Fuses to CSA C22 2 No 106 Meters to CSA C17 Meter mounting devices to CSA C22 2 No 115 Analogue instruments to ANSI C39 1 Instrument transformers to CSA C13 Aluminum for bus to CSA HA 5 Rating Service entrance switchboard rated 347 600V 3 phase 4 wire grounded neutral 60 Hz or 120 208V 3 phase 4 wire grounded neutral as indicated on drawings Short circuit current rated at RMS symmetrical as indicated on the drawings Service Entrance Board Rating Refer to drawings for Ampere rating Enclosure me Wall mounted or free standing totally enclosed dead front sheet steel enclosure indoor CSA enclosure 1 or 2 sprinkler proof 42 Sheet steel barriers to separate adjoining sections Project No 674 2005 Service Entrance Section 16421 Alternate Emergency B
132. 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 13 Communication Centre Cabling 2 17 Grounding EI Provide a 43 0 AWG RW 90 insulated green copper ground from each communications wiring closet back to the building main electrical ground 22 Provide grounding bus bar in each wiring closet to terminate ground conductors PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Equipment 1 Provide a minimum of 1m clearance between exposed live parts of equipment and cross connect fields a Racks and cabinets shall be secured and grounded to communications ground with a 2 RW90 insulated green copper ground 3 Racks and cabinets shall be located so as to provide 800mm Clearance in front and behind each rack or cabinet as measured from the outermost point of the rack cabinet or equipment which is mounted within the rack or cabinet 4 Wall mounted equipment racks cabinet mounted on 19mm3 4 backboard 2 1m7 ft S or brackets shall be to the top AFF 5 Equipment shall be mounted on backboards racks or cabinets a minimum of 300mm12in AFF 6 Equipment shall be mounted to provide a minimum clearance of 300mm12in from end walls 29 Equipment connected directly to a cross connect shall connected with cables not more than 3m 10ft in length 8 Install the surge suppressor power bar on the rack designated
133. 2005 Wires and Cables Section 16122 Alternate Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 13 Cabletroughs Section 16114 4 Fastenings and Support Section 16191 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 Materials m Conductors in Conduit sL Type RW90 2 Conductors 21 Solid Copper 410 AWG and smaller v2 Stranded Copper 48 AWG and larger uS Sized as indicated Minimum 12 23 Insulation cross link polyethylene RW90 RWU90 90 deg C 4 Configuration Single conductor 25 Voltage Rating Minimum 600V 6 Certification CSA C22 22 No 38 or latest revision 2 Armored Cable BX aL Type AC90 2 Conductors et Solid Copper 410 AWG and smaller lt 2 Stranded Copper 8 AWG and larger 23 Sized as indicated Minimum 12 3 Insulation cross link polyethylene XLPE 90 deg C 4 Configuration Multi conductor as required c w a separate bare CU ground wire 5 Voltage Rating Minimum 600V 6 Certification CSA C22 22 No 51 or latest revision 23 Armored Cable TECK 1 Type TECK 22 Conductors eli Solid Copper 10 AWG and smaller 2 Stranded Copper 48 AWG and larger 3 Sized as indicated Minimum 12 AWG RES Insulation cross link polyeth
134. 25 pin 5 RS485 Port 85485 4line 2line 2 terminals RJ 11 6 Data RS485 2 terminals RJ 11 d Serial Port RS232C 1 terminal D sub 9 pin Network Interface Port 10 Base T 100Base TX RJ 45 System Controllers The system controller shall be Panasonic WV CU650 or approved equal 41 The system controller enables the following functions zr Camera selection 2 Alarm LED Suspend Recall Reset 13 Setup menu Power Supply be Altronix AL400 600 ULX c w MOM5 or approved equal circuit quantity as required plus 10 spare Power supply to be sized 150 on each branch to accomodate future expansion Equipment Rack Standard 19 rack c w wire management on both sides Refer to Detail EXECUTION General Locate install wire and connect all components and devices in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer Mounting of Equipment Mount equipment at heights as described in Section 16010 Mount equipment square and plumb with building lines Install devices flush and square with finished surfaces Project No 674 2005 Closed Circuit TV Section 16920 Alternate Emergency System Page 5 Communication Centre 3 3 Termination of Conductors 21 Terminate conductors directly to the terminals of each device 3 4 Identification 41 Identify equipment as per Section 16010
135. 26W 120V CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR GOTHAM AF2 26DTT6AR120GEB10TRW DTT RECESSED 1 LAMP FLUORESCENT POT LIGHT C W BLACK MULTIGROOVE WA 1 26W 120V DIE CAST BAFFLE WHITE TRIM RING GOTHAM AF1 26DTT6MB120DMHLTRW DTT OPENING C W DIMMING BALLAST RECESSED 1 LAMP FLUORESCENT POT LIGHT C W CLEAR ALZAK WB 1 26W 120V REFLECTOR WHITE TRIM RING GOTHAM AF1 26DTT6AR120GEB10TRW DTT OPENING GAPROJECTS 2000 00090MJA SJC SPECS esxxx 0000_LTG xIs LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 1 of 2 07 03 2006 3 19 PM LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE Project 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE S MS Project Number 05 015 01 FIXT APPROVED TYPE LAMPS VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION NOTES MANUFACTURERS pu RECESSED 1 LAMP FLUORESCENT SHOWER LIGHT C W DROPPED WC 2 13W 120V OPAL LENS TEKNA TEK40 E2 TT FL 250W 120 ROOF MOUNTED FLOOD LIGHT LITHONIA TFL250MRA2120CR MH CORROSION RESISTANT FINISH Coated MOUNTING TO SUIT AIRCRAFT CABLE SUSPENDED INDIRECT 2T5 HO 120V FIXTURE WITH PERF WHITE FINISH LIGHTOLIER L5C14B54 1 TSHOPERF 8 LONG EMERGI LITE LPEX52 W EM SINGLE FACE LED LIGHT BAR LUMAID EX AL 1 LED E 1 LED 120V EXIT LIGHT C W UNIVERSAL READY LITE RX5000 5100L LED CANOPY amp PUNCH OUT ARROWS LUMACELL LER450 WH METAL FINISH DUAL LITE ASRW LED SERIES EMERGI LITE LPEX53 W EM DOUBLE FACE LED LIGHT BAR LUMACELL LER460 WH E 2 LED 120V EXIT LIGHT C W UNIVERSAL LUMAID EX AL 2 LED CANOPY amp PUNCH OUT ARROWS REA
136. 3 PANEL UB400 LOCATION RM 131 FED FROM CDP UPS B LOCATION RM 104 VA Phase Ckt bkr No Trip A 8 Designation SPARE e fl gt TRAINING DESK 1 1200 2 B aae n ets a 1200 3 a 1200 4 iy Ea 35 Wi 1200 36 aol LL 1200 7 37 STORAGE ROOM 130 P PEE LS eoe 1 38 TAPE STORAGE ROOM 130 EDS 15 C 39 22124222 10 SPARE SPARE SPARE f o gt gt SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE gt e gt SPARE E EE ERE tA mm 30 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS PH A 3600 CAPACITY 225A PH B 2400 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 2400 REMARKS TOTAL 008400 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PANEL SCHEDULE 08400 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 eme Memeann cam GAELEGTRIC STO SCHEDU LES MST_PNLXLS PANEL SCHEDULE 26 of 26 07 03 200610 30 AM 43s b a Nadano YOLOW SEMIN LSWpoxseusoedsuundepLo0000000S L03rO 10 6 0 60 1jequinN gor 3NIOSINISSV
137. 4 IN T BAR CEILING C amp M 2GRS 232 FS12 C W CAM ACTION HINGED FRAMED CFI AA2W8 VB 2F32 T8 120V 1 125 K12 ACRYLIC LENS LITHONIA 2GT8232A12125 METALUX 2GR8 232A 125 PEERLESS LACH 24G 232 12 125 RECESSED 2 x4 IN T BAR CEILING C amp M 2GRS 332 FS12 C W CAM ACTION HINGED FRAMED CFI AA348 VB BC 3F32T8 120V 125 K12 ACRYLIC LENS LITHONIA 2GT8332A12125 METALUX 2GR8 332A 125 PEERLESS LACH 24G 332 12 125 CFI SLB2SFSVB340 SURFACE MOUNTED 2 x4 C W CAM DAY BRITE 2SMC 332 FS12 DC 3F32 T8 120V HINGED FRAMED 125 K12 LITHONIA 2BX332FWA12125 ACRYLIC LENS METALUX 2M 332A 125 PEERLESS LX 24 332 12 125 HL 4 INDUSTRIAL C W SOLID C amp M ATIS 232 REFLECTOR AND TURRET TU248 SD HB 2F32 T8 120V SOCKETS SURFACE MOUNTED OR LITHONIA 17232 CHAIN SUSPENDED METALUX DCIM 232 PEERLESS ITS 4 232 C amp M STRIP N132 1 LAMP STRIP SURFACE MOUNTED CFI LA 1 F32 T8 CHAIN SUSPENDED OR MOUNTED LITHONIA 5 132 IN VALANCE METALUX SN 132 PEERLESS LS 4 132 C amp M STRIP 25 1 LAMP STRIP SURFACE MOUNTED SB 136 LB 1F25T8 CHAIN SUSPENDED OR MOUNTED LITHONIA 125 IN VALANCE METALUX SN 125 PEERLESS 15 3 125 C amp M CUBE L 232 W O OPAL LENS WRAPAROUND 2L CSW 248 20 NB 2 F32 T8 120V C W SPRING LOADED END CAPS YORK DTW 248 WHITE IN COLOR CEILING OR METALUX BC 232 WALL MOUNTED PEERLESS CNW 4 232 RECESSED 2 LAMP FLUORESCENT POT LIGHT C W VJ 2
138. 44 0 unless diameter x x 20 ga igh site mix gel all be Project No Alternat 674 2005 Lightning Protection Section 16692 Emergency Page 2 Communication Centre PART 3 LO EXECUTION INSTALLATI ON The lightning protection system shall be installed by an approved Subcontractor licensed to carry out such installation Western Lightning Protection Provide required modifications to ensure proper resistance ratings If required use Earth Enhancing or Chemical Rod treatment All metal methods projections through or masses of metal above the roof shall be bonded to the lightning protection system All high points of the roofs shall be covered by cables in addition to standard required spacing All connections cable to cable and cable to steel or other metals shall be made using cadwelded copper connections or using specified brightening t 1200mm nchors mechanical methods after proper cleaning and The roof cables shall form a crossed loop around the periphery of the roof run within 600mm of the edge and shall be fastened a a centres using manufactured bronze flat roof cable OH he base perimeter loop and cross loop shall be connected to uilding lightning protection system as indicated on drawings required At downlead cable locations provide a suitable fitt
139. 5 UE N n N e gt e gt o gt gt Ja jo UH 1 J e a gt c gt Q e gt a gt 2 S gt c n I N E o oo gt gt gt UH 4 15A E gt gt gt a gt z a gt lt gt z e o 58 e e gt gt A m je tA a e 2 2 N e e a gt gt 5 m an tn 3 e a gt gt a gt VOLTAGE 120 208 30 4 PH A 4620 CAPACITY 225A PH B 2200 MOUNTING SURFACE REMARKS PANEL SCHEDULE NF 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL UA100 LOCATION RM 122 FED FROM CDP UPS A LOCATION RM 104 3 a Designation Trip nu SPCO DISPATCH 120 15A m SPCO DISPATCH 200 RADIO DISPATCH 1200 15A e RADIO DISPATCH 1200 15 P
140. 650 STORAGE TOWERS 30A 1650 2 10 1650 STORAGE TOWERS 30A 1650 2P 2810 1650 hen STORAGE TOWERS 1650 Pn STORAGE TOWERS 30A 1650 2P 2110 1650 2 2 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS PHA 23300 CAPACITY 225A PH B 20650 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 20650 REMARKS TOTAL 64600 NOT INCLUDING PART 2 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ES e ET PANEL SCHEDULE UB300 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 DATE 07 Mar 06 ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H 0 3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 eme memeann eam GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LEGWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 23 of 26 07 03 200810 39 AM PANEL UB300 LOCATION RM 132 FED FROM CDP UPS B LOCATION RM 104 Ckt bkr bkr Load Designation VA No Trip 2 o5 oS US gt g M e mel e 6 TOWER RACK 4 12 TOWER RACK 4 12 4 12 TOWER RACK 4412 600 20A 600 3P TOWER RACK 4812 20A 71 5 8 5 2 EB 8 w E E Egg nN e E E E S
141. 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Lighting Equipment Section 16505 Page 3 4 Fluorescent lamps T8 shall be rapid start 2850 Lumens rated 20 000 hours 5 HID lamps sh and universa 6 Metal Halide al 1 3500 K l be rated 20 000 hours with coating as designated mounting lamps shall be coated unless otherwise indicated 2 4 Ballasts and Accessories 21 Provide bal 2 Provide ball as as ts and accessories as indicated ts with non PCB type capacitors with pressure sensitive devices to prevent rupturing 23 Fluorescent ballast CBM certified energy efficient electronic Rating 6 type design Hybrid type not acceptable 0 Hz voltage as indicated for use with 2 32 W T 8 rapid start lamps lt 2 Totally encased and designed for 40 deg C ambient temperature 23 Power f factor minimum 90 with 95 of rated lamp lumens Capacitor non PCB thermally protected protection non resettable auto reset on coil Thermal Mountin g 4 25 6 Sound rated A 7 8 remote integral with luminaire Total harmonic distortion less than 20 9 Ballast must be listed by Manitoba Hydro as acceptable by 0 6 Amps at 12 their Power Smart premium rebate program 10 Line amperes for ballast with two 4 foot T 8 lamps to be
142. A RADIO DISPATCH 5 B 35 1200 ENA 15A RADIO DISPATCH 1200 61 36 1200 15A 911 CONSOLES 1200 15A 911 CONSOLES 1200 Designation 8 a 4 z ES e gt e ag 8 zi gt 5 e gt ziz FE gt PH o o o i 8 jo ay a gt m gt a gt jo 5 a gt gt a gt gt a gt a a ES N TELEPHONE BACKBOARD 1200 RECEPTACLE WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 4 e gt 15A 20A WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 4 15A 20 nu WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 4 ER WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 5 a gt 20A mE WIRING CLOSET 125 600 RACK 5 20A WIRING CLOSET 8125 RACK 5 pa WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 1 20A WIRING CLOSET 125 600 RACK 1 20A WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 1 20A Pa WIRING CLOSET 125 160 RACK 2 EN a gt N e e 2 is fe e fe N o gt 25 0 20A m WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 2 WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 2 gt WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 3 20A P WIRING CLOSET 125 1600 RACK 3 20A me WIRING CLOSET 125 RACK 3 NENNEN B jl gt A eo e e VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W
143. ARKS 5822 NOT INCLUDING PART 2 PANEL SCHEDULE ENGINEERING EH PART 1 SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers PME 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com FILE 05 015 01 07 06 GAELECTRIC STO SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL EH PART 2 LOCATION RM 115 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 Designation Load Ckt bkr Phase CU 1 LEE TEMP 15A 150 CU 2 LEE TEMP 15A 50 CU 3 LEE TEMP 15A E a amp gt CU 13 CU 14 CU 15 SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE 58 NS BB gt gt amp e s lb 9 o o o jo jo jo 6 a e 5 o z e lll 8 30A SE 58 gt eo e a gt a gt a gt e gt a gt c e gt tA tA tA 2 gt gt a gt a gt tA 30A C VOLTAGE 120 208V aoa LOADSTOTAL PH A 13645 NOT INCLUDING PART1 CAPACITY 225A TOTAL PH B 13645 NOT INCLUDING 1 MOUNTING SURFACE TOTAL PH C 13800 NOT INCLUDING PART1 REMARKS TOTAL 46912 INCLUDING PART 1 PANEL SCHEDULE E
144. ART 3 EXECUTION Installation 24 Locate install and connect transfer equipment a2 Check solid state monitors and adjust as required 2 2 Install and connect battery and remote alarms 4 Wire and connect to elevator controllers gen set fire alarm panel etc as required 3 2 Field Quality Control ci Factory trained and authorized technician of the transfer switch manufacturer shall set up test and commission the automatic transfer switch and controls 2 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 23 Energize transfer equipment from normal power supply 4 Set selector switch in Test position to ensure proper standby start running transfer retransfer Return selector switch to Auto position to ensure standby shuts down ns Set selector switch in Manual position and check to ensure proper performance Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternate Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 7 Communication Centre 6 Set selector switch in Engine start position and check to ensure proper performance Return switch to Auto to stop engine 47 Set selector switch in Auto position and open normal power supply disconnect Standby should start come up to rated vol tage and frequency and then load should transfer to standby Allow to operate for 10 min then close main power supply disconnect should transf
145. Alternator make model serial no 55 Voltage regulator make and model 6 Rating of generator set kW kVA V A r min Hz lt 2 Mark check sheet and record data on forms in duplicate as test proceeds 2 Tests sI With 100 rated load operate set for 6 hours taking readings at 30 minute intervals and record following 44 Time of reading Running time Ambient temp in deg C Lube oil pressure in kPa Lube oil temp in deg C Engine coolant temp in deg C Exhaust stack temp in deg C Alternator voltage phase 1 2 3 Alternator current phase 1 2 3 10 Power in kW 11 Frequency in Hz 12 Power Factor 13 Alternator stator temp in deg C 2 At end of 6 hour run increase load to 110 rated value and take readings every 15 min for 1 h Prime power units only 323 After completion of run demonstrate operation of all shut down devices and alarms including 1 Overcranking Overspeed High engine temp Low lube oil pressure Short Alternator overvoltage AO O1 iS CO WD P D Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre ower Generation iesel Section 16622 Page 5 Low battery voltage or no battery charge 24 8 Manual remo 29 High altern 4 Next install con record frequency and
146. COUNTER RECEPTACLE 2 10 STOVE 50A 2P STOVE 4000 50A 20 a g m 21 fn m J gt x d S gt Fb e e gt fo a o o o MICROWAVE 2 RECEPTACLE 15A ME COFFEE 1 RECEPTACLE Pa 15A PRS PN COUNTER RECEPTACLE 1R 11 32 15 300 MR 1R 2 33 300 1R WATER COOLER RECEPTACLE 15 Rees COUNTER RECEPTACLE 1R 200 131 34 15A 300 HR s pu mj 1R 800 14 300 18 FRIDGE 1 RECEPTACLE 20A m COUNTER RECEPTACLE 15 e e e MI ETIN 8 o A a gt F 11 2 FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS 3 FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS H Az VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS PH A 7893 CAPACITY PH B 9355 MOUNTING SURFACE FLUSH PH C 12862 REMARKS TOTAL 30110 NOT INCLUDING PART 2 PANEL SCHEDULE SIVIS ENGINEERING EG PART 1 SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers STE 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 smsf smsann cnm FILE 05 015 01 07 06 GSELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL EG PART 2 LOCATION RM 131 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 Designation c 8 E 8 5 8 amp izl 1 3 Designation 5 d 5 E gt gt 12 ES T m
147. CUTION 34 1 Installation al Secure equipment with lead anchors to solid masonry tile and plaster surfaces to poured concrete with cast in or expandable 22 Secure equipment inserts 3 Secure equipment with toggle bolts 4 Secure surface mo inverted T bar ce to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings unted equipment with twist clip fasteners to ilings Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified befor installation Provide additional support as required MS Support equipment conduit or cables using clips spring loaded bolts cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members Project No 674 2005 Fastenings Section 16191 Alternate Emergency and Supports Page 2 Communication Centre 6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps sal One hole malleable iron straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller 2 Two hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm 23 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel Work Suspended support systems lt I Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips 2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impracti
148. Communication Centre Conduit Fittings Conduits in Cast in place Concrete runs embedded in concrete shall not be larger in outside diamet in which they ar mbedded nor shall three diameters on centre nor so located as to impair unduly strength of the construction Where installed in columns the g conduit shall be placed in the centre of the column and then offse so th runs in concrete shall be inspected and approved by Structural shall not be embedded in floating concrete slab construction unless specifically indicated otherwise Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall Where conduits pass through waterproof membrane provide oversized sleeve before membrane is installed Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross overs Conduits Underground Slope conduits to provide drainage than one quarter 1 4 the thickness of the slab wall or beam Engineer or his representative before concrete is poured Conduit Except with the approval of the Structural Engineer all conduit they be spaced closer than the to the outlet box In no case shall the conduits be placed t there is less than 25mm of concrete covering All conduit Project No 674
149. DY LITE RX5200L LED METAL FINISH DUAL LITE ADRW LED SERIES GAPROJECTS 2000 00000MJA SJC SPECS esxxx 0080_LTG xls LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 2 of 2 07 03 2006 3 19 PM PANEL EB FED FROM 6MD EA SEWAGE PUMPS 5 a 8 SEWAGE PUMPS t VOLTAGE CAPACITY 225A MOUNTING SURFACE REMARKS SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS LOCATION LOCATION 2 gt d 8 SEWAGE LIFT SEWAGE LIFT SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ELEVATOR ROOM PIT LIGHTS ELEVATOR PIT ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM MTS ROOM gt zle w w 5 U s a gt m gt a gt a gt a gt a gt a gt o lo o 5 gt e e a m MTS ROOM CU 16 CU 17 a gt e Us 38 2 pet s SRR EE jo 42 1248 347 600VV 30 4W PANEL SCHEDULE EB 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 07 Mar 06 PANEL EC LOCATION ROOM 122 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION ROOM 115 Designation Designation Hi 24 a gt je y o A SPCO FURNITURE 2 SPCO FURNITURE a gt DISPATCH FURNITURE CALL TAKERS
150. Designation 1 3 Designation PEEL lam t gt e 2 gt a gt gt RECEPTACLES OFFICE 203 3R RECEPTACLES OFFICE 204 3R lead 15A 2 7 gt a gt Q gt gt MS m e gt RECEPTACLES OFFICE 205 3R e e gt gt RECEPTACLES OFFICE 206 3R e 2 e RECEPTACLES OFFICE 209 3R RECEPTACLES OFFICE 207 3R 15 RECEPTACLES OFFICE 208 3R a RECEPTACLES CORR 201 3R Pa 15A PRINTER RECEPTACLE 1R 15 1000 COPIER RECEPTACLE 1R 1000 200 FLOOR RECEPTACLE a 15 400 BUZZER 15A gt gt e E 23 25 pan o x a ta to an A s 3643 VOLTAGE 120 208 30 4 LOADS PH A CAPACITY 225A PH B 2700 MOUNTING SURFACE PH C 4148 REMARKS TOTAL 10491 PANEL SCHEDULE NE 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR FILE 05 015 01 07 Mar 06 S ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Enginee 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STO SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL NF LOCATION MECHANICAL ROOM FED FROM TR NF 6CDP A LOCATION MECHANICAL ROOM ICkt bkr Phase Lo Designation ence CONFIRM ON SITE SPARE Designation w o jo lo o
151. Engineers CB 0 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON COMMUNICATION CENTRE Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet sms smseng com 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG ed 5 01 JAN 2006 ED 4 259 aa Aia ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Drawn Approved By Reference SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers AA CB 0 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada COMMUNICATION CENTRE 02 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS TEST Power on Indicator Communication System Trouble Lamp Communication System Trouble Indicator Communication System Trouble Silence Switch Paging Al Call Switch 2177 7 Paging All Call Lamp 1 1 Individual Paging Zone Select Switches Individually Tested Individual Paging Zone Select Indicators 2 Trouble Lamps Voice Paging 5 Microphone Press to Talk Switch One minute inhibit of Voice Communication during the first minute of alarm signalling Emergency Voice Paging Loudness Level Emergency Voice Paging Operates on AC Power on Emergency Voice Paging Operates on All Call on Emergency Power Emergency Telephone Call in Lamp a i Emergency Telephone Call in Audible Signal Individual Telephone Zone Select Switches Individually Tested Individual Telephone Zone Select Indicators Emergency Telephone Verbal Communication Module Alignment De Lo Plug in Components Securely in Place Are Ex
152. FURNITURE a gt DISPATCH FURNITURE EU o o gt o gt r r a al d gt gt gt gt A5 m 2 2 T T Ti cl c c 8 2 2 2 21 Z j d cd c Z 2 2 m 15 m a w w w w t2 N gt cs e H gt CALL TAKERS FURNITURE a gt a gt 22 1 5 g BN E 18 jo o o jo o lo 5 o DISPATCH FURNITURE gt CALL TAKERS FURNITURE DISPATCH FURNITURE A CALL TAKERS FURNITURE 15A 911 CONSOLES FURNITURE 1R 1R CALL TAKERS FURNITURE 15A 911 CONSOLES FURNITURE 1R 1R CALL TAKERS FURNITURE 15A 15 1R DUTY INSPECTOR 1R CALL TAKERS FURNITURE 15A m 15A 1R WIRING CLOSET 125 1R 10 CALL TAKERS FURNITURE 15A 1R WIRING CLOSET 125 1R 1200 CALL TAKERS FURNITURE SPARE AC 5 15A a gt SPARE 6 SPARE AC 7 a gt n e ae N 8 3 FIRE SMOKE DAMPER AC 9 AC 10 15A 120 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLE RM 126 LIGHTING RM 124 125 127 A LIGHTING RM 122 e e gt gt ma m LIGHTING RM 122 LIGHTING RM 122 Jj Ti d A A m m Se gt gt Em m 2 23 N N 2 B gt VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS PH A CAPACIT
153. G bare ground wire shal ted to maintain l be installed fibre the an insulated ground fitting PVC in all cable trays System and Circuit Grounding points of 600V and 208 V system Equipment Grounding 342 1 34 3 3 4 ell 277 Install grounding connections to typical but not necessarily limited to following equipment list transformers frames of motors motor co control building steel Work gen panels distributions panels outdoor lighting Grounding Bus wall of electrical room in ntrol centres erators Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated suppor room Ground items of electrical ground bus with individual minimum size 3 0 AWG equipment electrical Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral included in Service equipment starters elevator ts on bare stranded copper connections Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Grounding Section 16450 Secondary Page 4 Communication Systems 242 Sound manufacture Field Quali Perform tes Perform gro Telephones with telephone instal fire alarm rs installat make Install grounding connections for telephone data sound fire alarm intercommunication systems telephone grounding system in acc
154. G or less Clamps or connectors for armoured cable aluminum sheathed cable mineral insulated cable flexible conduit non metallic sheathed cable as required PART 3 EXECUTION Sw Installation VI Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and ad Install pressure type wire connectors and tighten 2 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22 2 No 65 3 Install fixture type connectors and tighten Replace insulating cap 4 Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1x24 END Project No 674 2005 Fastenings Section 16191 Alternate Emergency and Supports Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 421 Basic Products Workmanship Section 01600 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 23 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fitti 4 Cabletroughs M Wires and Cables PART 2 PRODUCT 24 Support Channels 21 U shape size 41 Suspended or set required ngs Section 16114 Section 16122 x 41 mm 2 5 mm thick surface mounted in poured concrete walls and ceilings or as Fal Manufacturers B Line Burndy Electrovert Unistrut Pilgrim Pursley PART 3 EXE
155. Impulse Level BIL standard 6 Hipot standard 47 Average sound level standard 8 Impedance at 75 deg C standard 9 Enclosure sealed 10 Mounting floor or wall as indicated 11 Finish in accordance with Section 16010 23 Electro Statically Shielded Transformers 21 Dry type transformers to CSA C22 2 No 47 CSA 9 2 Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project 23 Type ANN K rating to be minimum K 13 or as indicated on drawings Parking lot transformers need not be K 13 rated 4 3 phase 600V Delta primary 120 208V wye secondary 60 Hz copper windings or aluminum windings 5 Voltage taps 4 at 2 1 2 two FCAN two FCBN 6 Insulation Class H 150 C temperature rise above 40 C ambient 7 Basic Impulse Level BIL standard 8 Hipot standard 59 Average sound level 50 db for up to 150 kVa and 55 db above 150 kVa Project No 674 2005 Dry Type Transformers Section 16461 Alternat Emergency up to 600 V Primary Page 3 Communication Centre PART Common noise attenuation of 60 db Impedance at 75 deg to be 3 to 5 for transformers up to 225kVA minimum 3 75 for 225 kVA transformers and 5 for transformers 300 and larger Enclosure EEMAC 1 removable metal front panel sprinkler proof in sprinklered buildings Mounting floor or wall Ne
156. Maintenance Data PM Provide operation and maintenance data for Fire Alarm System for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Manual and in Section 16010 o Include Operation and maintenance instructions for complete fire alarm system to permit effective operation and maintenance 22 Technical data illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers 23 Copy of as built shop drawings LET Warranty will Warranty all Equipment Sensors materials peripherals installation workmanship etc for one 1 year from the date of final acceptance of the system Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 4 Communication Centre Two Stage 12 Provide a complete inspection and testing of the fire alarm 23 1 8 2 1 1 9 ee 2 14210 1 22 3 152141 21 system 1 year after final acceptance Inspection tests to conform to be ULC S536 Submit inspection report to Engineer Provide all programming of system as directed during the warranty period at no cost to Owner Maintenance Provide one year s free maintenance with two inspections by manufacturer during year The second inspection can be done at the same time as the ULC S536 inspection and testing specified in 1 7 Warranty Training Arrange and pay for on site lectures and demonstrations by fire alarm equipment manufacturer to train oper
157. Monet MNX IL Series 2 6 Cover Plates sl Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project 72 Stainless steel cover plates for wiring devices mounted in flush mounted outlet boxes to be minimum plate thickness of 1 0mm 3 Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surface mounted utility boxes 4 Cast gasketted cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes Project No 674 2005 Wiring Devices Section 16141 Alternate Emergency Page 4 Communication Centre e Weatherproof double lift spring loaded cast aluminum cover plates complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles as indicated 6 Weatherproof cover plates complete with gaskets for single receptacles or switches as indicated PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation 24 Switches af Install single throw switches with handle in UP position when switch closed m Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one Switch is required in one location Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 16010 or as indicated 4 Where pilot lights are required or shown on the drawings install flush neon pilots in outlet box grouped with associated switch 5 Study the Architectural plans and co operate with other trades so that the location and elevation of switch outlets shall not necessitate any unnecessary cutting of d
158. NGINEERING EH PART 2 sus Engineering L tdl Consulting Engineers 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com FILE 05 015 01 07 Mar 06 GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL EJ LOCATION RM 201 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 Designation Load Load Designation 22 240 FRIDGE RECEPTACLE RM 202 SPARE TABLE RM 202 SPARE 300 5 TABLE RM 202 2 SPARE 300 RECEPTACLE RM 202 2R SPARE 400 7 8 SIR 9 8 Oo 8 e e a E l Fl o e gt ER gt N gt a gt a gt a gt N gt a gt DO sO vS Ra m A 2 m e 5 4 gt m A e E s3233 jl t2 e 2 fe fe wo oo sl VOLTAGE 120 208 30 4 LOADS PH A 1680 CAPACITY 225A PH B 1040 MOUNTING SURFACE PH C 1200 REMARKS 3920 PANEL SCHEDULE SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H ON3 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 FILE 05 015 01 sms smseng com DATE 07 Mar 06 GAELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL DULE 10 of 26 07 03 200610 39 PANEL N LOCATION RM 131 FED FROM 2CDP A LOCATION RM 115 FLOOR RECEPTACLE RM 131 1R FLOOR RECEP
159. NOISIAIG YITIOYLNOO HOS 216 di voz Aoc 21 LZL WY 109 LV3H3M 914493573 9 233 LV LO3NNOOSIG NOILV201 YALYVLS evw Nvw ON HNO DU oveuavis 170 E bos iri 31naaHos YOLOW OF G 2UUC GU ZU LO SLO GO gor MNYd 3NIOSINISSV 002 230 9 SIX CHL ISmNvoxseisoecsuunj deo 0001000715 LOS COHAN 9 9 A009 GL WOOM HOIN H31VM LOH d CLEC 92 95 93 el 921 NOOM HOSSHHdlNOO HIV SM 2 86 83 L WOO HO3N dWAd SS3Hd SS30X3 b d Wal WWOINVHOSW 9 lN3W3SsVva8 LOH LMH Wa IVOINVHO3IA V dd29 LOH C LMH We TVOINVHO3M V dQd29 IN3W3SV8H YSLVM LOH L LMH INOOH e ga WOO JNIHOVIN HOLVAG T3 ved CLEC 106 WY L 3N LOZ WH 195019 i IN HONNI 9 70 GOL WY LSNWHX3 WOO HONNI WY HONNI 07 93 9t 0 SOL Wd LSNVHX3 WOO HONfTI cie WY V dQd29 INJA WOO 01 3 ANUWdSVH NOLLV N NYIN ON 2 SLIOA NOIL
160. NOO pins NOILV2OT1 W3luvis d 5vw Nvw uno Svenas SHOA NOIL V201 JINGAHOS YOLOW Or o VUUC GUL ZU 430 AINGSHOS YOLOW LS ere e OS OION L0 SL0 SO gor MM Vd 3NIOSINISSV 00 L 1Nanasvyg V JN Ajala 80 1 880 JOYdSTIMYYO 6 4 lVISOWM3HI OL SHIM OL9L NOISIAIG SLL INS Lt H3 l l 28 0 SLL NH NOLLV ILLN3A WOON Ox 13 8 4 4 4 61 03 80 WHY 34ONS 4 TVNSIS Vd 391 18814 LYYLS dOv4d O voH zie WY 2 33 Aozi se 0 ZEL WM ISNMVHX3 340WS 9 4 TWNOIS 3991 15814 NOdN LYVLS dOv4 O voH 21 VOL WY 87 95 l l se 0 901 WY lSnvHX3 340WNS 8 4 15 V s SOVLS 158814 14715 voH 60L INS 98 03 l l se 0 601 We 15 SHOWS t d TWNOIS V s 391 15814 NOdN LYVLS SLL NM V ON 2570 6LL WY WOOMSHSVM 5 3 eMe SLL INS sor o LL We WOOHHSVM 2 4 uodn 1045 E 9ZL WY MOOTYSLNI 921 V3 dlN9 A009 8 TVOINVHO3NWN bd 4 9 ON eL GL NOISIAId N3TIOMLNOO HOS 2182 92 091 Agoz z V WY WOO 1V3H3 21510919 1 93 LINN LY LOANNOOSIC 3GlAOSd S AN GL
161. PS1344 and LTC 8900 series tegrate the CCTV system into the SMS c w full PTZ S egration AV is option shall provide seamless ns incl single workstation live or recorded audio visual Audio and video may be accessed via a real time list or alarm monitor screen users shall be able and download real time or archived AV the sys 2 search recordi any events have fa frame allow f 355 Th DVR pro MI an 2 223 24 76 Metasys el T interfa Control supporting either M3 or M5 workstations It llow the Metasys wor and control o kstations in real time a alarms M5 wor tem to retrieve ng f camera SE f or Pan tocols Nice protocol time graphical map Depending on from any time Query options shall ID forward pause and stop control e system shal h approved Digital Video Recording integration shall all uding frame rate and resolution as well as to ti not required on this project integration of the DVR systems The low authorized users to manage camera from a nerated on the DVR equipment surveillance camera incl and DVR ID The rewind go to f 5 zoom control version 8 0 d message filtering Loronix protocol Verint Sm Johnson Controls Digital series and DVN tegration Option BACnet integration option shall allow the SMS to BACnet via TCP IP to B
162. Produce layout sketches of conduit runs through mechanical and electrical service areas in order to pre avoid any conflict with other construction elements and to determine the most efficient route to run conduit PRODUCTS Conduits Rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit Epoxy coated conduit with zinc coating and corrosion resistant epoxy finish inside and outside Electrical metallic tubing EMT with couplings Minimum size shall be 19mm Rigid pvc conduit Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit FRE conduit Size 75 mm and above Conduit Fastenings One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and smaller Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel Work U channel type supports for two or more conduits at 1500 mm oc Surface mounted or suspended Six mm dia galv threaded rods to support suspended channels Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Conduits Conduit Section 16111 Fastenings and Page 2 Conduit Fittings Conduit Fittings Fittings for raceways PART 3 Fittings manufactured same as conduit to CSA C22 2 No 18 for use with conduit specified Coating Factory ells where 90 deg bends are required for 25 mm and larger conduits liners on connectors
163. Rating 300V Conductor Identification Colour coded Shielding Aluminum mylar foil 7 Outer Jacket 105 deg C red PVC jacket 8 Certification CSA Class 45851 01 File 1841741 49 Flame Rating 4 10 Refer to Fire Alarm section for wiring to suit addressable fire alarm systems 6 Low Voltage Control Cables 44 LVT 2 Conductor Solid Copper 18 AWG x3 Insulation Thermoplastic colour coded 4 Configuration single two conductor parallel three or more conductors twisted 25 Voltage Rating 30V 6 Outer Jacket thermoplastic sT Certification CSA C22 22 No 35 329 Flame Rating 4 Project No 674 2005 Wires and Cables Section 16122 Alternat Emergency Page 3 Communication Centre 10 PART 3 Mineral Insulated Cables Type M I two hour fire rated 2 Conductors 5 Solid Copper Sized as indicated 23 Insulation magnesium oxide 4 Configuration Single two three or four conductor as indicated 19 Voltage Rating 600V 6 Outer Jacket copper 7 Acceptable manufacturers Pyrotenax BICC Cables Pressure type connectors fixture type splicing connectors cable clamps and lugs as required RA90 Cables E Single conductor RW90 insulation minimum 600V 40 C 2 Stranded copper size as indicated me Liquid and vapour tight corrugated aluminum sheath 4 Overall PVC jacket rated FT 4 Variable Frequency Drive Power Cabl
164. SINIBOINE PARK DR Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 05 015 01 sme Memeann enm 07 Mar 06 GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LESWST PNL XLS PANEL SCHEDULE 19 of 26 07 03 2006 10 30 AM PANEL UA200 LOCATION RM 110 FED FROM CDP UPS A LOCATION RM 104 Designation Load Ckt Phase bkr Load Designation VA Trip WFPS 15A TRARA 1 1200 A 31 WFPS 15A 120 2 B WFPS 15A En 1200 3 c ed cula D fe 4 34 4 e WFPS 15A 1200 WFPS 15A 1200 WFPS 15 1200 1 WFPS 20 15 m WFPS mu 15 1200 WFPS 15A 1200 10 SPARE 15A SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SERVER RM 109 1600 RACK 2 m SERVER RM 109 RACK 2 SERVER RM 109 1600 RACK 3 SPARE SERVER RM 109 1600 RACK 3 SPARE SERVER RM 109 1600 RACK 3 VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADS 10800 CAPACITY 225A PH B 8400 MOUNTING CUSTOM PH C 8400 REMARKS TOTAL 27600 ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE 10 AWG MINIMUM 1 NEUTRAL PER CIRCUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PANEL SCHEDULE UA200 PROJECT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DR 05 015 01 07 06 SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada 0N3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 emeMemeann ram
165. Std incorporating destroyed by transients during the warranty period The panelboard shall be approved to CSA specification C22 2 The TVSS device shall be UL 1449 Component The TVSS device shall have passed all UL testing tandard Panel board markings shall Secondary Service Surge Protected Panelboards wal Integral Surge Suppressor 1 No 29 M1989 Recognized required by the UL 1449 s include clamp voltage at voltage at the panel 52 C3 hig ANS 23 S I I uppressors s EBEE 62 41 exposure waver 2j orm 1991 5 CUIIGI 4 MOV based 200 000 A S uppressors s t path uppressors s Each m IR rated fuses all incorpo Small round wiring be used in the pat all be cons odule shall The s race for surge current diversion the TVSS terminals as well as clamp board line terminal be independently tested with the category 20 kV 1 2 50us S 10 kA 8 20us per copper bus bars for the surge r plug in connections shall not truc be ted using surge current modules fused with user replaceabl S of each module shall be Project No 674 2005 Transient Voltage Section 16475 Alternate Emergency Surge Suppression Page 5 Communication Centre monitored on the front cover of the panelboard enclosure as well as on the m
166. TACLE RM 131 1R FLOOR RECEPTACLE RM 131 1 FLOOR RECEPTACLE RM 131 1Rj 200 FLOOR RECEPTACLE RM 131 1R 20 FLOOR RECEPTACLE RM 131 N N Br E gt 3 gt o 22 w ET e gt A A R e Trip 15A EEF4 15A EEF5 RECEPTACLE 100 6 gt zu gt e e a gt a gt w tA A Uu a gt TV RECEPTACLE 300 115 RM 131 PROJECTOR RECEPTACLE iR RM 131 2 2 gt a gt E e a gt co A e HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES RM 131 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES a 8 21 20 al m gt gt SPARE SPARE SPARE a gt SPARE a gt SPARE gt 012 amp SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE g gt m gt 1R COUNTER RECEPTACLE RM 131 ERC 1 N N e e gt a E o o E a r a gt a gt a gt ERC 2 N D e e e N eo RECEPTACLES RM 106 aM PIA 2 10 4R C 39 1600 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES E ERC 3 RM 101 103 105 5R A 40 1566 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES MI WEE 20A RM 104 2R 41 3P 1566 HOUSEKEEPING RECEPTACLES m FEE Pa RM 132 2R 42 1566
167. The assembler or his authorized distributor shall maintain a parts and service facility satisfactory to the Contract Administrator 29 The manufacturers shall ensure that the requirements of the Specifications are met and that the equipment to be supplied can be accommodated Project No 67 4 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 2 Communication Centre Shop eal Submi 2 Include Drawings t shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 2 3 4 model 5 6 7 8 9 10 Engine make and model with performance curves Alternator make and model Voltage regulator make model and type Automatic transfer switch with manual bypass switch make and type Battery make type and capacity Battery charger make type and model Control panel make and type of meters and controls Governor type and model Cooling air requirements in m s British standard or DIN rating of engine 11 12 on st drip 13 14 215 shop been accor labor Flow diagrams for 1 Diesel fuel 2 Lubricating oil 29 Cooling air Dimensioned drawing showing complete generating set mounted eel base including vibration isolators exhaust system trays and total weight Continuous full load output of set at 0 8 PF lagging Description of set operation in
168. U TGOGUIlts main 1 5 Install by Div Install clocks and control emergency power to be connect coils etc Controls nstall all electrical power feeders to starter cont Division 15 both electrical Wire and con unless otherwis and mechanical the trade supplying t noted h disconnects and associat d make connections to all mechanical equipment or mechanical systems cont transformers rein he control C switches gas fired un Interlock ro Wire and con alarms etc recirculatin n etc for f uit oftop uni float ote thermostats urnaces r 1 CS switches pumps booster pumps Wire and auto flus connect h urinals Install any packaged unit TH con wire and connect Section 15900 shall devices and fittings required Specified in 15900 Wire and connect electrical trol transformers electronic faucets ude wiring for control roof top air handling units boilers supply and install connections shall control panels condensing units electric heaters and rooftop HVAC units to condensing units as required pressure switches sewage pumps controls which are an packaged unit and are supplied by the trade be ins equipment mounted on the exterior of
169. V201 YALYVLS 20 4314918 4544915 YOLOW 3 1n03H2S YOLOW 4 GOLOW SPCCHLIN 1 00010002154 9 10 910 40 gor AAC 3NIOSINISSV 002 12efo4g 1sixa 9311 SNLLSIX3 HLNOS dnd 39vM3S 01 1 903859 1sixa YSLYVLS ONILSIXS Q33J33 HLNOS dWAd 32vM3s 6 92 WOON YSISICINNH L nH S OHINOO 39vM2vd HOAN 3as IVLSOWYSH L 3MIM 1 18 1Y WOON HOS 30VdS1MVHO Hun 33S lVISONWMZH L 3MIM 191 LV ONILVAH 30VdS 1MVHO un 1SY3HLNOS 33s IVISOWM3HL3MIA 1918 LY ONILVSH 4 1573 335 LVLSOWYSH L 3MIM 1 15 LY SNILV3H 30VdSMVHO ALIS NO 321 WHIANOD G31v203M SNILSIX3 WOO HO3W Oslo 9 d 921 WOON dnd OMIO3M 8 4 NH 5 1 H31VM LOH 399333 NOST LINDUID 1 52 10 NOILV2O1 M3luvis OOVRYSLYVIS 3 43 14915 JTINGAHOS HOLOIN HEATER SCHEDULE Project 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE Job Number 05 015 01 SMS WATTS VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION NOTES APPROVED MANUFACTURERS MM M M M 5 MANUFACTURERS
170. Vd deis LINDUID 45 vel NUM SLIOA on NOILV501 YyaLYVLS 1 ee 31n03H92S YOLOW Ur o JUJU CULI 439 Y IfIG3HOS YOLOW SIX ZHLIWN 00 000245 10 610 60 4equiny gor JAIN WaVd 3NIOSINISSV 002 eL dcvoc S9 p9 H3 Agoz 996 3004 LINN SNISNSQNO9 devoe 9 z9 H3 agoz 99 2 2004 LINN Zeno Ot devoe 19 09 H3 A80z 99 2 3004 LINN S9NISN3QNOO L dz voe 65 85 agoz 29 2 LINN 0L n2 L 29 96 43 1972 3004 LINN eno OL dz voe 99 9 Agoz 29 3004 LINN 8412 l de voce 01 26 29 3 A80z 99 2 3004 LINN ONISNSGNOO l dZ voe 01 LS OS H3 Agoz 99 2 J008 LINN 9NISN3QNOO 9 12 eL devoe 6v 8v H3 99 2 JOOM LINN SNISNSGNOO sno gl de v0 SL NOISIAIG 5 1 Ly 9v H3 l l A80c 35 5 3004 LINN E Joeuuoostp dM 1021 JAIL 331 Gt H3 A009 2008 LINN 9NISN3QNOO E n ze V3 OIN9 1021 E 1 9uuoosip ANAL 3371 OLHZ A009 3008 LINN 9NISN30NOO z no 2 V3 QN9 04901 y OERLIS ovn nun SLIOA NOILV201 hi
171. Voice data and interphone outlets 400mm 423 Vall mounted telephone and interphone outlets 1500mm 6 Fire alarm stations 1370mm 2 Fire alarm bells 2290mm 8 End of line resistors 1830mm 9 Television outlets 400mm 5220 11 mounted speakers 2100mm 11 Clocks 2100mm 12 Door bell pushbuttons 1500mm 13 Nurse call and receptacles at bed locations 1525mm 14 per Architectural elevations 15 Heights as above or at bottom of nearest block or brick course 16 Heights to match existing where applicable Operation and Maintenance Data Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into 4 operation and maintenance manuals specified Include in operations and maintenance data w Details of design elements construction component function and maintenance requirements to permit effective start up operation maintenance repair modification extension and expansion of any portion or feature of the electrical installation 2 Technical data product data supplemented by bulletins component illustrations exploded views technical descriptions of items and parts lists Advertising or sales literature alone not acceptable features is 23 Wiring and schematic diagrams performance curves 4 Names and addresses of local suppliers RES Copy of reviewed shop drawings Provide five 5 complete hard backed D ring loose leaf M
172. Voltage Configuration thr phase wye 4 wire plug ground 512 Voltage Range 468 762 27 18 at 600 nominal 3 Frequency 45 to 65 Hz 4 Power Factor 0 95 lagging minimum over entire load range UPS Inrush Current 116A peak for one cycle maximum at nominal 208V input 26 Current Limit 125 of nominal AC input current maximum wt Current Distortion 30 THE maximum from 50 load to full load 8 Surge Protection Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in ANSI C62 41 1991 Categories A and B 46 AC Output UPS Inverter si Voltage Configuration 120 208 thr phase 4 wire plus ground 22 Voltage Regulation 1 three phase RMS average for balanced thr phase load 1 5 for 100 unbalanced load for combined variation eff ects of input voltage connected load battery voltage ambient temperature and load power factor MC Frequency Nominal 60 Hz 4 Frequency Slew Rate 1 0 Hertz per second default Field selectable from 0 3 0 5 1 2 and 3 Hz per second 5 Phase Displacement 120 deg 1 deg for balanced and unbalanced loads Project No 674 2005 Uninterruptible Section 16610 Alternate Emergency Power System Page 3 Communication Centre 6 Bypass Line Sync Range From 0 1 to 5 0 Hz in 0 1 Hz increments user selectable 7 Voltage Distortion 2 total harmonic d
173. WG The suppressor shall have a response t nanoseconds for any of the individual X incorporating unlimited replacements o they are destroyed by transients durin The suppressor shall be equipped with items l accommodate wir ime no greater th protection modes f suppressor part g the warranty pe the following opt alarm est the on the the necessary power and e sizes an 5 The suppressor will have a warranty for a period of five years if riod ional 44 TVSS units shall be equipped with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker 2 A transient voltage surge counter front cover of the switchboard The co AC power shall be located on the unter shall be equipped with a manual reset and a battery to retain memory upon loss of 3 A DB 9 connector shall be provided along with dry contacts allow connection to a remote monitor or other system The output of the dry contacts normally open or normally closed to shall indicate a failure of a phase or 4 A remote monitoring device shall the entire unit be provided to di rectly connect to the suppressor with a DB 9 connector for simple installation The device will have indicator lights to monitor each AC phase for a fault or good condition and include an audible alarm to indicate module failu Service Entrance Panelboard In
174. Y PH B 10852 MOUNTING SURFACE FLUSH PH C 11405 REMARKS TOTAL 32039 NOT INCLUDING PART 2 PANEL SCHEDULE ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 G AELECTRIC STD SCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL EC LOCATION ROOM 122 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION ROOM 115 Designation amp E 8 e o 70 a 5 2 kt 5 Designation 2 gt li 2 gt BASEBOARD HEATER RM 127 124 di gt sho BASEBOARD HEATER Us amp A o co e e e BASEBOARD HEATER w e UJ gt 0 o gt A 9 x m gt 4 m 2 1212 121 c a 8 e e e A 288 BASEBOARD HEATER 2 8 a gt SPARE 2810 2 1000 54 C 75 15 400 55 16 15 200 56 77 SPARE a gt gt gt a n ES ol ol 0 2 D m m 2 gt za 2 a F Lr OI c m m 8 S S Q 3 E SS UR o I d 8 m ta oo VOLTAGE 120 208V 30 4W LOADSTOTAL PH A 10400 NOT INCLUDING PART
175. ___ CHROMALOX AS8F205 208V 19 SLOPE TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPRO0508 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK 5702250201 647mm LONG STELPRO CBB605 8 CHROMALOX AS8F410 208 16 SLOPE TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPR1008 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK ST04250201 1223mm LONG STELPRO CBB 1210 8 CHROMALOX AS8F615 208 12 SLOPE TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPR1508 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK ST06250201 1835mm LONG STELPRO CBB 1815 8 CHROMALOX AS8F717 208V 1 51 TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPR1758 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK ST07250201 2140mm LONG STELPRO CBB 2117 8 CHROMALOX AS8F820 208 12 SLOPE TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPR2008 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK ST08250201 2400 mm LONG STELPRO CBB 2420 8 CHROMALOX AS8F025 208 12 SLOPE TOP TYPE CONVECTION OUELLET OPR2508 HEATER IVORY COLOUR Q MARK ST10250201 3054 mm LONG STELPRO CBB 2725 8 CHROMALOX BLTD 240V 1 BUILT IN THERMOSTAT 2 POLE OUELLET F TB2 BI METAL SWITCH RATED Q 17A Q MARK TA2ANWRC STELPRO N2T1 CONNECT TO ADJACENT CONTROLLED HEATER CHROMALOX TD902 240V 1g WALL MOUNTED LINE VOLTAGE OUELLET T 498B THERMOSTAT 2 POLE RATED 16A Q MARK T498B STELPRO RJ32B2 CHROMALOX T86A BL LVC WALL MOUNTED LOW VOLTAGE OUELLET T86A R841C THERMOSTAT TO CONTROL HEATER Q MARK T86A LTR 1 C W L V RELAY amp TRANSFORMER STELPRO T86A R 841C CHROMALOX BL LVD LOW VOLTAGE RELAY BUILT INTO OUELLET R841D HEATER C W
176. able management Vertical cable troughs to be Panduit type G slotted wall duct 4 in wide by 5 in deep Mount trough on unistrut to bring face of trough 1 in out beyond face of patch panels mounted on wall brackets Vertical trough to extend the height of the wall mounted brackets 240 Provide vertical cable management troughs in the center of each column of equipment brackets for horizontal and backbone cable management Vertical cable troughs to be Panduit type G slotted wall duct 4 in wide by 5 in deep Provide number of cable troughs to meet cable manufacturers percent fill recommendations Vertical trough to extend from the top of the wall mounted brackets up to the ceiling space 8 Additional acceptable Manufacturers Ortronics 27 Wire Management 21 Provide a horizontal wire management panel between patch panels or above and below a patch panel for patch cables 2 Horizontal wire management panels shall be 2 rack units high with 5 finger retaining rings minimum 3 Allow for an additional fifteen 15 horizontal wire management panels for active electronics patch cables Locations to be determined on Site Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 9 Communication Centre Cabling 4 Provide one cable support bar 5 deep min on rear of equipment rack or cabinet for each patch pane
177. acilities to manage specific areas more easily For example a controlled substance room can be monitored and the system will be able to report and display in real time how many and which cardholders are within the area at any given time Air Crew PIN ad The SMS s personal ident hall allow the definition of air crew ification numbers PIN to be used at PIN readers connected to D600 AP panels and CK7xx panels version 2 3 and higher Once the Air Crew PIN numbers are defined a system administrator shall enable or disable the Air Crew PIN feature W hen this feature is enabled entering the assigned Air Crew PIN number shall allow access at the door Air Crew PIN n umbers shall be assigned to a group of people or shall be assigned individually to an Air Crew member with different access needs Presenting a badge shall not be required when using the Air Crew PIN Number feature Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Security Management Section 16902 Page 19 Integrated System 98 39 40 41 42 43 44 Cotag P9 Mark 00 Mar configura be limited to are thr Smart zr Thi download terminal There ar Input and Download typ 4 Ou S feat group thr tion th the s of I O tput 2 Feature
178. adge Trace Audit trail Panel Host Elevator Cabinet Area Mustering Guard Tour 33 Elevator Control Not used on this project The server shall have the ability to control compatible elevators using a CK7xx series controller This feature shall allow up to 16 elevators per controller and a maximum of 128 floors History of elevator activity shall be maintained in electronic or print ted provide two types of elevator int 1 Low Level Interface eleva LOT form The SMS shall races Low level interface tors have readers associated with a set of output Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 18 Communication Centre System 34 599 36 37 points and an optional set of input points The field panel shall work with the elevator manufacturer s control system using output points to enable car call and input points to monitor car call buttons buttons The panel shall grant access to a floor by enabling the corresponding car call button when a badge is presented at a reader installed in the elevator cab The SMS shall provide a D620 ECG elevator mode that if selected causes a modification in the badging sequence and in the elevator input and output points behavior Level Interface The SMS shall allow the 42 High CK7xx controllers t
179. adges badge layouts badge fields badge IDs badge encoding automatic badge numbers setup Cardholders Field devices such as panels terminals terminal groups input points and groups output points and groups Access groups Holidays time zones panel holidays and panel time zones Access templates Companies and Departments Soft alarms Site Parameters Workstations Maps and map icon sets User Defined Fields Events Panel card event Alarms alarm filters alarm history alarm response text alarm colors and alarm instructions sou tou mas mas mac pat tri Message forwarding Permission groups Panel relays Reports MIS Interface mage recall filters Counters BACnet elements s rces Guard Tour definition r history transactions Loop configuration Enterprise Sites and Elevator parameters ks floor groups Cabinet parameters ks door groups Area and area control layou Muster zones and muster his Connections CCTV elements including server switch ro system auxiliary monitor sequence tern and camera auxiliary Enable codes P900 elements such as flags counters gger links system parameters sequenc BACnet uch as action interlocks and station de inition and guard Enterprise Parameters including configuration floor including configuration door ts tory transact tions tour camera alarm pre
180. adoes tile fitments etc If this is not done this Contractor will be required to move these outlets at no additional cost to the Contract Properly locate all switches with reference to door swing regardless of indicated position or doorswing shown on electrical drawings 6 here finished construction of walls consist of a symmetrical pattern of finish materials install wall switches where directed by the Contract Administrator 7 Light switches in Kindergarten and Nursery Rooms shall be MTD at 9 3 0 above finished floor on the strike side of the door 8 Switches shall be mounted 1 4m 4 6 above finished floor on the strike side of the door vA Receptacles lt d Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location 2 Mount receptacles horizontally at height specified in Section 16010 or as indicated NS Install cordsets on ranges and dryers 4 Where switch and convenience outlets are shown close to one another mount receptacles below and in line with the switch 5 Where finished construction of walls consist of a symmetrical pattern of wood or other panels install and locate receptacles and switches as directed to suit the pattern 6 Suitably ground all receptacles with 12 green insulated wire to outlet box Project No 674 2005 Wi
181. aintenance Manuals These shall consist of typewritten or printed instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment provided under this section of the specification Manuals shall also contain shop drawings wiring diagrams test results and manufacturer s brochures on all equipment together with typed index tab sheets As work progresses record on one 1 set of drawings installed conduit layout as well as any approved changes and deviations from the original contract and or working drawings including outlets equipment and panel locations At completion of work submit to the Contract Administrator at the contractor s costs Project No Alternat 674 20 Emergenc 05 Y Communication Centre Electrical General equirements Page 1 Section 16010 8 1 34 reproducible Record Drawings in ACAD format The contract not be considered complete and no final payment shall be until these drawings are accepted by the Contract Administrator Provide separate drawings for each system in order not crowd d Temporary All tempo for same this sect Specifica Testing Test all circuits and wires for continuity resistance and high impedance grounds with an insulation resistance less high impedance grounds non conti or with All empty wire Test all rawings t shall made Lighti
182. al detector mode the analog detector shall continue to operate using sensitivity and environmental compensation information stored in its microprocessor at the time of communications failure The analog loop controller shall monitor the loop and activate a loop alarm if a detector reaches its alarm sensitivity threshold 11 Each device shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing and or custom addressing without the use of DIP or rotary switches Devices using DIP or rotary switches for addressing either in the base or on the detector shall not be acceptable 12 It shall be possible to program the analog devices into a minimum of 16 groups with a minimum of 32 devices per group It shall also be possible to link groups to program activities 13 The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any detector mounting base 2 9 Heat Detectors 1 Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors Fl The intelligent heat detector shall have a thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm 2 The integral micro processor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the
183. al devices Visu al alarm signal devices End of line devices Annu Syst Ancil l nciators em Chart Printer ary devices Stan Auxi Data Inte batteries liary control gathering panels po ps pa po Syst Othe m degrade operation functions etc ligent environmental compensation r features components etc as required 3 The loading of device loops shall be based on approximately 80 load Provide additional loops to comply with this loading where required or directed 4 The loading of speaker circuits strobe circuits shall additional circuits to comply with this directed 1 4 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies zi The equip and Building Code requirements 2 Manitoba Building Code 23 Local and Municipal By Laws 4 Authorities having jurisdiction 145 Shop Drawings circuits and chime not exceed 75 circuit capacity Provide loading where required or ment and installation shall comply with the current ULC Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Section 16723 Page 3 Communication Centre Two Stage Submit
184. all 2 Aeroflex with perforated hall be 75 dbA at 7 intake and discharge louvers ure shall enclos meters enclos duplex ting the right hand side to hall be The 5kW two incandescent light fixtures complete with 100 watt and one convenience GFI lock heater and battery charger shall be Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternat Emergency Diesel Page 12 Communication Centre Remote Alarm Panel Remote 16 point LED annunciator c w points as noted on plans 5 to be red colour for faults amber for pre alarms PART 3 Reverse polarity protected Lamp test pushbutton Short circuit protection Environmentally sealed Equipment Identification Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions Control panel Size 5 nameplates for controls such alternator breakers and program selector switch 2 Size 2 nameplates for meters alarms indicating lights and minor controls Fabrication Shop assemble generating unit including m Base Engine and radiator Alternator Control panel Battery and charger Automatic transfer equipment Base fuel tank WN EXECUTION Installation Locate generating unit and install as indicated Co
185. all be flush wall mount with a stainless steel front panel Provide phone numbers in glazed frames adjacent to station to indicate department master phone numbers Project No 674 2005 Intercom Sy stem Section 16761 Alternate Emergency Page 3 Communication Centre 25 Weatherproof Slave Station sali The slave station shall be TOA N8050DSWP 2 Communication shall be loudspeaking voice actuated 3 Mounting shall be flush weatherproof PART 3 EXECUTION Sud Installation Install equipment and wiring as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer s instructions E Interconnect system components 3 Program as required 4 Exterior station located at parking lot connects to CCTV camera when activated 3 2 Tests wil Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 22 Conduct intelligibility performance test and submit test results to Consultant END Project No 674 2005 Electric Heating Section 16800 Alternat Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 General zu All drawings and all sections of the specifications shall apply to and form an integral part of this section 1 2 Requirements Specified Elsewhere 11 Electrical General Provisions Section 16010 22 Conduits Conduit
186. ance testing feeders and Check resistance to ground before energizing times for all equipment up to 350V with a eeders and equipment with a testing w Contract Administrator to Administrator of dates advance notice to allo ts to attend meters uring and at conclusion of project ults for Contract ul tudy equipment and personnel required to Administrator s review ts and supplier s certifications in Maintenance Submit a complete Short Circuit and Time Current Coordination Study for the breakers and fuses provided under this contract as E well as for th the distributi e existing upstream breakers and If any exis ns in thi be adjusted for proper coordination be included in coordination S contract other brea kers affected must fuses affecting ting breakers mus ct ct the study and adjusted as required for proper Hydro protectiv devices to be included in the e Visit It shall be the to provide the protective study E For the new distributions include all existing upstream overcurrent protection 22 Drawings of existing distributions are not availabl site to obtain information 3 Curves shall be plotted on a standard log log scale as time versus current values on a common 600 Volt base responsibility of the Divisio
187. ance with Section 16010 PRODUCTS Po Po wi WN Potential trans cen tial Len th tial transi fol Ra formers owing characteristics Nominal voltage class as indicated Rated frequency Basic impul Indicate dimensions and connection details Transformers to CAN3 C13 dry type for indoor use 60 Hz se level 4 kV Me required Current Current transi Voltage ratio tering accuracy rating ormers fused with separate fuse block Fuses Lormers as indicated 15 Transformers to CAN3 C13 dry type for indoor use with following characteristics 1 2 Ra Nominal voltage class ted frequency Basic impul as indicated 60 Hz se level 4 kV Me Ra secondary 3 4 5 e 6 Continuous tering accuracy rating ted primary and secondary current as indicated 5 Amps 15 factor current rating as indicated Project No 674 2005 Instrument Section 16432 Alternat Emergency Transformers Page 2 Communication Centre i2 2323 wal A PART 3 34d zi 342 Positive action automatic short circuiting device in secondary terminals Mounting Brackets Potential transformers with mounting brackets to suit switchgear manuracturer Fabricate brackets and channels from electrogal
188. and Fittings Disconnect Switches Fused and Section 16440 Non Fused up to 1000V Motor Starters to 600V Section 16811 System Description Provide complete electrical power and control connections for mechanical equipment except as noted herein PRODUCTS Materials Include motor starters disconnects interlocks outlet boxes junction boxes equipment required to provide power wiring equipment unless otherwise indicated Include pushbutton stations motor protect interlocks conduit wire devices and fit conduit and wire fittings all associated for mechanical tive switches ttings required to provide control wiring for mechanical equipment except for temperature humidity control systems Unless otherwise noted motors and control devices shall be supplied by Div 15 Motor horsepower rai in the Div 15 specifications shall be as shown on the Div tings shall be as shown Motor voltage and phase ratings 16 drawings Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Mechanical Connections Equipment Page 2 Section 16192 Exterior Equipment 1 PART 3 weatherproof ECUT ION Power Wiring 4 Install equipment an nstall branch power feeders circuit wiring starters panels time equipment on C
189. and verify communications with other equipment 31 betw Port n devices 32 MSS Priority Reset A command or feedback and exchange data if necessary A connection that provides a means of communication The relative importance of system events signal that indicates that a monitored point has returned to its normal state having previously been at the alarm or trouble state Project No Alternat 674 2005 Communicat Emergency ion Centre P2000 System Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 6 t d t i 24 1 4 G 4 m 4 p b 4 b p 4 Security Management System network connections for the purpose of opera E 5 E 529 2206 237 368 34 Secure Mode hange of state in as transferred to the t Secured Area A phy hich access is controll Server The main co he SMS software stores ith the field controlle Service The proces unctions and operates i ntervention Soft Alarm Soft al roubl sical LO QT The normal state of an alarm input point this mode shall indica tamper location wil A that it e an alarm or state thin t ed mpu da rs S n arms and tion rat lai he system during instal nput point 39 Tamper A condi oint which indicates t Terminal Ter ter in tabase
190. ard table Once they wil including elevator access groups including the Panel Elevator Configuration Holidays iguration minal rms and ailable input is e is formats S of files the be available for 5321 to enable alarm to be generated when a cardholder adds 1 to digit does of the PIN not create a duress alarm code When this option is enabled the last digit of the PI a duress the last the 9 Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 21 Communication Centre System code is a 9 then the user substitutes a 0 for the 9 and this will trigger the duress alarm 53 Star Feature al The SMS shall provide the Star Feature available for 5321 and CK7xx panels version 2 2 and higher to enable cardholders to press the star key at the keypad plus a feature number to activate some of the panel s functions that are normally invoked from keypads that contain the A B C or D keys The 4 key acts as the Enter key it wraps up the previously entered keys and starts the processing of the key sequence It also clears the keypad buffer for the next command to be entered The key starts the feature selection process Once pressed the cardholder can activate one of the following features 0 Local Override followed by number of minutes 1 Enable event followed by event numb
191. arm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 10 SLT 18 sho 20 keep the relationship betw programmed alarm threshold vol the detector to prevent fal smoke 4 The control panel shall place each arm condition of in the presence of in an al twenty four thres detec 5 detectors and the limits of message shall of adjustment nours as due to 26 The system shall ini the cleaning was successful and display has been cleaned hold setting Upon reception of the tor shall be restored to it s pretest state be capable of monitoring the s display a message when a adjustment as a resul be displayed when th The system shall th n sensing chamber vol tage and the tage cons se indica to t K OL transparent a dynamic chec tions throughout the life or failure to alarm he syst the accuracy alarm report tor in the system m user every of the alarm the system tate of de t of det these contaminants X be capable of contaminants tor reaches t recognizin tor is approaching A second he limits g that a detector tiating a series of message readjusting reference The system shall recogni the alarm condition in a degrade mode of X X of processor f circ
192. ase and three h 4 All required breaker settings shall be listed in table form uding breaker details such as breaker type trip rating etc breakers with adjustable trips shall be included in this Maximum available short circuit currents shall be listed each bus This listing shall also include the interrupting ng of the protective devices actually supplied in the ract In all cases use actual val e types cable sizes cable ent etc ribution in the study shall the 10 Prof contract documents lues for transformer impedance lengths available utility fault Identification names and numbers for breakers and match the identification shown on The short circuit and coordination study shall be done by a essional Engineer licensed in the Province of Manitoba and the Engi 11 l2 gene 3 pane stud 14 leaf study shall be signed and sealed by the Professional Deer Ground fault curves shall be plotted on the same drawings as overcurrent curves to ensure Where there is a generator rator breakers proper coordination set the study shall include the Where there is equipment such as power factor correction ls with incoming breakers include these breakers in the y As a minimum the study shall be bound in a 3 ring loose binder and shall include zi A title sheet listing
193. at Emer 4 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 gency Addressable Page 22 Communication Centre Two Stage 9 of DI addre Fire Intel It shall be possible to address each module without the use P or rotary switches Devices using DIP switches for ssing shall not be acceptable Alarm Stations ligent Two Stage Fire Alarm Station 24 fully shall porti areas with 2 2 dia commu displ stori 23 Ameri Provide intelligent single action two stage non coded addressable fire alarm stations The fire alarm station be of metal construction semi flush mounting in finished ons of the building and surface mounting in unfinished Provide a locked test feature Finish the station in red silver PULL IN CASE OF FIRE lettering The intelligent fire alarm station shall have a minimum of gnostic LEDs A green LED shall flash to confirm nication with the loop controller A red LED shall flash to ay alarm status The fire alarm station sha ng up to 24 diagnostic codes The module shall be suitable for mounting on a North can 1 1 2 38mm deep 4 square box with 1 2 raise 4 of DI not b 25 stati Duct 3 d cover be capable of 13mm It shall be possible to address each module without the use P switches Dev
194. ata sh the ac values Necessary correc tual tes tive ac ted v fal shall kers etc inder y with test all list alues and within tion en Co re mpare firm ate that essional tested unt shall be il test resul that the cu Afte ly the equipm ful all Engineer um of 6 copies shall be submitt the ts to the rves as aL summary ent has good operating condition he testing agency and esponsible ed Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Electrical Requirements Secti Page General on 16010 14 29 3 the Operating and Maintenance Manuals Acceptable Supplier 21 Manengco Engine 2 7 8 Step 3 Siemens 4 Schneider 5 Cutler Hammer Drawings Carefully examine all drawings and specifica all work and all el of Service ering henson Mfg Ltd ectrical work i ndicated considered as a part of the work by this section unless otherwise Prior to to the Contract Admi or interference aff quarantee of same all Install with manuf The drawings accompanying show the general arr out but the exac determined as the outlets etc as correct but it s WO gi equipment as s location the date of the last addendum report nistr
195. ation dampers Panel door with formed edges and lockable handle with 2 keys Flexible conductors between door and fixed panel Instruments al Analogue or digital indicating type 2 accuracy rectangular scale flush panel mounting 21 Voltmeter scale 0 to 750 V 2 Ammeter ac scale 0 to 125 of rated amperage lt 3 Wattmeter scale 0 to 125 of rated kW 4 Frequency meter scale 55 to 65 Hz 5 Power Factor meter 26 Running time meter 22 Voltmeter selector switch rotary panel mounting four position labelled Off Phase A Phase B Phase C 223 Ammeter selector switch rotary maintained contacts panel mounting designed to prevent opening of current circuits four position labelled OFF Phase A Phase B Phase C x 4 Fuses or indicating instruments miniature glass fast acting fitted at rear of instrument 5 Instrument Transformers 21 Potential dry type for indoor use SN Ratio 600 to 120 22 Rating 600 V 60 Hz BIL 3 kV 2 Current dry type for indoor use Sl Ratio as required 2 2 Rating 600 V 60 Hz BIL 3 kV MIS Positive action automatic short circuiting device in secondary terminals Controls 21 Engine start button 52 Selector switch Off Auto Manual 23 Engine emergency stop button and provision for remote emergency stop button Project No
196. ational personnel in use and maintenance of fire alarm system Provide video tape 3 copies of all training provided 21 Provide training sessions which will explain general system operation to staff 2 Provide training sessions for staff to explain detailed operating and maintenance procedures Maintenance Materials Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010 Include 24 Ten spare glass rods for manual pull box stations 2 Ten spare lamps for Main Control Panel Provide a lockable metal cabinet to be installed as directed by the Owner 21 Provide 6 spare devices of each type used in unopened cartons and clearly labelled as to type of device smoke detectors heat detectors dual strobes bell strobes addressable relays detector bases pull stations etc Service The supplier of the system must employ factory trained technicians and maintain a service organization within driving distance of the job site Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 5 Materials UST ertinent HONS HOH i2 Any equipment proposed as equal to that conform to the standards herein In addition Consultant s approval bidding other than as specified manufacturer numbers and the specification for compliance Sectio
197. ations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening 4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit mineral insulated and armoured cable connections Reducing washers are not allowed 55 Maintain continuity of vapor barrier where boxes are installed in exterior walls and ceilings Use air vapor barrier boxes for outlets installed in walls or ceilings with a vapor barrier 6 Boxes to be mounted plumb and square with building lines T Where outlet boxes are shown on the drawings as being back to back shall have a minimum offset of 200 mm 8 between boxes to reduce sound transmission In no case shall thru wall boxes be used Project No 674 2005 Outlet Boxes Section 16132 Alternate Emergency Conduit Boxes Page 4 Communication Centre and Fittings 8 Install pull boxes or fittings in conduit runs where more than four bends are necessary Nm Install pull boxes where run exceeds 23 0 75 feet in length 10 11 junction outlets and pull boxes shall be so installed that they are always readily accessible 11 No power driven pins Ramset shall be utilized to secure boxes without specific approval from Contract Administrator 12 Check opening provided for each recessed outlet box an
198. ator cting any the work hese spe angement and ex and arr rk progresses ven on the draw defect discrepancy of this section or The breaker co ordination test report shall be included in tions relating to thereon shall be indicated at once omission the hown or as specified and in accordance acturer s approved shop drawings cifications are intended to tent of angement of all The location of eq the work to be carried parts shall be uipment ings are approximately modifications as may be found necessary or desirable at of installa requirements the Contract Suc Adminis details Architectur and this Section sha to accommodate these elevations and detai equipment and equipment Where drawings indic followed by conduit boxes are not shown they shall be instal tion to meet any struc governed by job conditions tu trator without Electrical drawings do not show all structural and struct make without conditions Ch ls for location to be conne al ur ate cable etc Wher ral or architectural additional charge hall be understood that they are subject to such the time h changes shall be implemented as directed by and other al conditions shall govern charge changes or additions eck all architectural plans of electrical devices cted the general locat
199. att Peter Thiessen 203 356 Furby St Winnipeg Manitoba R3B 2V5 Phone 204 788 4006 Fax 204 783 3818 2T Wescan Electric att Winnipeg Manitoba R3E 1P6 Phone 204 786 3384 Fax 204 To3 27505 15 7 Submittals Charlie Deeborn 1049 Logan Avenue iab Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals 22 Include 1 Technical data sheet supplied by cable manufacturer for the cables which are to be used The data sheets shall include 1 Mutual Capacitance 52 Impedance 43 DC Resistance 4 Attenuation 25 Near End Crosstalk 6 ACR zd Delay Skew 8 ELFEXT 2 Information outlets c w faceplates 23 Backboards patch panels troughs equipment racks wall mounted equipment racks wire management panels 4 Fiber Optic interconnection units connectors couplings 429 Grounding termination connectors 6 All test equipment 7 Instructions for storage handling protection examination preparation operation and installation of products 2 3 This information is to be revised to as built after construction is completed Insert as part of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals 128 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Provide Operation and Mai ntenance data for the Voice and Data Communications Cabling System for incorporation into manual Specified in Section 0130 22 In
200. aximum Project No 674 200 5 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 34 Communication Centre System D Read range shall be up to 5 6 The reader shall be rated for normal operation from 5 Eo 150 RF 24 The proximity card shall be encased in high impact sealed plastic with a surface suitable to receive an adhesive backed photo ID 4 Proximity Family Smart Card Readers not used on this project 20 All electronics shall be integrated and contained inside a single polycarbonate enclosure lt 2 Reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of surfaces including metal Maximum read range on metal shall be degraded to a point as specified by model selected oo The reader shall contain an integral color LED and audio tone to indicate a successful read 4 Reader size shall be no greater than 6 x 6 x 3 0d Technology of read shall be Johnson Controls specific 26 or 34 bit with site code user level and badge number output in 2 wire Wiegand D1 D0 26 Readers shall be personalized according to the controller type the data is sent ey Readers shall comply with ISO 14443 A or B as specified by smart card use 8 Smart cards shall be dual use insert or non contact containing at least an 8K microp
201. ble Project No Alternat Emergency 674 2005 Communication Centre P2000 System Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 33 from the manufacturer without Owner 29 Cards 10 Cards end and eq user s clot ISO 7810 s shall be shall uipped wit thing NOTE printed bef Proximity Tech ore punchin nology slots the markings if requested by the tandard credit card size have the capability to be slot punched at one h a strap clip to attach the card to the If using video badging badges should be 21 Furnish and install the reader style as called for in this Specification fd Standard range Proximity 4000 reader contact to 20 in vA The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader electronics inside a single polycarbonate enclosure 29 The reader shall operate when mounted a variety of surfaces including metal Maximum read range degradation when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50 percent 4 The reader shall contain an integral color LED and audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully read 25 The reader shall be 8 x 8 x 2 maximum 6 To be H I D 6005B Wigand
202. cal 20 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 1500 mm oc spacing 29 Provide metal brackets frames hangers clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs 10 Ensure adequate support vertically to equipment for raceways and cables dropped where there is no wall support 11 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables 12 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Contract Administrator 13 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits and in accordance with manufacturer s installation recommendations 14 Threaded rod to be minimum 6 mm diam or nickel plated Black steel rod is not acceptable Z Project No 674 2005 Mechanical Alternat Communication Centre Emergency Connections Equipment Section 16192 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere Mechanical Specifications Division 15000 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings Wires and Cables Section 16122 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes Section 16132
203. cal metallic tubing EMT except where specified otherwise 6 Use rigid pvc conduit or FRE duct for underground installations 21 Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas connection to recessed incandescent fixtures without a prewired outlet box connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures transformers and equipment subject to vibration or movement Provide a separate insulated grounding conductor within flexible conduit 8 Use liquid tight exible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp wet or corrosive locations 9 Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas Fill with compound 10 Conduit stubs from floor slabs where exposed to damage to be rigid galv steel 11 The conduit sizes as shown or indicated are the minimum acceptable and shall not be reduced without the approval of the Contract Administrator 12 Bend conduit cold Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1 10th of its original diameter 13 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm dia 14 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight 15 Install fish cord in empty conduits 16 Run a minimum of 2 25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and 2 25 mm spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush panel Terminate these conduits in
204. cator lights shal indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable 11 Suppressors shall have a minimum EFI RFI filtering of 34dB at 100kHz with an insertion loss ratio of 50 1 using Mil Std 220A methodology 12 Suppressors shall have a five year warranty incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor modules if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period 13 Suppressors shall be equipped with the following optional items ERI TVSS units shall be equipped with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker 2 A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the front cover of the suppressor The counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and a battery to retain memory upon loss of AC power 219 A DB 9 connector shall be provided along with dry contacts normally open or normally closed to allow connection to a remote monitor or other system The output of the dry contacts shall indicate a failure of a phase or the entire unit 4 A remote monitoring device shall be provided to directly connect to the suppressor with a DB 9 connector for simple installation The device will have indicator lights to monitor each AC phase for a fault or good Project No Alternat 674 2005 Transient Voltage Section 16475 Emergency Surge Suppression Page 6 Communication Centre
205. ce AA CB File No Setup Date Detail Sheet 05 015 01 JAN 2006 ED 2 TECHNICIANS PRE TEST CHECKLIST 1 Has building management been alerted that the fire alarm system is being tested and that alternate measures under the Fire Safety Plan should be implemented i YESX NO 2 Has an alternative plan been established to alert occupants and the local fire department should an actual fire condition occur during testing gt CE ue n YESX NO 3 Has remote central station been contacted regarding fire alarm testing YES X ND NAME OF PERSON CONTACTED AT THE CENTRAL STATION City of Winnipea 986 2349 3 TITLE Dispatcher TIME IN 8 39 __ DATE November 22 2004 TIME OUT 200pm 2855 TIME IN TIMEOUT TIME IN DATE TIME OUT S TIME IN DATE TIME OUT 4 Are there any ancillary functions that can impair building functions such as elevator capture fan shutdown door holders etc ST YESX NO Can these be disabled and tested by groups YESX NO 5 Have the building occupants been made aware of fire alarm testing YES X NO 6 Has a pre determined time nide Jor testing of signalling devices s YES X NO 7 Have provisions been made for acquiring access to the secured areas YES NO 8 Are spare reset and panel keys available TESX NO DEVICE LEGEND m va rs
206. ch which by actual checking change of unction relay entire Consultant k befor on Report shall as remote are required l observation of the entire f r fans shut down trol panel considered complete verification of the ication shall include actual field checking 4 fu also indicate operat to larm indicators door to be activa S nction 29 A ll cost in electrical 510 demon 11 directorie ying t certi submit as built sys directories has been verified Any errors in verifica complete reverification of all at discretion of Consultant ts associated wi tors on eac it 12 Contractor responsible for all cos y number of de verification report quan Sprinkler Flow Switches sprinkler flow switc 18 14 all strate Veri Upon completion of this in nsur tate in is not Veri of proper operation of ancillary devices and equipment fire alarm system verification report shall be s ties having jurisdiction minimum of Inspections Owner and authorit City of Winnipeg Acceptance prop tion of ancill ary functions unction etc the fire alarm con ts necessary for trade s th tender price X y identificat al Veri s and diagrams heir correctness l documentation to Con tem riser block diagram and all Indicate on a
207. ch Room Horn 1 n Cafetaria 5turagu Y i JR Roplaced Anall lunch Roon te 9 Halivay by 105 PE 5 5 8 103 T m d ii RO el 8 3 3 Date November 22 2004 This document Is printed on recycled paper CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada COMMUNICATION CENTRE 9 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet sms smseng com 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG Drawn By Approved Reference 05 015 01 JAN 2006 9 ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba 5 i EER Ground Floor forth Boba 8 By Worth Stir By Narth Janitor Rooy Boum 101 Room 103 Storage Rom 103 TTE ANE By Room 103 Roam 102 102 Room 102 Phatocony Room 104 Store Roon Rocm 105 Storage Room 105 Room 105 Room i22 diu By Boca 112 TET j Hy Men s Washroom 351 j 8151 J5 a 11
208. changes required by Inspection Department prior to making changes the work by Electrical Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from authorities having jurisdiction on completion of work to Contract Administrator Copies to be included in Maintenance Manuals Materials and Equipment Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Div 1 Equipment and material to be CSA certified or certified by an equivalent recognized certifying agency to meet Canadian Standards Where there is no alternative to which is certified obtain special approval Inspection Department supplying equipment from local Electrical or authority having jurisdiction Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 3 Communication Centre 4 Submit for Contract Administrator s approval a duplicate list of makes and types of all equipment and materials for this project prior to placing of orders for same This shall be done within fourteen 14 days of the award of the project contract to the General Contractor in order to avoid delays in delivery and completion 45 Any material or equipment ordered or installed without the Contract Administrator s prior approval shall if so directed by the Contract Administrator be removed and replaced with appr
209. cles fire alarm d work has commenced outlets switches telephon stations bells etc are subject Administrator who reserves from the position shown without change provided notice is given before the relat Request for Substitutes Applications for approval of substitutes materials or methods as substitutions for t shown shall be submitted in accordance with Engineering Observations Contractor s work will b Winnipeg and or Contract solely for purpose of determining general quality of work X for any other purpose not in interpretation of plans and specifications carry out work does not relieve Contrac employees of with plans specificat Winnipeg and or Contrac or alternate hose specified or B6 observed periodically by the City of Administrator or their representatives Guida ions nce will and ered to Contractor be o to assist him to Observation and directives given to Contractor tor and his agents their responsibility to erect and install work in all its parts in a safe and workmanlike manner servants and and in accordance nor impose upon the City of t Administrator or their representatives Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 6 Communication Centre any responsibility to supervise or oversee erection or
210. clude 0 Submittals 1 Instructions for complete Voice and Data Communications Cabling System to permit 72 Technical data ill catalogue numbers aro Copy of approved sho and marks removed except 4 Vendor s list of rec ffective operation and maintenance ustrated parts lists with parts p drawings with corrections completed for reviewed stamps ommended spare parts for system Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 5 Communication Centre Cabling Lo Provide name address and telephone number of the 1 10 Tee Contractors servic warranty period 6 Provide name address and telephon service representative to be contacted period 7 Complete records of all Administrative labeling 3 1 2 disk 8 A 3 diskette 9 Complete Record Drawings Manufacturers Warranty Warranty all passive equipment representative to be contacted during the number of the Vendor s during the warranty Administration labeling data to be in electronic database format on materials and included on hardcopy of Record Drawings table of all test results to be included in hardcopy and installation and workmanship for one 1 year The warranty must assure the support of all premise standards applications as listed in E standards Training Contractor shall provide t
211. cluding 21 Automatic starting and transfer to load and back to normal power including time in seconds from start of cranking until unit reaches rated voltage and frequency 2 Manual starting 23 Automatic shut down and alarm on 24 Overcranking Overspeed High engine temp Low lube oil pressure Short circuit Alternator overvoltage Lube oil high temperature Thermistor overtemperature on alternator Low battery voltage battery charge 10 Other shutdowns and alarms as required by CSA C282 Submit engine generator set performance tests together with drawings before manufacture of equipment Tests shall have carried out on a prototype of the generating set series in dance with procedures certified by an independent testing atory Tests shall include the following wl Max power level Max motor starting capability Single step load pick up Torsigraph analysis Steady state and transient Steady state and transient Harmonic analysis and vol C voltage response frequency response age waveform deviation Co GESCE cel Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Power Generation Diesel Se Pa ction 16622 ge 3 8 electrical Operation and Mai Provide operation an incorporation int Include in Operat
212. code to control the triggering of the event card activated event 3 Event trigger type card only PIN card PIN code card code void card 4 Event privilege level 0 7 122 Duration of the event execution 0 1440 minutes 6 Input point group to be suppressed or not Project No Alternat 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Emergency Communication Centre System Security Management Section 16902 Page 12 Le 517 41 Output point group to be activated or not 8 Door 22 Reset panel alarm relay 2 Host Events Triggers The SMS operator with a scrolling list of ev strike operation enabled disable shall provide the which may be combined with th vent nt sequence triggers operators listed below to program a events The SMS shall sequence logical custom sequence of be delivered with this functionality regardless of whether or not these f by the user upon initial x3 Host Events Actions The SMS scrolling list of event sequenc the user atures are implemented installation shall actions to attach one or more actions provide a and shall allow to th vent sequenc triggers to program a custom sequenc 4 Logical Operators for Trigger Conditions vents The SMS Or shall provide a scrolling list of the following logical
213. controlle ailure the time the server directly t te the alar nter connected and to activa r shall include a battery ications programs and computer to printout o the controller m summary relay module to back up database for 30 days of cl the primary AC power s the transaction h quired r s tion inst tion The f the pri i hile on UPS service process event t acti ons con rolle shall lsew be here in the drawings furnished with an UP ead of a standard AC line battery shall power the mary AC service for a min the controller s card transactions vity t in rvic The controller istory and all ters shall be backed up by the battery or Specification the S battery ar power supply controller upon imum of one hour hall continue to and record history r shall provide buil whether the controller is properly communic computer Alarm mon alarm mon Johnson C with at 1 itoring a itoring a ontrols east the nd Ou nd ou Inc tput Control tput control plug in modules ollowing functionality Boc l Sixt 2 23 Eigh relays 4 Bight Bight n two s tate alarm input points four s a supervised alarm inpu two sta Xx te alarm input points and Our s SPDT outp CARDS AND Genera
214. ct No Alternat 674 2005 Contactors Emergency Communication Centre Section 16485 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation wil Install contactors as indicated on drawings a2 Connect line and load side wiring 3 Connect controls as required END Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Ground Fault Circuit Section 16496 Interrupters Page 1 Class A GENERAL Related Work Specified El PART 1 1 1 wil 1 2 1 PART 2 2 1 2 2 1 Lcd 1 PART 3 1 vi 3 Electrical General Requir Panelboards Breaker Type Shop Drawings and Product sewhere ements Section 16010 Section 16471 Data Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals PRODUCTS Materials Components comprising ground fault protective system to be of same manufacturer Breaker Type Ground Fault Single or Two pole ground 40A 120 240V 1 phase ci Interrupter er for 15 to facilities ault circui rcuit c w tes interrupt and reset ct ct ct ct Ground Fault Protector Unit Self contained with 15 A receptacle complete with 120 V circuit interrupter and duplex 21 Solid state ground sensing device 52 Facility for testing and reset 3 Flush mounted with stain
215. ction and voltage of the battery Site Acceptance Testing The Contractor shall arrange for Powerware to conduct the following tests on the UPS installation Note Powerware will quote this testing to Div 16 as it is not part of the equipment cash allowance Tests shall be done for both the normal and bypass positions 41 Load Tests 21 Measure the following at no load 25 50 100 110 and 125 load zd Input voltage L L 22 Input current 3 Input power 4 Input current harmonics 5 Input power factor 6 Output voltage 1 1 7 Output voltage L N 8 Output current 49 Output power 10 Output voltage harmonics L L Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 14 11 Output voltage harmonics L N 12 Output frequency 13 Phase angle imbalance 2 Transient Tests 41 Measure voltage and current for following load steps 0 50 22 50 1005 3 100 50 4 50 0 0 100 2 6 100 0 2 Measure voltage and current for the following transfer and loss of supply tests 1 Removal of input supply 22 Restoration of input supply TES Load transfer from module to bypass 4 Load transfer from bypass
216. cui sol led 9 to full Excitation shall for 10 seconds load 0 5 ad 15 maximum vol 60 Hz continuous duty 125 C single bearing Dynamically balanced rotor permanently aligned to engine by flexible disc coupling The exciter of required excitation at provide for current EEMAC class H insulation on windings tator winding and connected to try id state thyristor controlled rectifiers sensing circuit maximum voltage variation at any constant maximum voltage deviation between no load te and full load steady state maximum voltage dip on one step application tage rise on one step removal of 2s maximum voltage recovery time with application or removal of 0 8 PF full load Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternat Emergency Diesel Page 9 Communication Centre 2213 25 6 Transient 10 maximum voltage dip in most severe motor starting condition id Transient voltage variation shall not exceed 20 of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied or removed Recovery to stable operation shall occur within two seconds Alternator capable of sustaining 300 rated current for period not less than 10 s permitting selective tripping of down line protective devices when short circuit occurs Control Panel Totally enclosed weather proof mounted on generator with vibr
217. d Product Data zu Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 2 Submit complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires where specified for approval by Contract Administrator 53 Submit list of replacement lamp data for each luminaire Include lamp type voltage base type and order code 158 Guarantee 1 Replace 1 Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps burnt out within 3 months of takeover 22 Fluorescent and HID lamps burning out within 12 months of takeover 3 Ballasts that fail or exceed their labelled noise level rating within 12 months of takeover 1 4 Co ordination wall Co ordinate luminaire locations with Work of other trades 2 Co ordinate luminaire types with ceiling finishes to ensure compatability 23 Luminaires to be c w lamps suspension devices plaster rings and other attachments required for best appearance and proper mechanical installation 4 Every light outlet in the building shall be provided with a suitable designed f for the application 4 ixture In the event that or any particular outlet as approved by the fixture type is not supply a suitable fixture the Contract Administrator Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Lighting Equipment Section 16505 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Materials 95 Socket screw shell lamphol
218. d if it is not completely covered by cover plate report discrepancy to the division responsible and ensure that it is rectified 13 All concealed junction boxes conduit fittings etc to be c w galv steel covers secured with two bolts 14 Co ordinate boxes in masonry with brick or block configuration boxes to be saw cut in bottom of appropriate brick or block They shall be of sufficient depth to allow conduit to pass through center of block 15 Co ordinate locations with millwork 16 Apply acoustic sealant to and seal wires penetrating moulded vapour barrier boxes 17 Verify exact location of floor boxes with Contract Administrator Adjust floor boxes level with finished floor 18 Verify exact location of service fittings with furniture drawings and or Contract Administrator Service fittings to be installed parallel and perpendicular to building lines 19 No more than two extension rings shall be used in sequence 20 For installations in hazardous areas meet all requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 21 Locate raised floor outlet boxes in coordination with the City of Winnipeg s furniture Coordinate as required Z Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Wiring Devices Section 16141 Page 1 GENERAL Related Work PART 1 1 1 wl 52 T2 1 PART 2 24 21 2 523 4 Outlet Boxes and Fittings Submi
219. d shall be submitted as a shop drawing distribution shop drawings breaker se circuit currents a for review in A minimum of 6 copies shall tection for th fully adjustable sol ting proper coordination Bid Submission price set per th to veri Drawings of the breaker curves showing proper tive coordination ttr e Costs for s in the t lo X e ing shall consist o tate re f l id s teris He gc haracteris fy tion ach bus contract advance of be id state for transformers 30 kVa and this udy the tified testing agency normally engaged in field service testing shall be engaged and shall test all ttings for coordination verification as include new and existing breakers he circuit ws to t require adjustment of f lays with east 3 int shall One tic tes w end T ne of tes e pane ts trips test da th both All tes th cer ed by a Pro l clearly st tests and is in tified by t N hig and Time Coordina purpose the charac ting and meggar incl h vol test ted at he other ne po at the breakpoint ints shall Ler uding mou breakers istic lded case other tage brea fb tion Stud criteria a The tes d
220. d state transfer 4 7 Low voltage disconnect solid state modular operates at 80 battery output voltage c w 2 fused DC output circuits 8 Signal lights solid state life expectancy 100 000 h minimum for AC Power ON and High Charge 9 Lamp heads integral on unit 360 deg horizontal and 180 deg vertical adjustment Lamp type tungsten halogen 12 W glare free mini style 10 Cabinet minimum 20 gauge steel cabinet c w white polyester paint finish c w knockouts for conduit 11 Auxiliary equipment 5 Low voltage disconnect switch 52 Lamp disconnect switch 3 Test switch 4 Time delay relay 429 Battery disconnect device 426 ac input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet 7 Shelf where required 8 Cord and 3 prong straight blade NEMA 5 15P plug connection for ac Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting Section 16536 Page 3 212 2213 22 wal 51 J2 Wall wall mounted ba mounting sh easy access to t Switch mounted by side of enclosure T bar moun locations shown ted ba ttery banks Units to be to be mounted in T bar ceilings at c w flanges to access T bar ceiling tiles diagnosti tics display and underside of enclosure tery banks to be direct wall mounted or with elf X Provide removab
221. dards All administrative labeling shall be typewritten with electronic will be applied with alcohol and grease label maker printed on self adhesive ribbon or on integral labeling strip provided with equipment Clean area where label or equivalent cleaner to remove dirt Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 16 Communication Centre Cabling Workstation and Horizontal Patch Panel labeling R1 1000 2000 422 R R Rack C Cabinet 1 Rack or Cabinet f 1000 sequential cable identification number 2000 room number or workstation location Provide icons as specified on workstation devices and patch panels Backbone Patch Panel labeling ad D1000 R1 C2 D D data backbone T telephone backbone 1000 sequential cable identification number R Head end R rack C cabinet Head end rack or cabinet identification C Intermediate end R rack C cabinet 2 Intermediate end rack or cabinet identification 2 Provide icons as specified on workstation devices and patch panels All horizontal and backbone cabling shall be provided with cable labeling identification at both ends Provide clear plastic cover over cable labeling A l administrative labeling shall be recorded on as built drawings and included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals
222. del number proposed version of the product compliance non compliance of the specification cations of the This compliance statement shall be proposing company m server workstation requirements shall be a ufficient capacity shall ship factory tested All computer shall be available from multiple nless otherwise approved by the the minimum configuration for as defined below for a system capacity of Readers and 15 000 cards One system PC Printer will be provided inter will the server shall be ive workstations 128 be provided at the CPU with a clock speed of 1 GHz uired if P2000 options are Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 30 Communication Centre System 6 10 GB SCSI hard disk 7200 RPM 7 1024 x 768 resolution 64K color video card with 4MB RAM 8 17 flat screen LCD 29 Standard 101 type keyboard and optical mouse 10 One network interface controller 10 100BaseT Network Controller port System printers as shown on the characters per Controllers sha or equivalent shall be provided in the quantities specified or drawin second gs Printers shall bi directional printers 1l be Johnson Controls Inc CK721 be dot matrix 180 v2 4 CK720 CK705 v2 0 S321 v
223. detector shall not affect l be co Isolators whi ot be accep Class A conf an isolated Gireutt on isolated T tapping is al not be each e of performing an circuit condition side of the the terminals The isolator base shall support all detector types and have lowing minimum requirements the isolator base shal ctor processor tector processor shall ntrolled ch are te within a minimum of 23 uit condition on the communication internal capable of performing independent tabl condition provide analog devices exceed 12 devices on a branch without an isolator 3 base shall not be acceptable 4 S shop drawi plans as w T Modules Single Inp 21 minimum of 22 personali Single fun ngs ell ut Module 4 personali changes or D The intelligent Single ties tion modules or modules requiring IP switch jumper changes shal how isolator base locations on a floor plan as par Fire separations are to be shown on these floor Input Modul l be programmable from the Anal og Loop Con Eprom l no iguration the Loop Controller Loop wiring lowed between isolator bases bases to be provided when a loop is used areas which have fire separations Do not Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the Bases which must be removed to gain access t
224. dholder wit attempts to pass their card back alarm or message type and partition item name 21 The SMS shall provide the capability to prevent more 55 to a controlled area by h access privileges to another person If so programmed an alarm may be generated if the cardholder violates the anti passback rules It shall be possible to define which readers are subject an individual basis Anti Tailgate Control to anti passback rules on 21 The SMS shall provide the capability to prevent more than one person accessing a controlled area because of a single card transaction In X It entry exit Control 24 21 The SMS shall support the capability to control a card s entry into or exit from an area based on the previous the cardholder violates the In X transaction status of the card An alarm may be generated if It conditions Duress Processing Bal The SMS shall permit cardhol to indicate that they are request ders to force a soft alarm ing access to an area under Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 15 Communication Centre System force or duress In the event of such a situation the cardholder will be granted access and an alarm will be generated 225 Cardholder Definition The SMS shall allow cardholders to be defined by any
225. e Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 2 Communication Centre check adjust balance calibrate test and commission components as specified in subsequent sections Provide these services for such period and as necessary to put equipment in operation operating personnel are conversant with all and operation for as many visits and ensure that aspects of its care Carefully examine all plans and specifications pertaining to this Contract and become familiar with all details Visit the site and determine all factors affecting this section of the work and include all costs for same in Bid Submission Voltage Ratings Operating voltages to CAN3 C235 Motors electric heating control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard Operating conditions established in above operate in extrem standard without damage to equipment Permits Fees and Inspection ectrical Submit to El Equipment to Inspection Department and Supply Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work Pay all associated fees for inspection of authorities having jurisdiction Notify Contract Administrator of
226. e Detail Sheet sms smseng com 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG 05 015 01 JAN 220227 ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba ALARM C ANSUACIATION IBDICATION Eons 12 1 Imi E i e 2 4 4 B eps g 8 8 15 4 X g GNE bi Janitor Room HI i Eb x fia a wi Room 201 Roa 201 sterage be a Raon 205 10 u 5 8 Boos 204 R 8 Technician C Kyle Date November 22 2004 This document s printed on recycled paper SMS ENGIMEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN RN 2 ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Drawn By Approved By Reference SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford steel Winnineg MB Pana Fa ON3 COMMUNICATION CENTRE CB 0 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet sms smsen com 2 s 2 3 Bp b _ 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG ee ane ED 12 7 ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation E Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba ON MNUMSER i
227. e alarm system Verification shall be in accordance with current edition of Standard CAN ULC S537 The Verification of Fire Alarm Systems and following requirements Even if permitted by Code and recognized standards and regulations grade of work shall in no case be lower than specified in the project specifications Verify all new initiating and signal solenoid zones and circuits etc Verify that every component installed is working and functions as intended 22 Manufacturer with assistance of electrical contractor shall do a complete verification of system to ULC 8 537 to ensure si That system is installed as per plans and specifications and is operative and acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction 22 That system is installed as per recommendations of manufacturer Ne That system is electrically supervised including all zone lamps To accomplish this manufacturer with assistance of electrical contractor shall 1 remove each and every device from its applicable circuit by disconnecting circuit wiring 2 verify presence of the applicable trouble signal and indications at control panel and remote annunciators 4 That all devices are operative Check each switch device etc for proper operation 559 That all system functions are operating as in
228. e Fire Department Work Completed Ensure that the alarm system is functional 4 ln ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN SMS ENGINEERING ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Approved By Reference SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 0 770 bradford street Winnipeg MB Canada R3H COMMUNICATION CENTRE Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG _ gt gt 2006 6076 Ep Dis AND INSPECTION REPORT Building Name Parks and Recreation Address 709 0 Assiniboine Park Deis ae Manitoba s Wu Mill T I ANNUNCIATION 5 INDICATIUH BEVICEO uth Hall am i 2 F ae ul fee E Te liii E 8 HT By Puginanring Offica 4 M oy il Ini Technician Kyle Date November Zg This document is printed on recycted paper 6 ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN Al TE DNIATE EMERGENCY AARP EE CIVIL IYOT SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Steet Winnipeg MB Canada ona COMMUNICATION CENTRE Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet smsc smseng cam ee 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG 05 015 01 JAN 2006 ED 7 ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Bui
229. e lubricated by engine driven pump 42 Lube oil filter replaceable full flow type removable without disconnecting piping 3 Lube oil cooler 4 Engine sump drain valve 5 Oil level dip stick Lube oil temperature gauge 2 Lube oil pressure gauge 9 Starting system 1 Positive shift gear engaging starter 24 Vdc 3 2 Cranking limiter to provide 3 cranking periods of 10 s duration each separated by 5 second rest 23 Lead acid 12 V storage batteries with sufficient capacity to crank engine for 3 min at 0 deg C without using more than 25 of ampere hour capacity To be complete with battery cables interconnectors and steel rack 4 Battery charger constant voltage solid state two stage from trickle charge at standby to boost charge after use Regulation plus or minus 1 output for plus or minus 10 input variation Automatic boost for 6 h every 30 days Equipped with dc voltmeter dc ammeter and on off switch Charger to be capable of recharging completely discharged batteries to 80 capacity within 12 hours 10 Vibration isolated engine instrument panel with 1 Lube oil pressure gauge 122 Lube oil temperature gauge 23 Coolant temperature gauge 4 Running time meter non tamper type 5 Fuel oil pressure gauge 11 Guards to protect personnel from hot and moving parts Locate guards so that normal daily maintenance inspections can be undertaken without their removal 12 Drip tray 13 Connect the following alar
230. e maintenance materials in accordance with Sect Include suh Five spare lamps of each type supplied for remote Warranty Provide a written guarantee emergency lighting is guaranteed sta ting that against wit workmanship for a period of 10 years replacement during the first lust the battery source of to Maintenance Manual specified te battery CS tion 16010 heads for defects in mat th a no charge trum and a pro rat terial and te charge on the Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Section 16536 Page 2 Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting second lustrum City of Winnipeg from the date of the Final Acceptance from the 1 6 System Description 21 The system to include battery unit s controls remote heads wire and conduit etc to provide backup emergency lighting in the event of a loss of AC power to the normal lighting system PART 2 PRODUCTS 21 Equipment wall Supply voltage 120 V ac as indicated ad Output voltage 12 V dc as indicated 23 Operating time 60 min as indicated 4 Battery sealed long life lead acid or lead calcium maintenance free 29 Charger solid state multi rate pulse type voltage current regulated inverse temperature compensated short circuit protected modular construction 6 Soli
231. e relay base shall be controlled by processor Relay contacts shall have a minimum ted for pilot duty rating of Project No 674 200 5 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 18 Communication Centre Two Stage 2 Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent Analog gto Conventional operation providing inherent survivabil event of a communication failure with the Analog This opera tion shall ity th nsur operation of the re in the Loop Controller lay Relay bases not controlled by the detector micro processor shall not be accep 3 table Removal of TE th respectiv ther detectors Terminal connections shall be made on the room t be removed to gain access to n of det The isolator shall opera communications with o 4 base Bases which must shall not be acceptable Isolator Base 21 the fol The operatio by its respectiv not controlled by a de accepted 22 msec of a short line s Following a isolator detec self tes Isolator detector self tests shal 2 When connected in shall identify communications to al shall be Class A modules only Isolator between floors betwee cunc shor tor shall be capabl t procedure to re establish normal operation S noi n n n
232. e vertical wire management on wall mounted equipment cabinet Front lockable hinged Lexan door Lockable hinged body for rear cabling access Removable top and bottom covers Wall mounted equipment cabinet frames shall meet the following Specifications zx Dimensions 36 75in x 24in x 18in deep min with 18 5 16in centre mounting 2 2 Hole pattern 5 8in 5 8in 1 2in spacing 23 Screw size 10 24 thread 1 21 length Cabinets shall be wall mounted on 19mm equipment backboard Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 8 Communication Centre Cabling 10 Each equipment rack or cabinet designated with space for active electronics shall be provided with a surge suppressor power bar Acceptable Manufacturer Tripp Lite IBR 12 11 Additional acceptable Manufacturers Rittal CableTalk 2 6 Wall Mounted Equipment Brackets 4 1 Wall mounted equipment brackets shall meet ANSI EIA 310 2 Constructed of lightweight steel charcoal gray or black in color DS Brackets shall be c w bottom or side hinge 4 Depth 8 in minimum P Each bracket shall provide adequate mounting space for one patch panel and two wire management panels one above and one below each patch panel 6 Provide vertical cable management troughs on each side of equipment brackets for patch c
233. ect fire pump controller supervisory signals to fire alarm control Provide an Bis Ochs Re for panel each zon wher required and locate adjacent to monitored device Coordination Refer to mechanical drawings for the exact location of motor control devices electrical connection Obtain ful information from Div 15 controls overload heaters protection inf Coordinate cont all Refer to Div requirements Notify 15 specifications the Div trol wiring requirements wi control wiring and connections as req control systems operate as speci fied Shop Drawing Review Review Div Sizes as required Z or any f tor tisfactory th Div and other mechanical equipment requiring an regarding wiring quipment ratings and overcurrent 15 subcontrac ormation provided is incorrect or unsa at once if any 15 and provide to make the uired urther electrical 15 equipment shop drawings and adjust breaker feeder Project No 674 2005 Miscellaneous Section 16193 Alternate Emergency Apparatus and Page 1 Communication Centre Appliances PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Mechanical Specifications Section 15000 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010
234. ed with self tapping screws Nameplates for equipment fed from emergency power or from emergency UPS power increase nameplate size as required to suit wording shall be white with red letters NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50mm 1 line 3mm high letters Size 2 12 x 70mm 1 lines 5mm high letters Size 3 12 x 70mm 2 lines 3mm high letters Size 4 20 x 90mm 1 line 8mm high letters Size 5 20 x 90mm 2 lines 5mm high letters Size 6 25 x 100mm 1 line 12mm high letters Size 7 25 x 100mm 2 lines 6mm high letters Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 7 Communication Centre 3 Labels ad Embossed plastic labels with 6mm high letters unless specified otherwise 4 Fabrication details of all nameplates labels and wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Contract Administrator prior to manufacture 5 Allow an average of twenty five 25 letters per nameplate and label 6 Room names and numbers used shall be actual room names and numbers that will be used on the project Division 16 to co ordinate and confirm with trades involved 47 Identification to be English 8 Co ordinate names of equipment and systems with Division 15 to ensure that identical names are used 59 Nameplates for terminal cabinets a
235. edge all pending alarms before the opera I button A new alarm shall cause respond utton ord of ice number ied messag To reset alarm on t alarm type l restorations shall likewis he system printer by Time Alarm and the user specified b LOT the t the system the operator shall press recorded shall not be repeated xcept th Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 7 Communication Centre Two Stage Ac tiva au 1 add SUP BUZ omatically ressable device During ERV ISORY LED shall ligh the SUPE tion of a sprinkler supervisory Display on the control panel LCD RVI the NO 7 shall pulsate The th ack but Seq On sys zone device number nowledging all ton uence of Operation E activation of tem the syst Signal all CHE 42 all pan 23 4 285 oughout the building Annunciate t he location of the al Al annunciators and control panel 1 identical shall display Shut down all fans Unlock 11 magnetically h etc RMAL LCD shall indica The operator shall silence the messages and pressing condition shall any alarm initiating device on m goes int
236. eet all Code requirements and manufacturer s recommendations Ei necessary for a two hour rating All forming bending of M I cable shall be done by manufacturer s recommended method 4 All Pyrotenax cable terminations shall be tested and verified Each and every termination is to be tested immediately on completion of terminations and test results turned over to Contract Administrator immediately 5 Lugs for M I cable shall be CSA approved for M I cable Where CSA approved lugs are not available for M I cable Pyrotenax Quick Terminating Kits shall be used Type P cable clamps shall not be used to secure cable Use approved two piece strut clamps 34 6 Installation in Equipment e Group and lace in neatly wire and cable installed in switchboards panelboards cabinets wireways and other such enclosures Project No 674 Alternate Emerg 2005 ncy Communication Centre Wires and Cables Section 16122 Page 6 3 7 Termina 401 Termin tions approved manner 3 8 Identification 1 Wire in conduit 42 AWG insula tron color coded 2 Wire in conduit 1 0 AWG for normal power feeder
237. electrical system impressed in top surface with arrows to indicate change in direction of duct runs EXECUTION Installation Install duct in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Clean inside of ducts before laying Ensure full even support every 1 5 m throughout duct length Slope ducts with 1 to 400 minimum slope During construction cap ends of ducts to prevent entrance of foreign materials Pull through each duct wooden mandrel not less than 300 mm long and of diameter 6 mm less than internal diameter of duct followed by stiff bristle brush to remove sand earth and other foreign matter Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct immediately before pulling in cables In each duct install pull rope continuous throughout each duct run with 3 m spare rope at each end Install markers as required Clearly show locations on Record Drawings c w dimensions from building curbs property lines etc END Project No 674 2005 Conduits Conduit Section 16111 Alternate Emergency Fastenings and Page 1 Communication Centre Conduit Fittings PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere PART 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 Location of Conduit Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs Those indicated are in diagrammatic form only
238. em operation Include parts list using component identification numbers tion into maintenance manual specified standard to electronics industry Section 16761 Project No 674 2005 Intercom System Section 16761 Alternat Emergency Page 2 Communication Centre PART 2 PRODUCTS Materials Conduits type EMT size as indicated to Section 16 Communication conductors type LVT size as indicated to Section 16010 Central Exchange The Central Intercommunications Exchange shall be provided with all the necessary components to connect and control slave and master stations The exchange shall be TOA N 8000EX or approved equal Master Station Type A Handsets The master station shall be TOA N 8000MS speakerphone type master It shall require 24vDC supplied by the central exchange and consume no more than 2 4W Communication shall be loadspeaking voice actuated or voice actuated with handset Calling shall be by pretone and call LED illumination Mounting shall be desk or surface wall mount Slave Station The slave station shall be TOA N 8031MS open voice type master It shall require 24vDC supplied by the central exchange and consume no more than 10MA Communication shall be loadspeaking voice actuated Calling shall be by pretone and call LED illumination Mounting sh
239. en by an SMS operator to dicate that he she is aware of a specific alarm or tamper 4 Advisory A message provided by t infor 429 m him her of a condition as repor he SMS ted by Alarm change of state as detec ted by to the operator to the SMS the SMS indicating that it to identi 6 A recons d Badge gain access 8 Boolean or FALSE 29 Cardholder database w 10 Card fy udit Trail The physical Reader verification 11 CK7xx This term ref CK705 CK720 and CK721 12 Clear The action alarm from the alarms q if required responded 13 Controller CK705 CK720 series D620 and CK721 D620 TIU and D6xx series panel 14 Disable A sys device or system out 15 Download Refers information from the serv This includes information rights 16 Dry Contact A volta has detected a condition A sequential record of truct and review a series of card through a portal by presen An expression that resul A person who is a member of ho may have been issued a valid badge A device usually located at access poin designed to decode the information con for the purposes of making an access decision or for iden ers service to the transfer of system configuration er to such X ge that its sensors were designed system activity used tem events b
240. ensitivity of intelligent analog smoke detectors Detection device number type and location Status of remote relays Acknowledgement time and date Signal silence time and date Reset time and date 01 WN Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Page Two Stage Section 16723 12 30 9 Battery voltage A C voltage and battery charge current The system must be capable of 21 Counting the number of intelligent analog devices within a zone which are in alarm 42 Counting zones which are in alarm e3 Counting the number of intelligent analog detectors which are in alarm on the system 4 Differentiating among types of intelligent analog detectors such as smoke detectors manual stations water flow switches thermal detectors Power Supply 120 VAC 60 Hz input batteries sized as per NI System to include system power supplies transformers protection required shall display normal 2 operating from normal The Power Supply Chargers to the system switch mode design with a minimum efficiency of 80 up to 6 KV and varistors outputs of ful upply shall operator upon AC power and or the control unit CPU fail have brown out It shall be capable of charging from
241. ep 2 gang or 1 1 2 38mm 5 ng mm shall be accessible from the be removed to be acceptable for operation room gain in following environment Temp 42 Humi It shall use of DI 43 X Provide au tem firmware erature 32 dity 0 93 be possible P or rotary swit or addressing shall not be acceptable e form C dry external be rated xiliary Re X appliances or equipment shutdown to 120 F 0 C to 49 C non condensing address each module without tches Devices using DIP relay contact rated at 2 amps or pilot ays lay Mod t duty and releasing wired for fail safe operation ule is exceeded t shall be confirmed by the Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Section 16723 Page 21 Two Stage 23 shall 4 North 4 9 of 7 the T T T PER 22 he coni diagnostic L flash red LED shal capable of s he coni Americ square box wit he mod environment Te Hu Terminal the assembly wiring terminals shall It shall be possible IP switches not b 52 EDs to 1 flash toring up to 24 ay mod an 2 1 2 64mm ule s mpera midity rol rol rel h hall be Tu
242. er 2 Disable event followed by event number Clear the keypad buffer works independently of the Star Feature setting 54 Reader with LCD 1 When used with panels CK7xx 2 5 and higher the SMS shall enable the LCD display of the following messages arranged from highest to lowest initial priority Reader Offline Access Granted Access Denied Enter PIN Code Enter Shunt Time Shunt Time Warning Present Card 55 No Green Light On Aux Access 21 The SMS shall provide this option to disable the green light displayed on AUX access Requires 300 DIN RDR2S connected to CK7xx 2 5 and higher with firmware revision O or above 56 Deny if Door Open The SMS shall provide the option of generating access denied messages when cardholders swipe their badges at opened doors available for panels CK7xx version 2 5 and higher 57 Override Reset Threat Level 221 The SMS shall allow each reader terminal defined for a CK7xx version 2 4 or higher or 5321 panel to be configured with an Override Reset Threat Level ranging between 0 and 99 A value of 0 disables the Override Reset feature a value between 1 and 99 invokes the following behavior 22 Whenever a terminal s Security Level reaches or exceeds the terminal s Override Reset Threat Level all time zone based overrides
243. er back to normal power supply and standby shoul shutdown 8 Repeat at 30 minute intervals 7 times complete test with selector switch in each position for each test 9 Test bypass switch for correct operation END Load Project No Alternat Emergency 674 2005 Communication Centre Lightning Protection Section 16692 Page 1 h relevant sections of this and ol including Section 16010 Electrical h the requirements of the 1 a und electrodes shall be copper clad 20mm ther Divisions of the General test edition of CSA B72 installation class of the building and t ne commercial lighnting protection cables shall 3 4 x 10 ft rods and or 1m sq Connectors shall be cadweld or thermoweld or Burndy Earth enhancing compound shall be of the 2 part additives for ground resistance reduction PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCE will Section 16010 1 2 RELATED WORK i Comply wit specification Requirements 22 Comply wit for the specific results of the grounding study PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 21 98 conductivity be high grade copper cables shown otherwise a2 Gro 3000mm long 3 4 copper plates 23 Press 4 type Chemical suitable for vertical or horizontal configurations 36 S Size as shown minimum
244. erformed by Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work wll Installation of anchor Section 03300 devices setting templates MA Electrical General Section 16010 Requirements 23 Conduit Section 16111 4 Wire and Cables Section 16122 29 Automatic Load Transfer Section 16627 1 42 Description of System m Generating system consists of 1 Diesel engine 22 Alternator a3 Control panel 4 Automatic transfer equipment with manual bypass switch 5 Battery charger and battery 6 Automatic engine room ventilation system 7 Fuel supply system fuel tank base 8 Exhaust system 29 Structural steel mounting base 10 Weatherproof outdoor housing 2 System designed to operate in as emergency standby power source unattended 3 Diesel generator set shall be designed to start and accept full load in 10 seconds with a one second start delay and within the voltage and frequency tolerances specified in C282 4 Th ngine generator and all major items of auxiliary equipment shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment The assembly shall be made up of coordinated components by an organization regularly engaged in assembling such equipment
245. erlocking as shown on drawing Sliding bar safety interlock shall not interfere with by pass switch cover trim removal replacement Sliding bar shall have spring loaded ball and Socket momentary stops at each position It shall also be padlockable in the three operating positions 421 Supply and install lamacoids identifying each by pass breaker and complete sequence of by pass operation as directed by Contract Administrator Supply and install schematic engraved on a lamacoid Prior to fabrication submit shop drawing to Contract Administrator for review and approval E Tor Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternate Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 6 Communication Centre 2 6 Acceptable Manufacturer sali Thompson Technology Incorporated Series TS870SE automatic transfer switches with bypass 247 Equipment Identification 1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 2 8 Fabrication ek Shop assemble transfer equipment including m Mounting base and enclosure 2 Transfer switch and operating mechanism 3 Control transformers and relays 4 Accessories P
246. es 7001 pay 1f 6 100p 3201 uj pasn uo uaye eod Jenu pue 02 auinbay ejewpieu Aq 80 1004 pue Seuoie pejeedo 95941 Section 08710 93145 i Jejddns Aq s yu s Joop oujosr3 Section 08710 y207 Bey q 5420 Joop Section 08710 yams 40 sjoejuoo jo Jas eq S YIMS UXA 0 Jsanbau se pasn Aay E207 1 euios Joop 5 pesn sese uj Jerjddns sayoyms 38 Aq pueg sejoueq 8 EU Joop euop si Bunjoojun pue pue Ajuo amp JOOP SY uo jeu ureis s Aq pue Jo 55900 2 euixe senbei se siy ees 4 pue pexoojun aq oj ee pereas x 9j peu
247. es Flush wall mounted electro galvanized steel device box 100mm4in square x 65mm2 1 2in deep 22 Single or two gang raised plaster rings with squared corners as required e Accepts standard type duplex outlet Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 5 Communication Centre Pathway 4 Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations PART 3 EXECUTION Sz Communications Pathway 1 All communication pathways shall maintain the following distances from the equipment listed motors or transformers 1 2m4ft 22 wire in conduit and or cables 300 1 0m3ft 53 wire in conduit and or cables 300V 300mmi2in 3 2 Equipment Backboards 41 Equipment backboards shall be rigidly secured and painted with a ASA 61 industrial gray nonconductive fire retardant overcoat 3 3 Cable Trays gil Refer to Section 16114 2 Refer to Canadian Electrical Code Section 12 23 Remove sharp burrs or projections to prevent damage to cables or injury to personnel 4 Provide additional offsets bends etc as required to adjust cable tray routing and height to avoid conflict with ducts pipes beams etc Support cable tray on 1 5m5ft centers and within 760mm30in from a connection fitting or end 6 Support cable tray at connection points and at end points aT Each Cable t
248. es NE For input power wiring to the VFD and for output wiring to the motor from the VFD 2 Use cable specifically designed for Variable Frequency Drives el Teck Drive RX cable as manufactured by Alcatel 22 PVC jacket rated at FT4 ao Continuous corrugated impervious aluminum shield 4 CSA approved to standard C22 2 No 123 96 Teck Drive cables are to be installed in connectors specifically made for use with the Drive RX cables 6 Terminate the Drive RX cable grounds as per the cable manufacturer s instructions using ground bushings as directed The ground connections are to be made at the ground points indicated by the VFD manufacturer Coordinate with Division 15 24 Installed as per manufacturer s instructions EXECUTION General To Minimize Voltage Drop 21 There shall be no joints in branch circuits feeding patient care receptacles 287 All branch circuits feeding patient care receptacles shall be minimum 10 AWG REC All branch circuits feeding patient care receptacles shall be minimum 8 AWG for all circuits longer than 60 feet 4 All non patient care branch circuits including lighting circuits shall be minimum 10 AWG for all circuits longer than 21 Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Wires and Cables Section 16122 Page 4
249. es prior he Contract Administ rator Shop drawings will Contract Administra tor and if re submission is 16 shall ensure tha review again t the supplier s drawings urning them to the Contract Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternat Emergency Requirements Page 16 Communication Centre LT 212 23 214 ELG Review of the shop drawings by the Contract Administrator shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors and omissions therein Each drawing submission to bear the following signed stamp and shall include name of project equipment supplier and clause number equipment is specified under T CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION This drawing has been reviewed by firm name All dimensions have been checked and found compatible with the contract drawings and all capacities quantities sizes and other data contained in the contract documents have been listed by the supplier on this drawing and have been checked by the undersigned and found correct Date Per Clearly show division of responsibility No item equipment or description of work shall be indicated to be supplied or work to be done By Others or By Purchaser Any item equipment or description of work shown on shop drawings shall form part of contract unless specifically noted to the contrary
250. es and current accurate to Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre T Section 16723 Page 13 ire Alarm Systems Addressable wo Stage Data Gathering Panel Where shown on drawings character backlit LCD display condition The DGPs shall be equipped with a power supply and tery back up capable o or 24 hours and after 24 ll the horns DGP to be comple as required DGP lifiers for signalling devices bat conditions operating al minutes relay modules ure amp fut Each DGP load Reset have a RS 232 Print Alarm Silence degraded stand alone mode upon loss of communica stand alone mode D Main FACP GPs shall be equipped with an 80 etc shall contain non volatile edit or change field programmable so ter Programming port and Trouble Silence xx Speakers and to annunciate all zones and system operating the system under normal hours be capable of strobes for a minimum of 30 tion the preprogrammed Actions and fully support Diagnostic display that shall display up to el trouble conditions The Data Line Format maximum of 7 000 ft Class A Y Or p DGP Sequences it s zone cards e with zone modules loop modules to be capable of supporting EEPROM memory and easy ftware Each DGP shall h DGP shall have to be u
251. es called for in the Contract Documents and those which are required up to practical completion and hand over ach spare part listed shall include the manufacturer s upplier s price including all mark ups delivery and packaging he prices shall remain valid for 12 months following handover of he project p 3 These spare parts may or may not be ordered during the Contract period The Contractor shall only include these items in the Contract sum if specifically instructed to do so 4 Any spare parts listed shall be completely interchangeable with those specified in the Contract Documents and included in the works 5 Any spares ordered shall be delivered to the specified client s representative complete with all documents instructions Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 23 Communication Centre 12 45 CASH ALLOWANCES wok Refer to Contract Documents for UPS system cash allowance All overhead profit labour material etc for the installation of the UPS system shall be included in the Div 16 price Refer to 16610 END Project No 674 2005 Installation of Section 16106 Alternate Emergency Cables in Trenches Page 1 Commun
252. es so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull boxes Install junction and pull boxes clear of all mechanical ductwork and piping Identification Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements Identify splitters with size 7 nameplates iE Identify junction and pull boxes with size 3 nameplates Identify cabinets with size 5 nameplates Project No 674 2005 Splitters Junction Section 16131 Alternate Emergency Pull Boxes Cabinets Page 4 Communication Centre and CSTE s 3 4 CUSTOMER SERVICE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE PI Mount on suitably sized concrete pad 2 Coordinate sleeving with Utility 23 Coordinate exact location and placement with Utility 4 Coordinate metering requirements with Utility END Project No 674 2005 Outlet Boxes Section 16132 Alternate Emergency Conduit Boxes Page 1 Communication Centre and Fittings PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 49 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Outlet and Conduit
253. esistant primer inside and outside and at least two coats of finish enamel si Paint outdoor electrical equipment equipment green finish to EEMAC Y1 1 1955 2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light grey to EEMAC 2Y 1 1958 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation to match original paint Clean and prim xposed non galvanized hangers racks and fastenings to prevent rusting Workmanship and Materials The installation shall consist of material and equipment specified unless as provided herein Electrical equipment provided under this contract shall be built in accordance with EEMAC standards and shall be 5 certified or certified by an equivalent recognized certifying agency to meet Canadian Standards and or locally approved All equipment supplied under this contract shall be new and the best of its respective kind and of uniform pattern throughout Any material or equipment ordered or installed without the Contract Administrator s prior approval shall if so directed by the Contract Administrator be removed and replaced with approved material or equipment without a change to the contract Replace inferior work if so ordered by Contract Administrator without a change to the contract Retain same foreman or superintendent on
254. est Queue tabl The Requ displays current requests or req ed in the Request Queue database cess Option u The Web Access feature shall enable S security management tasks ible PDA device This sion levels for each user ter the SMS he Request Queue shall allow operators to intercept and finall abase system saved into Queue View window editing ments and st uests tha table users subsequently and the visitor badge shall be prin ted uire That is ust heir they t When y correct he the that to resync the status of rminal Group to resync the t presented at all terminal S in e ve the 1 The were to perform from any web ready PC or eature shall support different and requests can be approved and or validated prior to being implemented to preven shall submit approv shall confir t unauthorized opera be established to de ted If requests req ers shall approve or reject requ be required m the validity of the request b tions or changes to the SMS termine how requests are uire approval r ests sed Web Access features shall i proces Vis Con Car Cus itor Requests tractor Requests dholder Management tomizable User Interface for nclude Rules pre defined If validation a user with the proper permissions i
255. ete with explanation o equipment Specific sequence of operation and events control schematics Schematics of electronic operation theory of electronic modules electrical assemb 4 manui as buil panels ly drawings and parts list facturer lt system wiring diagrams showing location of test procedure for systems colour code of wire values of all electronic components stating part number panels and individual Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 27 Communication Centre Two Stage 12 block diagram of each panel identifying all zone locations and wire numbers 13 mylar drawings and prints of verified system as builts All mylar drawings to be DILAR FILM blackline dry erasable reverse reading reverse print 14 Mylar drawings and prints of all new and altered fire alarm control panels showing the detailed point to point panel wiring detailing all functions wire numbers and colour coding 15 Floor plan drawings as builts indicating 1 Locations of all fire alarm devices panels etc 2 Location o f all magnetic holders and ancillary devices connected to fire alarm control panel 23 All conduit runs junction boxes 4 Quantity of wires in each conduit run 59 Zone wiring identification at each junction box and fire alar
256. evices or other approved means to locate and identify concealed services prior to drilling Schedule of Work Carefully note and refer to the Contract Administrator s general Schedule of Work and include for all requirements to conform to it PRODUCTS Materials Provide all materials required for the complete interface and reconnection installation as herein described and as indicated on the drawings New fire alarm devices speakers starters panelboards etc required to be tied in to existing systems shall match the existing devices New wiring required to interconnect new devices to existing systems shall be provided to suit the manufacturers requirements and instructions Project No 674 2005 Work in Existing Section 16195 Alternate Emergency Building Page 3 Communication Centre PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation wll Install boxes conduit and wiring through existing areas as required for the new installation 22 Add modules switches etc in existing control panels as required to extend existing systems to new or renovated areas 3 Patch and repair walls and ceilings in existing areas that have been damaged or cut open due to the new electrical installation 4 Where new cables or conduits have been installed through existing fire rated walls seal opening around cables and conduit to maintai
257. ewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 22 Service Entrance Board Section 16421 347 600V Main Distribution Section 16422 Switchgear Air Ckt Brkrs Main amp tie with CDP Dist n 4 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426 120 208V amp 347 600V MS Panelboards Breaker Type Section 16471 12 Product Data Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 2 Include time current coordination characteristic curves for breakers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Breakers General 14 Moulded case circuit breakers to CSA C22 2 No 5 22 Bolt on moulded case circuit breaker quick make quick break type for manual and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 deg C ambient 23 Common trip breakers with single handle for multi pole applications 4 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current reaches setting Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 5 10 times current rating ub Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated 6 Minimum Interrupting Ratings RMS Symmetrical unless otherwise indicated 120 208 Volts 10 000 Amps 22 347 600 Volts 14 000 Amps Project No 674 2005 Moulded Case Section 16 477 Alternate Emergency Circuit Breakers Page 2 Communication Centre 2 2 Thermal Ma
258. f identified internal and front panel components 4 Enclosure types 5 Viring diagram for each type of starter 6 Interconnection diagrams Tg Operation and Maintenance Data sal Provide operation and maintenance data for motor starters for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 Submittals 22 Include operation and maintenance data for each type and style of starter 1 54 Maintenance Materials ak Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010 72 Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of starter 21 4 contacts stationary contacts movable contacts auxiliary control transformers operating coils fuses 0 indicating lamps HOA kit Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Motor Starters to 600 V Section 16811 Page 2 PART 2 2 1 wal 2 2 1 42 24 9 21 PRODUCTS Material Starters 14 1 21 2 not acceptable Manual Motor Starters Single and Three phase man and enclosure type as indicated rating follows sL Switching mechanism 522 Overload heaters Accessories Jl Toggle switch labelle 2 Indicating light 3 Locking tab to permit 4 Flush mount Full Voltage Magne Magnetic of with component E manual reset Half size s
259. f the existing building which are being remodelled or demolished 11 devices fixtures etc are not necessarily shown on the plans The City of Winnipeg shall select from the materials and or equipment remaining that which he wishes to retain and the remainder shall be removed from the Site Any electrical equipment in remodelled sections or in structures removed or altered adjacent to new work necessary for the operation of existing building shall be relocated as necessary All existing equipment re used shall be made good and guaranteed Power interruptions to be kept to a minimum and shall be at a time suitable to the building occupant Refer to Architectural plans for demolition areas phasing 2 Drawings do not show all electrical requiring removal to accommodate renovations such as receptacles switches lights starters motors nurse call systems components heaters etc Division 16 shall visit site refer to architectural and electrical drawings and include all costs for demolition Refer to Specification Section 16195 Work in Existing Building 1 44 Spare Parts Contractor shall submit 15 calendar days after award of Contract a list of spare parts that the Contractor considers essential important useful to the operation of the systems described herein This list shall be in addition to any spares consumabl
260. fer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source after the transfer logic senses any of the following conditions 21 Inverter overload capacity exceeded n Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage 29 Battery protection period expired 4 UPS fault condition 22 Uninterrupted Retransfer mE Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass Source to the inverter output shall be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following conditions exists Inverter out of synchronizations with bypass 2 Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating 3 UPS fault condition present 4 More than 15 transfer attempts in a 20 minute period 3 Display and Controls 21 The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation All of the operator controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet The monitoring functions such as metering status and alarms shall be displayed on a four line 64 character alphanumeric liquid crystal display LCD The display unit includes a membrane overlay wit
261. for active electronics as directed on Site 3442 Connectors and Faceplates 1 Modular jacks shall be mounted with the contacts up 22 Four pair 100 ohms UTP cable lt T Terminate each four pair 100 ohms UTP cable directly to an 8 position 8 conductor modular jack assembly at the Work area 2 Terminate all 8 position 8 T568A pin assignment conductor modular jacks as per Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 14 Communication Centre Cabling 3433 UTP Patch Cables 21 Patch cables shall not exceed combined length of 6m 20ft in a channel ee Provide all patch cables required to cross connect and connect all patch panels and active electronics and telephone cross connects throughout the communications system including the telephone demarcation field 13 Provide 3m patch cables for all workstations 4 Install patch cables in an organized manner neatly laced within the wire managment provided 3 4 Horizontal Cabling zd Horizontal cabling shall be installed in a star topology 22 Cables shall be combed within cable tray in an organized manner zo Bridged taps shall not be used within the horizontal cabling system 4 Hard splices shall not be used within a twisted pair horizontal cabling system 5 Equipment shall not be connected directly to horizontal cable
262. fset between boxes Mount communication outlet boxes at the same height as the electrical power outlets unless noted otherwise Communication outlets shall be mounted adjacent within 411 to power outlets Z Project No 674 200 5 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 1 Communication Centre Cabling PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wil Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 2 Installation of Cables in Trenches Section 106 and in Ducts 423 Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts Section 107 4 Pole Lines and Hardware Section 108 25 Conduits Conduit Fastenings and Section Conduit Fittings 6 Splitters Junction Pull Boxes Section and Cabinets 21 Voice and Data Communications Pathway Section 16746 1 2 References 1 Latest edition of the following 1 EIA TIA 568 A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard refer to CSA standard CAN CSA T529 M91 CAN CSA C22 2 No 214 M90 52 EIA TIA 569 Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces refer to CSA standards CAN CSA T530 M90 23 EIA TIA 570 Residential and Light C
263. functions selec addition tercom s it can unknown t lower level maps layer map exist in the Operators will navigate through the map he up and down icons when a call request the intercom icon he user can he call In the following int is will t to the Cates Station Connected con down the total E Unknown display one of the up and down trolled by the indicate a status of either I O terminal icons will her up be manually ac than by trigger condi tamper alarms icons will Secure or unknown When cameras are associa ut point is on the user can click a camera icon to open AV Player lay live or stored video 11 AV Dry Contact AV dry contact alarm icons will indicate a s unknown Alarm Handling The alarm or unknown tivated tions ted with the map alarmed or which number of and highlighted alarm finable alarm message instructions description to assign an alarm message instruction to ts and other applications message pick list all alarm message names a pick list from which the user may select an appropriate alarm name and message 55 Alarm input points the system supports up to 17 000 alarm input points input point Or 6 Alarm Add Edit Delete functions are logged Delete hard disk of the server maintenance a The All maintenance and archived llows the
264. g 3 Single stacked cable tray unless otherwise indicated on drawings 4 Aluminum ladder solid or tubular with 9 5mm x 38mm3 8in x 1 5in sides 6 4mm x 25mml 4in on drawings 20 Fittings manufactured accessories for approved cable tray Corner clamps splice clamps end plates side clips side clips with 9 5mm3 8in pins on both sides between suspension rods where required 46 Solid aluminum pan located on all including fittings Cable tray to be suspended using 16mm5 8in threaded rods or larger as required with double locknuts below the tray and single lock nuts above 8 Cable Tray shall be isolated from with insulated threaded couplings 9 Equipment racks shall not be used trays 10 Finish painted with gray enamel 11 Acceptable Manufacturers Newton lin rungs and width as indicated horizontal cable tray the building structure to support the cable Chatsworth Ladder Type Cable Tray Cable Tray and fittings to 2 Ladder type Class Cl to CSA C22 2 No 230mm9in rung spacing 3 Single stacked cable tray unless otherwise indicated on drawings EEMAC F5 1 1977 126 M1980 Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 4 Communication Centre Pathway 4 Extruded aluminum tray with depth of 100mm4in and width as indicated on drawings
265. g Conveni tional operation providing inherent survivability in the event of a communication failure with the Analog Loop Contr Detec oller tor Bases General Detector 41 Bases shall be sui American 1 gang 3 1 2 or 4 oc base shall contain no electronics and shall tagon box table for mounting on North 4 square box support all tector shall not affect Standard Base The detector types 2 Removal of the communications with connections shall be made on the room Bases which must be removed to gain access to spective d ther detectors e tector base shall be capable of ndicator side of the the terminals supporting all support all detector types and have requirements all be a bi stable type and selectable for normally closed operation of the contact shall be supervised relay operation shall be exercised by the detector operation of t all ao Terminal base shall not be acceptabl 4 The standard one Red Remote Alarm I Relay Base 41 The relay base sh the following minimum 21 The relay sh normally open or 22 The position 23 processor on power up 4 The relay sh detector is removed 49 The its respective d 6 Form C 24 vdc and be lis 1 amp tector automatically d when a nergiz h
266. g e mail accounts that shall messages as event actions and where automatic error return could be sent Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Security Management System Section 16902 Page 20 45 46 47 48 49 50 opil 52 21 the ASCII External the S Local Pal to as promp Dial 21 panel inter external MS Software or hardware sys which will trigger a Host event Event Triggers The SMS shall allow external inputs event trigger conditions rorn writ T Nes generate an alarm ization The sist ts shall up Panels The SMS shall support communications with dial s CK720 and CK705 using WAN connections an face servic appear in All text Dual Ethernet in conf have inter take al Exemp 1 gure panels a second ne face Dual twork connection Ethernet terface The SMS shall provide an al CK720 or CK705 allows over the communications if fails t from Archiving to Flash The SMS shall provide the op ct ct inp tems to ternate panel con version 2 5 or h through a he alternate con he primary connection to be use uts shall das These external inputs can be in n of an RS232 serial message or a TCP IP me file or a databas ssage
267. g protocol Each detector shall be ire detection algorithms The dimensions fire parameters to increase fire conditions from unwanted digital filt for de ctor s rm co Each detector shall pre alarm and alarm signals in addi tec hall have a separa tion and alarm s mmunication with red LED shall f trol panel COrs trouble and need cleaning inf to program cont e ers that are not typical Devices n ire parameters or employin t be acceptable detector shall have an integral microprocessor e of making alarm decisions based on fire param he detector head Distributed igence shall improve response time by decreasin tor and analog loop controll ot g eter g the er making independent alarm Maximum total analog loop shall be 0 5 seconds EDs shall be visible through us steady shall indicate alarm standa a full X The diagnostic code shall be capable of transn tion ormation activity to Each detector microprocessor shall vironmental Compensation algorithm which iden na EO It s hall contain te means of A green LED shall the analog 1 lash to display alarm status ti lone mode 360 degree ying up to 32 available for be stored at nitting the normal be possible
268. gnetic Breakers sali Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse tim current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection 2 3 Solid State Trip Breakers sl Moulded case circuit breaker to operate by means of a solid state trip unit with associated current monitors and self powered shunt trip to provide invers current trip under overload condition and long time short time instantaneous and ground fault tripping 51 Each breaker shall have the following independent and fully adjustable curve shaping characteristics 21 Adjustable long time pickup 2 Adjustable long time delay shaping 25 Adjustabl 6 Adjustabl e BS Adjustable 4 Adjustable o mal Adjustable short time p short ickup time delay with selective curve instantaneou ground fault ground fault S pickup pickup delay with selective curve 22 2 4 21 22 2D 1 state trips shaping ARC Fault Circuit Moulded case circuit of thermal and magnetic current tripping and ins protection Interrupters AFCI Integrated processor which invers Breakers feeding transformers 45 kVA and larger shall have solid fully and independently adjustable LSIG settings breaker to operate automatically by means tripping devices to provid t
269. gs on both ends of phase conductors of feeders coloured plastic tapes and branch circuit wiring numbered wire markers Conductor marker identification shall correspond with panel or terminal board directory information Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout Colour Code To CSA C22 1 Use colour coded wires in communication cables matched throughout system Colour coding used shall be documented by individual systems in Maintenance Manuals Insulated grounding conductors shall have a green finish and shall be used only as a grounding conductor Conduit Outlet Boxes and Cable Identification Colour code conduits boxes and metallic sheathed cable Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall ceiling or floor and at 15m intervals Colours 25mm wide prime colour and 20mm wide auxiliary colour Prime Auxiliary Up to 250V normal power yellow Up to 600V normal power yellow green Up to 250V emergency power yellow amp red Up to 600V emergency power yellow amp red green Telephone green Other communication systems green blue Fire alarm red Emergency voice red blue Other security systems red yellow Control blue Fibre optic orange Other conduit systems as directed on site all conduit systems shall be identified Color outlet box covers to color designated and sho
270. h tactile dome buttons for control and a guarded red pushbutton for local emergency power off Additional features of the monitoring system shall include 2 Menu driven display with text format 29 Real time clock time and date 4 Alarm history with time and date stamp 29 Battery backed up memory 4 Metering PRI The following parameters shall be displayed 21 Input AC voltage line to lin 22 Input AC current for each phase 23 Input frequency 4 Battery voltage t ct Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 9 5 lin Battery charge discharge current to lin and 5 Output AC voltag line to neutral el Output AC current 8 Output frequency 9 Percent of 10 Output kVA and kW 1 12 inverter Status Messages 4 4 The following UPS status messages shall be displayed for each phase as X for each phase for each phase Battery time remaining during battery operation Operating temperature of input converter and internal battery rated load being supplied by the UPS Pal Normal operation 22 UPS on battery and time remaining 23 System
271. host initiated overrides and cardholder overrides are immediately disabled Subsequent attempts to invoke host initiated overrides or cardholder overrides will be denied no Once a terminal s Security Level drops below the terminal s Override Reset Threat Level the time zone based override is restored immediately Host initiated overrides Project No Alternat 674 2005 P Emergency Communication Centre S 2000 Int ystem egrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 22 58 5 9 60 61 62 63 64 and cardholder overri des ar subsequent attempts to invoke host not automatically restored but initiated overrides or cardholder overrides will be granted provided the configuration allows these overrides Smart Card Management 1 The SMS shall support the Federal Government smart card encoding protocol All encoded badges shall include FASC N Federal Agency Smart Credential Number data fields Auto Badge Management 21 The SMS shall allow the control and management of badge numbers within a defined pool Once the pool of numbers is defined the operator can automatically assign the next available number to the badge Service Startup Configuration The SMS shall allow enabling or disabling any of the services at the start
272. hting Page 4 Communication Centre PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation wl Install unit equipment for emergency lighting in accordance with CSA C22 1 12 Install conduit and wiring as indicated 43 Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures indicated 4 Cut and re cap cord to remove surplus 55 Direct heads indicated to provide maximum lighting level along means of egress routes 46 Mount double remote heads on outlet box such that the two heads will be horizontal with the building lines 2 7 Charge the batteries and test the system for proper operation minimum of 35 or 65 minutes discharge time 8 Adjacent to each battery bank unit install a 120V duplex receptacle and wire to AC night lighting circuit END Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Summary wall This specification defines th lectrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a continuous duty three phase solid state uninterruptible power supply UPS system UPS shall provide high quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads 2 A cash allowance is provided in the front end specification for
273. iated drawing the load to the panelboard shall be main lug Approved Manufacturers 41 22 59 Schneider Cutler Ha Siemens Canada mmer EXECUTI Service Entrance Install one primary suppressor within the switchboard or panelboard at each utility service entrance to the facility according to manufacturer s recommendations The suppressor shall be installed on t load side of the Service entrance ne Conductors between suppressor and point of kept short and straight attachment shall be Project No 674 2005 Transient Voltage Section 16475 Alternate Emergency Surge Suppression Page 7 Communication Centre 4 The suppressor s ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground 3 2 Secondary Distribution Panels will Install panelboards as required and according to manufacturer s recommendations The surge suppression is integrated into the surge protected panelboards 42 Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be kept short and straight END Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Section 16477 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Els
274. ication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 2 Service Entrance Board Section 16421 223 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426 120 208V amp 347 600V 4 Power Generation Diesel Section 16622 1 2 Design Criteria PH Automatic load transfer equipment to zl Monitor voltage of normal power supply 2 Initiate cranking of standby generator unit on normal power failure or abnormal voltage 3 Transfer load from normal supply to standby unit when standby unit reaches rated speed and voltage x4 Transfer load from standby unit to normal power supply when normal power restored 25 Shut down standby unit 6 The transfer switch shall have an integral bypass to allow manual transfer of load to either normal source or emergency source 13 Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 22 Include 41 Make model and type 2 Single line diagram and wiring schematics showing controls relays etc id Description of equipment operation including vL Automatic starting and transfer to standby unit and back to normal power 2 Test control 3 Manual control 4 Automatic shutdown 1 4 Operation and Maintenance Data Provide operation and maintenance data for automatic load transfe r equipment for incorporation in Section 16010 to manual speci fied in Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternat
275. ication Centre and in Ducts PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere m Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 i3 Concrete Encased Duct Bank Section 16105 and Manholes 4 Direct Buried Underground Section 16107 Cable Ducts 5 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 6 Wires and Cables Section 16122 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Cable Protection vL 38 x 140 mm planks pressure treated with coloured napthenate or 5 pentachlorophenol solution water repellent preservative 22 5 11 Concrete type cable markers 600 600 100 mm with words cable joint or conduit and name of electrical system impressed in top surface with arrows to indicate change in direction of cable and duct runs PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Direct Burial of Cables After sand bed specified in Section 02223 Excavating Trenching and Backfilling is in place lay cables maintaining 75 mm clearance from each side of trench to nearest cable Do not pull cable into trench m Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements Offset cables 150 mm for each 60 m run maintaining minimum cable separation and bending radius requirements 43 Underground cable splices not acceptable Project No 674 2005 Installation of Section 16106 Alternate Emergency Cables in Trenches Page 2 Communication Centre and in Ducts 4 Minimum permitted radius at
276. ices using DIP switches for addressing shall acceptabl Provide tamper resistant covers for all manual alarm ons located in resident wings B C D and E Detector Mounting Plate detec 3 fee with 2 intel stand recom Remot x indig mount 2 marke a3 numbe Signa Use 8 trans carcu Lior All tor for direct insertion into a duct 3 feet 0 corrosion resistant red enamel finish The duct detector mounting plate shall support ligent analog photoelectric detector SIGA PS Provide a mounting plate assembly suitable for mounting a 91m high and t 0 91m wide Mounting plate shall be code gauge steel an and a ard detector base Locate duct detector according to NFPA 72 mendations e Alarm LED Provide a Remote LED Alarm indicator SIGA LED as ated on plans LED shall have a 180 degree viewing angle and on a standard single gang box Finish shall be high impact white plastic and das an alarm device clearly Provide lamacoid to identify fan system or room name and r as required at each remote indicating light 1 Paging Devices inch eight ohm cone type loudspeakers with matching formers parallel connected to supervised 70 volt signal page its Provide input power taps 1 4 1 2 1 2 and factory set watt Provide axial sensitivity of 85 db at 10 4 eet for a 2
277. ide t hannel performance requirements at 200 MHz 21 Worst shall be 21 22 19 4 5 6 7 formance case c EXT power sum rated ttenuation 21 7dB ower sum rated ACR 15 ELFEXT power sum rated Return loss 12dB Propogation delay Delay skew 50 5 3 N A p 548ns he f ldB 4dB 20 2dB ollowing Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 3 Communication Centre Cabling Tes Standards 21 The equipment and installation shall comply with the following current requirements E National Building Code 42 Manitoba Building Code Canadian Electrical Code 4 EIA TIA and CSA Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards 5 Manitoba Fire Code 6 Local and Municipal By laws 41 Authorities having jurisdiction 8 Equipment to be as supplied by 201 22 Systimax 1576 Approved Voice and Data Subcontractor 1 Voice and Data Communications Cabling System Subcontractors shall adhere to the following oll Subcontractor shall install only approved product 2 Equipment manufacturer must be supported by at least three certified local installers MS Subcontractor shall be certified by the equipment 4 Subcontractor s b xperienced in all aspects of this Work and shall have direct experience on recent systems
278. im taneous tripping for short circuit trips the breaker upon recognized unique current and or voltage signatures associated with arcing faults Manufacturers Acceptable manufacturers Siemens Cutler Hammer Schneider Square D Project No 674 2005 Moulded Case Section 16477 Alternate Emergency Circuit Breakers Page 3 Communication Centre PART 3 EXECUTION 2 5 Installation 1 Install circuit breakers as indicated END Project No 674 2005 Fuses Low Voltage Section 16478 Alternate Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 21 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 1 2 Shop Drawings and Product Data al Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 22 Submit fuse performance data characteristics for each fuse type and size above 30 A Performance data to include average melting time current characteristics I t for fuse coordination and peak let through current 153 Maintenance Materials sal Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 16010 a2 Three spare fuses of each type and size installed above 600 A 43 Six spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and including 600 A 1 4 Delivery and Storage sal Ship fuses in original containers 2 Do not ship fuses ins
279. ing as Connect all downlead conductors at grade to the grounding loop cable All down conductors shall be installed on face of building in rigid PVC conduit with offsets for cable strain relief Upon completion of the lightning protection system the Contractor shall submit a certificate of installation and an inspector s report to the Contract Administrator Z Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 1 Communication Centre Two Stage PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 223 Wires and Cable Section 16122 4 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes Section 16132 and Fittings 9 Work in Existing Building Section 16195 References sl CAN ULC S524 Installation of Fire Alarm Systems v2 ULC S525 Audible Signal Appliances Fire Alarm 3 CAN ULC S526 Visual Signal Appliances for Fire Alarm Systems 4 CAN ULC S527 Control Units Fire Alarm 5 ULC S528 Manually Actuated Signalling Boxes Fire Alarm 6 CAN ULC S529 Smoke Detectors Fire Alarm 57 ULC S530 Heat Actuated Fire Detectors Fire Alarm 8 CAN ULC S531 Smoke Alarms 9 CAN ULC S536 Inspection and Testing of Fire Ala
280. inistration ID Identification IEC International Electrotechnical Commission In X It Entry Exit I O Input Output ISO International Organization for Standardization LED Light Emitting Diode NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association ODBC Open Database Connectivity OPC OLE for Process Control PIN Personal Identification Number RFQ Request for Quotation SEIWG Security Equipment Integration Working Group SMS Security Management System SPDT Single Pole Double Throw UDF User Defined Field UL Underwriters Laboratories URL Uniform Resource Location WAN Wide Area Network Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Security Management Section 16902 Page 4 Integrated System 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMS 1 The following terms are defined for the purposes of this Specification d Access Group A logical group of card readers terminals which may be connected to one or more represent a collection of readers for der may have access privi cardhol 2 Access Mode on point Alarm conditions s This is referred to as a 3 Acknowledge in state The mode of ly annunciate tamper and troubl not be annunciated E hall operation in which controllers and that which a particular leges the SMS shall a monitored in this mode e conditions at larm shunting The action tak
281. inserts etc and arrange for all necessary openings where required to accommodate the electrical installation Work shall be arranged in co operation with other divisions of this specification in such a manner that it doesn t interfere with the progress of the project In areas where ducts or pipes must be installed along with conduit or cable co operate with other divisions so that the finished job will represent the most efficient use of the space 4 In no case proceed with any work in uncertainty Obtain from the Contract Administrator any clarification necessary and thoroughly understand all portions of the work to be performed Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternat Emergency Requirements Page 4 Communication Centre Electric Motors Equipment and Controls Supplier and installer responsibility is indicated in Motor Schedule on electrical drawings or in this specification and related mechanical responsibility is indicated in Mechanical Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 16 except for conduit wiring and connections below 50V which are related to temperature control systems specified in Division 15 and or shown on mechanical drawings Finishes Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust r
282. ion and route to be hese locations must be he required conduit on drawings or led to conserve interfere as little which they pass Max maintained under all otherwise shown on t Administrator as possible wit imum clearance suspended cond he drawings or cable an only shown diagrammatically maximum head room and h free use of space above floor shall be uit and equipment approved by the Cont through unless Lract Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Electrical Ge Requirements neral Section 16010 Page 15 10 Submit a complete set of drawings for the proposed installation to the Inspection Department having ju written approval before installation o equipment No extra or rearrangement of any electrical app necessary due to failure to receive th Provide the Electr ic Utility with thre showing the main d risdiction and receive r fabrication of any tion will be allowed for any changes aratus or materials is approval e copies of a drawing istribution and the proposed method of metering for approval prior to the manufacture of equipment Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples Submit shop drawings produce detailed accordance with previous sections as Contract Administrator s satisfaction Indicate details o f constr
283. ion transformer inverter and static transfer switch shall be housed in single free standing NEMA type 1 enclosure Casters and leveling feet shall be provided fo ease of installation Front access only shall be required for xpedient servicing adjustments and installation UPS cabinet shall be structurally adequate for forklift handling 22 UPS cabinet shall be cleaned primed and painted with manufacturer s standard color UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies Like assemblies and like components shall be interchangeable Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 5 Cooling provided 22 i converte for high when man Groundin chassis Provision u Load shall by UPS Thermal design coordinated with prot or internal cabinet Temperatures inverter temperature readings X facturer g AC out X or local shall along with all tective circuits befor temperat and ba s maximum be automatically Component S Input Converter 4 1 power th in 95 In zh un in an surges wil C62 AC d CUFISGHEs converter rate Fuse 1 Inp General tput neutral shall be el Ctransr le noise output thermal sensors Cooling
284. ire and Cables Section 16122 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Ducts and Fittings zt Rigid PVC ducts for direct burial with expanded flange ends with minimum wall thickness at any point of 3 0 mm Nominal length 3 m plus or minus 12 mm 2 Rigid PVC split ducts 23 Rigid PVC couplings reducers bell end fittings plugs caps adaptors as required to make complete installation 4 Rigid PVC 90 deg and 45 deg bends as required 9 Rigid PVC 5 deg angle couplings as required 6 Expansion joints every 100 m and as required 242 Solvent Weld Compound 2d Solvent weld compound for PVC duct joints 2 3 Fibreglass Ducts eL Fibreglass reinforced epoxy underground cable duct watertight self extinguishing type 12 Couplings reducers plugs caps adaptors and supports required to make a complete installation 3 Expansion joints every 100 m and as required Project No 674 2005 Direct Buried Section 16107 Alternate Emergency Underground Page 2 Communication Centre Cable Ducts 2 4 Plastic Polyethylene Pip Flexible plastic polyethylene pipe with approved couplings and PART 3 fittings required to make a complete installation Cable Pulling Equipment 6 mm stranded nylon pull rope tensile strength 5 kN Markers Concrete type cable markers as indicated with words cable joint or conduit and name of
285. istortion THD for linear loads at 208V 3 5 THD maximum for 100 3 1 crest f factor load at 208V with 3 maximum single harmonic at 100 non linear loading 8 Load Power Factor Range 0 9 leading to 0 5 lagging 9 Output Power Rating Rated kVA from 0 5 to 0 7 lagging power factor rated kW from 0 7 lagging to 0 9 leading power factor Rated kW is rated kVA times 0 7 power factor 10 Overload Capability on inverter 125 for 10 minutes 150 for 30 seconds 100 continuous rating 11 Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment 5 from nominal settings 12 Step Load Transient Response Voltage will not exceed 1 of nominal rated voltage for linear step load change up to 100 of UPS rating 13 Transient Recovery Time to within 1 of output voltage within 1 cycle 14 Load Unbalance Maximum 100 of rated phase current 15 Noise Attenuation With isolated neutral 80 dB up to 100 kHz common mode 60 dB up to 100 kHz transverse mode 7 AC Output Static Bypass Overload Capability gt 2 000 static switch automatically shuts off 2 000 2 cycles 200 30 seconds 150 10 minutes 110 continuous rating 2 Surge Withstand Capability ANSI C62 41 Categories A and B 23 Detect and Transfer Time less than 1 millisecond for overloads less than 4 milliseconds for faults 1 4 Environmental Conditi
286. it ker manu h time be hig of the be tes 2 D ins brea brea es GP qt 42 equipmen all devices 10 of t taken to equipmen time actual qq The for title sheet t used correc t passes all req current coordination st ly tested provid tests and analysis has been completed s he final report shal successfully passed all test report shall be shall be signed and seal the testing A minim ted at end and charac ted alo uctor ulation kers in C kers with solid sta The report shall be bound in a 3 ring loose lea similar to the Short Circuit table of conten summary and table form wi the required values listed he required values any problems and t uired tests udy and con required coordination uccess in the br anothe b drawing In cases such as primary breaker pro transformers provide brea fully adjustab larger in order to all curve shall be included in tha test brea ker sol tes turer s curren eakpoin r poin ct ct terist ng the contac testin DP typ lO at straig t resis g of al he ht 5 t harac of t shall be lo li tance l breakers air circuit ki adequacies include single line diagram of the distribu he curves shown on the Maximum available shor tudy shall be started immediately on award o an
287. iureJoid peyioeds eulos 9 Aq Jooq Bury sejoueg z L 3HvMQHVH DINOULOATY suogeogioeds ay Aq paulwuajep eq 0 81 Joop uoneiedo oyloads eu Aqunoas sed 100p eousJejei oyioeds ou 1 eeu Aq pauyap se Joop pue suejd 100 uo pajou se Jequinu Joop Door 07 03 2006 3 18 PM Reference Guide to Door Security Schedule 4of4 FIRE ALARM ZONE SCHEDULE Project 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE Job Number 05 015 01 ZONE AUTOMATIC ZONES LOCATION NOTES TAMPER SWITCH BASEMENT BOILER ROOM 4 TAMPER SWITCH BASEMENT BASEMENT TAMPER SWITCH MAIN FLOOR MAIN FLOOR TAMPER SWITCH MAIN FLOOR RM 126 TAMPER SWITCH MAIN FLOOR MAIN FLOOR TAMPER SWITCH SECOND FLOOR 2ND FLOOR TAMPER SWITCH THIRD FLOOR 3RD FLOOR FLOW SWITCH BASEMENT BOILER ROOM FLOW SWITCH BASEMENT BASEMENT FLOW SWITCH MAIN FLOOR RM 126 FLOW SWITCH MAIN FLOOR SOUTH WING MAIN FLOOR FLOW SWITCH SECOND FLOOR 2ND FLOOR FLOW SWITCH THIRD FLOOR SOUTH WING 3RD
288. l 21 Al mounted separately only the reader head and pilot lights are m housing on the 2 supervised alarm inpu ut relays CARD RE ERS readers s en Provide 2000 cards prox card II or ap Wiegand Technology s The mol 2 The pu single L ded plastic lot light or L reader ho reader acceptable 9 hall be configured with on the secure side of try side of the door terminal terminal th LED to indicate ating with the server boards Intelligent boards shall be K7xx series controller ts SPDT output t poin eight t points and eight reader electronics the door such that ounted in the reader proximity photo proved equal usings shall be made of c The reader shall be available in card onl N pad versions Furnish and install in th as shown on the drawings ID type to be H I D ast aluminum or shall contain one green and one red built in ED to indicate valid and inval ED that changes color from red to green is also id card badging A y and card plus e style and quantities Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 32 Communication Centre System 4 The readers shall be manufacturer certified for an ambient operating environment of 32 to 115 F 0 to 46 C and 10
289. l mounted on the equipment rack or cabinet Faceplate and Patch Panel Icons The following icon descriptions and colors shall be utilized throughout the voice and data networking systems at all workstations and patch panels 421 Telephone Phone gray 22 Fax Fax gray 209 Modem Modem gray 4 Data LAN Data blue Provide blank icons for all unused ports Faceplates Faceplates shall accept dual port installation kits Faceplates shall accept minimum of four workstation jacks as Specified Faceplates shall be iconable Faceplates shall be provided with integral administrative labeling strips Modular Furniture Faceplates Faceplate shall accept a minimum of 3 workstation jacks as Specified Faceplate shall be iconable Faceplate provided shall suit the modular furniture supplied by the City of Winnipeg Contractor to co ordinate on Site Category 6 Workstation Jacks Jacks shall incorporate insulation displacement connections Specified for 24 AWG wire Jacks shall be 8 position 8 conductor modular type All unused jack locations shall be installed with blank inserts The connecting hardware for the enhanced Category 56 cabling system channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the cabling system as specified in Clause 1 4 System Performance The Project No
290. l shal the cabl characteristics of 1 4 System Performance requirements specified with the horizontal 15 insulated with high density The cord shall be jacketed in be four pair configuration and terminate with eight pin data and video n maximum num 1 to 100 MHz The patch cables for the enhanced Category 56 cabling system channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the cabling S S Performance The channel requirements specified with the Category 5 patch consist of the following UTP or the enhanced Category 56 meet ling system as specified in Clause the electrical The channel shall meet the cable provided 45 24AWG solid copper conductor DC resistance insulation shall meet FT 4 9 38 ohms 100m maximum DC resistance unbalanced fire rating 5 maximum 4 5 6 247 8 9 10 Capacit Mutual capacitance tance Unbalance Characteristic OMHz 5 6nF 100m maximum pair to ground 330pF 100m Impedance 100 ohms 15 at 1 to Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 12 Communication Centre Cabling 2 16 Backbone Cabling sah Voice backbone cabling shall consist of 25 pair 100 ohm unshielded twis ted pair UTP meet Category 3 specifica tions and CSA or ULC
291. lack c w cordset Project No 674 2005 Wiring Devices Section 16141 Alternate Emergency Page 3 Communication Centre 2 4 Incandescent Lighting Dimmer Controls Dimmer control devices to have calibrated linear slide control lever from 0 to 100 A separate ON OFF switch or the bottom position of slider to have a positive OFF switch to turn off current flow to lamps AZ Dimmers shall be rated at 1500 1000 or 600 watts as required by connected load plus 20 spare capacity i3 Colour of dimmer snap on cover to be as selected by the Contract Administrator or as indicated on the drawings 4 Provide a separate neutral wire for each dimmer circuit v Approved Manufacturers sl Lutron Nova NT 1 Series 2 Leviton Monet MN IL Series 2 5 Fluorescent Lighting Dimmer Controls 21 Dimmer control devices to have a calibrated linear slide control lever from 5 to 100 A separate ON OFF switch or the bottom position of slider to have a positive OFF switch to turn off current flow to lamps 2 Colour of dimmer snap on cover to be as selected by the Contract Administrator or as indicated on the drawings 23 Provide separate neutral wire for each dimmer circuit 4 Approved ballasts Lutron Advance Mark X Philips Ecotron 25 Approved Manufacturers Sl Lutron Nova NTF 10 series rated at 16 Amps 52 Leviton
292. lding Name Parks and Reereation Building Address 700 Ass ii iboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba 15 i 5 5 Crarlspaca CER Houth hall winpanp Crawlsnacn H E Cruvlmpacn Boller Tr ik a 8 8 Crawlspnca 4 Centra Stai 3 5 Basement Huliwjy I i a 8 4 Technician C Kyle P Date November 22 This document ix printed on recyeled paper SMS ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Approved By Reference J SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada COMMUNICATION CENTRE AR Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 File No Setup Date Detail Sheet sms smseng com ER M 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG 05 015 01 JAN SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers _ ANNUAL TEST AND INSPECTION REPORT Building N ame Parks and Recreation Building Address 700 Assiniboine Park Drive Winnipeg Manitoba Heenan ee Cround Floor Bonta By douth Statr By Janitor 1 Jauitcr Rom B Euplscad Police Zutrannu 2 REMARKS H Park Feller 00 Hy Cufuturin lun
293. le or hinged front panel for the batteries LED diagnostics display and Lest Units to be independently suspended from structure above test switch to be mounted on Lithonia Manufacturers Acceptable Manufacturers Dual Lite Emergi lite Lumacell Luxnet Uniglo Remote Heads Remote micro heads fixture 41 Double or triple heads indicated 22 Wall or ceiling mountable mounting plate 23 Molded thermoplastic housing and mounting plate 4 Adjustable rotary collar and adjustable swivel heads for proper aiming of fixture 5 Prismatic acrylic lens over lamp 6 12 Watt quartz halogen lamp at voltage indicated si Approved Manufacturers 21 Dual Lite MRH series Uniglo 22 Emergi Lite P18 series 23 Lithonia P18 series 4 Lumacell MQ series x5 Luxnet R1Q series 6 MR series Recessed fixture WN Single head recessed in drywall Fully adjustable for tilt Matte white finish Minimum 12 watt quartz halogen 1 Acceptable manufacturers i Dual Lite EXT 122 series 2 Emergi Lite EF15 series 23 Lithonia ELA RG series 4 Lumacell RS20 series 5 Luxnet R21 series 6 Uniglo MRR series or T bar ceiling rotation and tight beam control amp at voltage indicated Project No 674 2005 Unit Equipment for Section 16536 Alternate Emergency Emergency Lig
294. led to indicate panel or equipment fed Shop Fabrication Assemble and wire complete servic ntrance board Energize switchboard PART 3 Check meters and phase selector switches Prepare switchboard for shipment to Site Manufacturers Cutler Hammer Schneider Square D Seimens Future Energy Management Provide terminal board and wiring from customer CT s and PT s to facilitate the future installation of thermal demand watt hour energy management equipment recorders etc EXECUTION Installation Locate service entrance switchboard as indicated and mount securely plumb true and square to adjoining surfaces Connect servic ntrance cables to line terminals of switchboard Connect load terminals of distribution breakers to outgoing feeders as indicated Check factory made connections for mechanical security and electrical continuity Run minimum 4 0 bare copper grounding conductor in 25 mm conduit from ground bus to main building ground Project No 674 2005 Service Entrance Section 16421 Alternate Emergency Board Page 6 Communication Centre 6 Check trip unit settings against coordination study to ensure proper working and protection of components 7 Where floor mounted arrange for main distribution switchboard to be mounted on 100mm housekeeping pad END Project No 674 2005 Secondary Switchgea
295. less steel face plate EXECUTION Installation Do not ground neutral on Pass phase conductors inc Ctransrormers load side of ground fault relay luding neutral through zero sequenc Connect supply and load wiring to equipment in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Project No 674 2005 Ground Fault Circuit Section 16496 Alternate Emergency Interrupters Page 2 Communication Centre Class A 3 2 Field Quality Control Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 22 Arrange and pay for field testing of ground fault equipment by independent testing laboratory before commissioning service 23 Submit report of tests to Contract Administrator anda certificate that system as installed meets criteria specified herein Include copies of report in maintenance manuals 4 Demonstrate simulated ground fault tests END Project No 674 2005 Lighting Equipment Section 16505 Alternate Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 4 Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300 22 Painting General Section 09900 23 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 142 Shop Drawings an
296. li ondit ngle functi not 11 be 32 F to to address each n Input Riser Signal supervised output circuit be suitable for any of ty of the modul om ll not Cire lts The signa mounted b to confi hall S sn TT S 1 modu ehind f rm comn flash to di inis hall be capabl T h American 4 squar Terminal The signa he signal le of stori modu 2 1 2 e boxes connections bly 64 lm le shall le shall Devices which mus access to the wiring terminals shall no odule shall be suitable al connections shall be accessible from the room side of the assembly Devices which the wiring must be removed to gain access to be acceptable suitable for operation in the 120 F 0 C to 49 C non condensing nodule without the use P switches for Module shall The output circuit shall the following operations polarized audible and visibl e signal le shall be programmable at tions and may be changed at any time using ty code downloaded from the Analog Loop on modules or modules requiring ROM or PROM changes or DIP switch jumper changes be acceptable uit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground have a minimum of 2 diagnostic hed cover plate A green LED shall nunication with the loop controller A lay alarm status The module up to 24 diagnostic codes be suitable for mounting on de
297. ll documentation in in U spection sultant tion report shal verificat release ted Operation shall xs fan shutdown etc be verified e g bells ringing Observing a e g observing Complete Lo ubmitted is verification s the operation of system to Owners tion of all terminals terconnecting wires and cables pon completion of veri including mylar sepia of tub or cabinet submitted 30 seconds switch in verii zb Fire Alarm Syst Supply complete manufacturer s data instructions to aid the Owner and servic 4 th Record ication report hes such that Equipment Data uipment and system in Include manufacturer shall mar tion work perf Contractor th system reverification h zone and include tity of detectors on each zone Check and calibrate time delay of time delay is between 25 inal setting time delay of every flow hall be included kers fication that in fact ll be just cause for ormed by shall be ormation and to troubleshoot repair maintain all of the following in each of the Maintenance Operating Manuals 21 22 1111 23 4 5 46 sT 8 n 9 d 210 modules engineering specifications data user man ties ual compl
298. m device END Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 1 Communication Centre Pathway PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 421 Firestopping Requirements Section 07270 2 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 i3 Installation of Cables in Trenches Section 16106 and in Ducts 4 Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts Section 16107 25 Conduits Conduit Fastenings and Section 1611 Conduit Fittings 6 Splitters Junction Pull Boxes and Section 1613 Cabinets 2d Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes and Section 16132 Fittings 1 2 References 41 Latest edition of the following sd EIA TIA 569 Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces refer to CSA standards CAN CSA T530 M90 CAN CSA C22 2 No 214 M90 22 EIA TIA 607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications refer to CSA standard CAN CSA T527 3 NBC National Building Code of Canada 4 CAN CSA C22 1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One CAN CSA C22 1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One Section 60 Electrical Communication Systems 6 CAN CSA C22 2 No 0 M91 General Requirements Canadian Electrical Code Pa
299. male 5 m om preset Integration Option Not required identification of cardholder ingerprints and barcodes f and tours the monitors focus iris wiper washer and trols for any given camera ts and auxiliaries Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Security Management System Section 16902 Page 26 2 integrated security sol at a minim shall s 1 2 23 4 VX 3 switc 29 su Ve 6 E 83 upport General u um the f ASCI protocol The CCTV option shall provide for single seat tion when used with the SMS and ollowing CCTV protocols American Dynamics switch AD1024 Ge nes Panasonic SX850 switch they are compatible with SX850 Protocol 1 4 01 24 00 pported i rsion BetaTech switc utebruck GST Vicros II f Ademco Video Interface KS 48 Vicros n 1 Blox Switch CPX 24 8 1 CPX 48 8 and KS 40 other Pelco 97 ips Phil 60 Pur e Bosch 00 switches 8 y9 swi 23 In control DVR Int 441 Th SMS wit TAS functio 01 LTC 8500 Vicon VPS1300 CM 6700 and CM 6800 switches LTC 8100 models may be LTC 8200 LTC LTC 8600 LTC 8800 trak MaxPro 1000 switch VPS1422 and VPS1466 V
300. mergency stop ator temperature tinuous strip char voltage variations recorders during load switching procedures with chart speed of 1 3 mm s Each load change delayed until steady state conditions exist Switching increments to include 1 No load to full load to no load 22 No load to 70 load to no load 29 No load to 20 load to no load 4 20 load to 40 load to no load 5 40 load to 60 load to load 1 6 60 load to 80 load to no load 3 Demonstrate 21 Automatic starting of set automatic transfer of load on failure of normal power and retransfer to normal power on automatic control 22 Automatic shut down of engine on resumption of normal power lt 3 Operation of manual bypass switch 4 That battery charger reverts to high rate charge after cranking 55 Unit start and shut down on Manual control 6 Unit start and transfer on Test control Unit start on Engine start control 8 Satisfactory performance of dampers in ventilating system to provide adequat ngine cooling 4 Demonstrate low oil pressure high engine temperature and other shutdown and alarm device operation without subjecting engine to these excesses 5 Provide additional testing as required by Manitoba Building Code Canadian Electrical Code and CSA Standards 1 8 Training wall Provide a minimum of 6 hours of hands on training of personnel in operation and maintena
301. mmable circular logging assuring that at least the last 800 events will memory The system shall support conventional smoke detection supervisory and status monitoring devices be capable of supporting future ampl and a firefighter s circuits The panel connected i detectors gall The me accurate to constant di must be capable of ntelligent asurements 01 VDC mode a manual og shall be discrete The readings shall splay of voltage shifts when voltage list 22 Th list of the required sensitivity 443 When programmed refraction style smoke de sensitivity drift compensation up or down testing any system connected tor shall be capable of station lifiers telephone system ways be stored in non volatile intelligent analog smoke detection water flow The system shall also future voice visual measuring the sensitivity of ionization and photoelectric smoke voltage readings be dynamic providing a in the sensitivity e control panel shall provide display and a these sensitivity measurements as a permanent printed record of ionization or light automatic This adjustment shall tored in flash memory printed or downloaded by classification for Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Al
302. mmunications outlet 17 Provide two 20mm3 4in conduits stubbed up to accessible ceiling space from a two gang communications outlet 18 Provide four 20mm3 4in conduits stubbed up to accessible ceiling Space from a four gang communications outlet 19 Conduits stubbed up from communications outlet shall be routed to the nearest point of the cable tray Conduits shall terminate onto the cable tray with conduit to tray adaptors 20 Conduit fill shall be as per cable manufacturers recommendations but shall in no cas xceed the maximum fill allowed by code 3v5 PVC Underground Conduit 21 The use of 90 degree corners is not allowed Use two 45 degree fittings spaced apart to provide a 90 degree corner The bending radius shall be 410mm16in minimum 22 Layout underground PVC conduit below the building structure with long sweeping bends around structure piles 23 Underground PVC conduit shall be installed with watertight sealant between each section 3 6 Outlet Boxes 21 Refer to Section 16132 22 Refer to detail sheets for faceplate configurations 3 Fill boxes with paper sponges foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction Remove upon completion of Work 4 Information outlet boxes shall not be placed back to back when servicing adjacent rooms there shall be a minimum of 200mm8in of
303. mplete wiring and interconnections as indicated The initial start up shall be performed by factory trained representative of the diesel generator set supplier Start generating set and test to ensure correct perf components ormance of Project No 674 2005 Powe Alternate Emergency Dies Communication Centre r Generation Section 16622 el Page 13 25 Provide wiring between generator control panel and transfer Switch in conduit Wiring as required 3 2 Testing 24 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions and Site Tests in Part 2 Notify Contract Administrator 7 working days in advance of test date 23 Provide and install necessary load banks for testing 4 Provide fuel for testing and leave full tanks on acceptance 223 Run unit on load for minimum period of 4 h to show load carrying ability stability of voltage and frequency and satisfactory performance of dampers in ventilating system to provide adequate engine cooling 26 At end of test run check battery voltage to demonstrate battery charger has returned battery to fully charged state Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternate Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 1 Commun
304. ms to a common supervisory trouble zone in main fire alarm panel sb CO Overcranking Overspeed ngine temperature High Alte Low Low lube oil pressure Short circuit rnator overvoltage battery voltage or no battery charge Manual remot mergency stop Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 8 Communication Centre 29 High alternator temperature 14 10 Low fuel 11 Genera 12 Genera tor fail tor running All piping and connections to the engine and generator shall section supplied with the engine include a flexibl Alternator Alternator to NEMA MGl Rating 1 phase 120 240V 3 wire temperature rise Output at 40 deg C ambient sd 100 ful oad continuously 12 1255 full load for 1 min Revolving c 1e Drip proof ld brushless Amortisseur windings Synchronous type Thermis Exciter alterna Voltage regulator with phase control lt 1 Stability 0 1 rotating brushless or permanent magnet shall have capacity to provide 150 rated load and voltage output of 300 load from no load 22 Regulation steady sta 3 Transient of 0 8 PF full lo 4 Transient 0 8 PF full load 5 Transient 10 tors embedded in s tor contro l cir
305. n 16 contractor time current curves of all breakers fuses etc 4 The study shall 1 Select settings and characteristics for devices in order to achieve maximum selectivi devices during fault conditions i the devic ty between nearest th fault will operate first thus minimizing the interruption and to provide proper protection for all distribution equipment transformers cable etc 2 Determine the fault currents at critical points in the power system under the worst case conditions in order to nsure the adequacy of the electrical equipment and protective devices Motor contribution is to be taken into account 43 Include all breakers in type panelboards Breaker settings shall be listed in the study for all breakers with adjustable trips Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 12 Communication Centre 5 In addition to the curves for the protective devices each drawing shall show and include proper protection and coordination fors 6 incl All list 2 for rati cont 8 cabl curr 9 dist Transformer full load phase Cable damage curves z5 The largest motor or motors likely to present coordination problems Transformer inrush points currents 1 2 3 Transformer damage curves single ph
306. n 16010 as well relieve the contractor from meeting requirements 23 Manufacturers 1 Approved n zb Edwards 52 Simpl atisfactory service three copies of data sheets shall be submitt point comply non comply cross reference lis Refer to Approval of other manufacturers does not the specification ex ar instal lai information herein is intended tandards of per X 1 he system and components must be supplied by one manufacturer f established reputation and experience who must have produced imilar apparatus for a period of at least be able to refer to simil five 5 years and who tion rendering All references to model numbers and other in writing five AES nanufacturers 23 Cerberus Siemens 4 Notifier v2 Approved n for all sales nanufact installation inspection PART 2 PRODUCTS Materials 23 Equipment and devices turer Single manufact 2 Power supply 3 Audible signal devices service etc to CAN ULC S524 to ULC S525 4 Control unit to CAN ULC S527 5 Manual fire alarm stations to ULC S528 6 Thermal detectors to ULC S530 13 Smoke detectors to CAN ULC S529 to establish minimum formance quality and construction Specified herein must equipment must be of one the contractor must obtain 5 the working days prior to The manufacturer s name working d
307. n 16111 Breakers Section 16477 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 Drawings to include e Plant Assembly PART 1 1 1 wil 43 1 2 1 we 1 53 eal 2 PART 2 2 1 wal 52 i3 4 5 6 lectrical detail of panel Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment branch breaker type quantity ampacity and enclosure dimension In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer s nameplate must show fault current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand PRODUCTS Panelboards Panelboards to CSA C Panelboards product 250V branch circuit p symmetrical or as in Sequence phase bussin numbered in consecuti permanent number iden 22 2 No 29 of one manufacturer anelboards bus and breakers rated for RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity minimum or as indicated and 347 600V panels bus and breakers rated for 14 ka RMS dicated g such that circuit breakers will be ve order with each breaker identified by tification as to circuit number and phase Panelboards mains n branch circuit breake umber of circuits and number and size of rs as indicated Provide panel covers for all panelboards and supply two keys for each panelboard and k ey panelboards alike Project No 674 2005 Panelboards Section 16471 Alternat Emergency Breaker Type Page 2 Comm
308. n accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code v2 Clamps for grounding of conductor size as required to electrically conductive underground water pipe 23 Copper conductor minimum 6 m long for each concrete encased electrode bare stranded tinned soft annealed size as indicated 4 Rod electrodes galvanized steel 19 mm dia by minimum 3 m long Threaded to accept 3m extensions if required 55 Plate electrodes copper surface area 0 2 m 2 1 6 mm thick 6 System and circuit equipment grounding conductors bare stranded copper tinned soft annealed ed Insulated grounding conductors green size as indicated type RW 90 8 Ground bus copper size 50 mm by 6 mm by 300 mm long complete connectors with insulated supports fastenings Project No 674 2005 Grounding Section 16450 Alternat Emergency Secondary Page 2 Communication Centre PART 3 Non corroding accessories necessary for grounding system type Size material as indicated including but not necessarily limited to j Grounding and bonding bushings lt 2 Grounding or bonding clamps All grounding and bonding clamps shall be brass where attached to copper pipes Clamps for other applications shall be of a type and material that will minimize deterioration from galvanic action due to dissimilar metals 23 Bolted type conductor connectors 4 Thermit welded type conductor connecto
309. n during installation Before pulling cable into ducts and until cables properly terminated seal ends of lead covered cables with wiping solder _ seal ends of non leaded cables with moisture seal tape After installation of cables seal duct ends with duct sealing compound Markers Mark cable every 150 m along cable runs and changes in direction Mark underground splices Vhere markers are removed to permit installation of additional cables reinstall existing markers Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts Section 16106 Page 3 Peri Per Ch En Accep disconnected und shields conductors not form General tests in Requireme E d form tests usi struments and e in Check phase rotat feeder Ck each feeder sure resistance megohms After instal Field Quality Control accordance with Section 16010 Electrical nts ng qualified personnel quipment Provide necessary ion and identify each phase conductor of each for continuity short circuits and grounds to ground of circuits is not less than 50 Pre acceptance tests ling cable but before terminating perform insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger on each phase tance Tests
310. n fire rating END Project No 674 2005 Service Entrance Section 16421 Alternate Emergency Board Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Section 16477 12 Description of Equipment WI Main distribution board incorporates servic ntrance cable connection section main breaker c w built in ground fault utility metering transformer compartment sub feeder distribution section and customer metering section factory assembled in one enclosure 13 Shop Drawings and Product Data ial Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 2 Indicate on shop drawings 1 Floor anchoring method and foundation template 2 Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations 3 Dimensioned position and size of bus 4 Overall length height and depth 25 Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted components 6 Shipping sections and weights 7 Circuit breaker details 2 3 Include time current characteristic curves for breakers and fuses as required for the coordination study 1 4 Maintenance Data eL Provide maintenance data for service entrance board for incorporation into manual specified in Section 16010 15 Source Quality Control 21 Refer to Section 16010 Project No 674
311. n of itioning segmenting is not limited to lphanumeric text ting system shall be Microsoft Windows 2003 It shall have and support workstations h Windows XP Professional or Windows 2000 Professional he system database shall be Windows SQL Server 2000 for ted in the te User s Manual including operation and the major the the following The SMS shall in ideo de for a single dat Serial connections are unacceptable tegrate wi Imaging and badging sys or custom software development tabase on store the cardholder data and image th tem the video capture badging Ethernet 1 P only Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre P2000 System Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 29 11 2 12 3 It shall be possible to operat the Video Imaging software from the same qualified workstation operating with Microsoft Windows 2000 PRODUCT GENERAL Manufacturers 21 single manufacturer including server system input and output terminal modules purchased directly from Johnson Controls or server requirements as outlined below an Johnson Controls 22 Base bid shall be Johnson Controls In alternate manufacturers seeking approval sh following documentation to Intrusi
312. nce procedures of all aspects of the standby generating system 22 Training shall include system operation descriptions review of manual and automatic operation review of controls regular maintenance procedures etc 223 Provide a videotape of the training session for future use the City of Winnipeg Project No 674 2005 Power Generation Section 16622 Alternate Emergency Diesel Page 6 Communication Centre PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Diesel Engine cl Diesel engine to ISO 3046 1 1981 s Engine standard product of current manufacture from company regularly engaged in production of such equipment 52 Two or Four cycle turbo charged and after cooled required synchronous speed 1800 r min 3 Capacity 221 Rated continuous power in kW at 1800 r min after adjustment for power losses in auxiliary equipment necessary for 2 engine operation to be calculated as follows Rated continuous output Generator kW Generator Eff FL zu Under following Site conditions Altitude 500 m 22 Ambient temperature 30 deg C 3 Relative humidity 90 4 Cooling System 21 Liquid cooled heavy duty industrial radiator mounted on generating set base with engine driven pusher type fan to direct air through radiator from engine side Thermostatically controlled with ethylene glycol anti freeze non sludging above minus 46 deg Ensure radiation fan
313. nd junction boxes to indicate System and or voltage characteristics 10 Nameplates for disconnects starters and contactors Indicate equipment being controlled and voltage 11 Nameplates for terminal cabinets and pull boxes Indicate system and voltage 12 Nameplates for transformers Indicate capacity primary and secondary voltages X 13 Nameplates for control devices indicate equipment controlled 14 Adjacent to each breaker in CDP type panelboards provide and mount lamacoid nameplates identifying the respective load and location 15 match existing where applicable 16 All convenience receptacles shall have a lamacoid size 1 plate on which the panel and circuit number from which it is fed is indicated The identification shall be mechanically secured to the coverplate on the appropriate outlet Pressure indented adhesive strip nameplates are not acceptable and shall not be used 17 All non patient care receptacles in patient care areas shall have a Housekeeping lamacoid near top of cover plate 18 All receptacles fed from a UPS shall have a UPS lamacoid near top of cover plate Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternat Emergency Requirements Page 8 Communication Centre Wiring Identification Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markin
314. ndary rated a 5 Amps Capability to d ct user chosen sa Phase loss 2 Phase unbalance 53 Phase reversal 4 Undervoltage 5 Overvoltage Dis The wit on the drawings tribution Section distribution section to consist of a Cl h moulded case circuit breakers shall be manually operated fixed type wit Minimum interrupting rating indicated on symmetrical as the drawings DP and hinged transformers 15 kVA and larger to be c w f settings The CDP type panelboard is to m ully adjustable LSI th t t rated to match ampere rating of main bus lectrical parameters type panelboard door Each breaker h trip ratings as shown to be RMS Breakers feeding 16426 Secondary Switchgear Finishes Apply finishes in accordance with Service entrance swi 12 Supply 2 spray cans tchboard touch up enamel lt 3 Treated to inhibit rusting Section 16010 to be exterior gray requirements of Project No 674 2005 Service Entrance Section 16421 Alternat Emergency Board Page 5 Communication Centre Equipment Identification Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Nameplates wl Size 7 to indicate voltage amp rating and designation 2 2 Complete switchboard labelled as above 29 Main disconnect labelled Main Breaker 4 Sub breakers label
315. ndicate in his tender the number of hours required to complete this inspection 6 Upon completion of the above inspection including any changes required the manufacturer shall submit the following documentation to the Consultant pi Certification of Verification 22 A complete report of all equipment verified including 1 sprinkler system switches 22 automatic detectors 3 alarm signals 4 annunciators 25 door hold open devices sO fan shutdown EET the number and type of devices connected to each circuit T For each piece of equipm information shall be included verified th the report nt in following 1 Catalogue number and type of device 2 Location of device 23 Zoning or circuit devices including ancillary devices 4 Supervision test results 29 Operation of device 6 Inspection date zd Serial number of every smoke detector 29 Sensitivity reading of every smoke detector including duct detectors 9 Record the time delay of all sprinkler flow switches 10 Zone circuit loop resistance 11 Fire alarm system supplier shall verify that alarm descriptions match and are consistent at each of following reporting locations sl Fire alarm control panel 2 Fire alarm remote annunciators Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage Section 16723 Page 26 8 su
316. ndle lock out device ground fault protection where required Refer to the single line distribution schematic for the breaker size and additional requirements 2 6 Grounding 1 Copper ground bus not smaller than 50 x 6mm extending full width of switchboard and located at bottom 52 Lugs at each sized for grounding cables Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Service Entrance Board Section 16421 Page 4 2 7 21 M 3 4 2 8 1 249 m Customer Metering Section Microprocessor based self contained door mounted device designed to both monitor and display the following electrical parameters 21 AC line current each phase 4 18 accuracy 2 AC line to line voltage all 3 1 accuracy x3 AC line to neutral voltage all 3 1 accuracy 4 Watts 2 accuracy 5 Vars 2 accuracy 6 Power factor 4 accuracy 1 Peak Demand 2 accuracy 8 Frequency 5 accuracy 29 Watt hours 2 accuracy Voltage may be directly monitored on 3 phase AC lines within a range of 120 to 600 VAC without external potential transformers Current monitoring is through external current transformers Current transformers to be dry type for indoor use with following characteristics 21 Nominal voltage class as indicated 22 Rated frequency 60 Hz a3 Primary curren Seco
317. ne state as an operating sys functions upon power restoration backed up memory devices shall not Selectable history event logging shall be s and displayed selectiv vent reports 21 Shall inputs as alarms troubles changes and device alarm verifica control and output activation acknowledge m Data f track alarm 23 Audible and visual memory is 8 or Class ted by a card edge connector B wiring or city This modul capable and shal e 1 The module shall be supervised Open and short or open and shorted circ trouble only and respond with circuit contain two uits 2 programmable sourcing 250 ma at 40 VDC for require no manual input to initia complete power down condition It tem performing all Systems requiring battery t be acceptable tion ormat for downl data base handling program 5 aci 0 and 90 full tions sensitivity arm disarm override password set loading shall be compa indications shall to allow downl shall low selection of events to be logged supervisory as reset ize in the return to an programmed including securities outputs status as audible set t time and tible with the allowing custom report generation to troubles and maintenance be generated when loading of data The system shall be progra
318. ng Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 3 Communication Centre System 2 Owner Acceptance Form with a check box associated with each card reader and input point A check mark in the box will indicate that each point has been correctly installed and that communication between the controller and the server has been established This form shall be completed prior to Owner acceptance of the system Six 6 sets of the Manufacturer s User Installation Manuals 4 Course outlines for each of the end user training programs The course outlines shall include the course duration and a brief description of the subject matter 1476 ABBREVIATIONS ACRONYMS 24 The following abbreviations and acronyms are used in this document AC Alternating Current ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AV Audio Visual BPI Bits Per Inch BPS Bits Per Second CCTV Closed Circuit Television CE European Conformity CPU Central Processing Unit DVR Digital Video Recorder FASC N Federal Agency Smart Credential Number Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Adm
319. ng and Power rary and construction ligh ting and power work and costs are not included as part of the scope of the work of ion tion nuous conduits shall b panels insulation shall be replaced e left with an insulated under full of single phase loads from the test load valu recorded Record all Test all required ground rods for ground resistance on legs or phases es measured date signature of person making chang standard test equipment Keep a re typewritt the maint each meas each meas been succ summary w Upon comp all syste E cord o all final en results to the Contract manual A enance urement urement letion ms shall load and make necessary reconnection 14 AWG fish Refer to such clauses in other sections of the Those circuits which test than 2 Megohms one leg or phase to another to balance as nearly as possible of each measurement Test results company name and each measurement shall be neatly es on Record Drawings T bind tests and turn over company shall essfully completed 1 final name and signature of hich clearly states of the wor be teste Administr installed shall fun ator to or connected k and adjustments of al demonstra as a part
320. ngine rn Switch to Auto to stop of transfer switch on on return of normal voltage 3 Manual position Transfer switch may be operated by manual handle but transfer switch will not operate automatically and tarts but unit will not ails Switch must be returned to Auto to stop engine Control transformers dry type with 1 control circuits from zd Normal power supply 2 Emergency power supply Relays continuous duty industrial c action contacts rated 10 A minimum gab Time Delay adjustment from 0 5 t activation of engine start on momen fluctuation Factory set at 1 second 52 Time Delay adjustment from 0 to emergency position after emergency so set at 0 seconds 29 Time Delay adjustment from 0 to normal Factory set at 3 minutes Sho fail during this timing period there retransfer to the normal source oh 20 V secondary to isolate ontrol type with wiping 6 seconds to prevent tary normal voltage 60 seconds on transfer to urce is available Factory 5 minutes on retransfer to uld the emergency source shall be an immediate Project No 674 2005 Automatic Load Section 16627 Alternate Emergency Transfer Equipment Page 4 Communication Centre 4 Time delay adjustment from 0 4 minutes to delay resetting of engine start signal after retransf
321. ngle impulse current rating shall be no less than 320 kA per phase 22 Pulse life test Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI IEEE C62 41 Category C transients without failure or degradation of UL 1449 clamp voltage by more than 10 3 UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following VOLTAGE L N N G 120 208 400V 400V 277 480 800 800 347 600 1000 1000 4 The ANSI IEEE C 62 41 1991 Category C3 clamping voltage shall not exceed the following VOLTAGE L N N G 120 108 675V 675V 277 480 1250 1250 347 600 1500 1500 The TVSS shall be constructed using surge current modules MOV based Each module shall be fused with user replaceabl 200 000 AIR rated fuses The status of each module shall be monitored on the front cover of the switchboard as well as on the module Project No 674 2005 Transient Vol Alternat Emergency Surge Suppres Communication Centre tage Secti sion Page on 16475 3 10 13 The TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall actuate when any one of the surge current modules has An alarm on off switch shall be provided to silence the and an alarm push to test switch shall ailed be provided to t alarm Both switches and audible alarm shall be located front panel of the switchboard Terminals shall be provided for all of ground connections Each terminal shal of 8 to 1 A
322. nication Centre Battery Cabinet ad Battery Cells Sealed valve regulated lead acid a2 Reserve Time 20 minutes at full load with 25 deg ambient temperature 23 Recharge time to 95 capacity within ten 10 times discharge time The battery charger shall be temperature compensated and be capable of recharging the battery at a slower selectable rate of 20 times the discharge time 4 Modes of Operation 41 UPS shall be designed to operate an on line revers transfer system in the following modes 21 Normal The critical load is continuously supplied by UPS inverter Input converter derives power from utility AC source and supplies power to inverter while simultaneously float charging to storage battery 2 Emergency Upon failure of utility AC power inverter obtains power from battery without interruption There shall be no interruption in power to critical load failure or restoration of utility AC source x3 Recharge Upon restoration of utility AC power after utility AC power outage converter shall automatically restart and assume inverter and battery recharge loads 4 Bypass In case of internal fault or should inverter overload capacity be exceeded static transfer switch shall transfer load from inverter to bypass source with no interruption in power to critical AC load 0 AC Input to UPS 21
323. o alarm as follows horns or speakers and activate s to sound at stage one alarm rate te SUPE the zone or the SORY condition the amber shall go out t and the SHORT and BUZZER by ES RV P he TROUI BLE I S arm initial the fire alarm trobes ting device on 1 annunciat one descriptions in the buil ectrically locked doors eld doors throughou ding as t the entire f tors and control indicated X acility shall be released 6 Signal e evators to home ad pre 8 unt 9 10 11 act aud If con ini Con The tas and mon wit equ beh win Activate preaction action sprinkler zone sprinkler system from devices in the The alarm signal continues to sound throughout the facility jd si Tones are manually silenced horns and speakers remain silenced until a subsequent zone is activated 2 Alarm initiating and the system is reset to t Transmit a signal Other auxiliary f devic S ible and visual alarms the system is being test trol panel shall trol Panel control panel shall tage two alarm activa ivation or 5 minute stage one alarm tin display TEST tiating devices being tested devices ar he Fire Department unctions as specified king microprocessor bas
324. o communicate with High Level Interface protocol elevator control equipment via a serial The SMS shall support the KONE group controller with up to eight elevators with each elevator supporting up to 64 floors The KONE group controller can be connected at either 1200 or 9600 baud Current Loop Configuration 521 The SMS shall allow communication with legacy P900 and 5321 panel E S via a current loop configuration The loop system shall support up to 32 loops with up to 16 legacy panels per loop up to sixty four P900 panels per loop and up to thirty 5 Mustering 321 panels per loop lt I This feature shall provide the capability of tracking personnel movement in the event of an emergency During the emergency all personnel that had logged into a risk area are expected to evacuate and are required to badge at a reader outside 3 the risk area This will allow for real time monitoring printed or on screen as to who may be still in the hazard area This information can be used to direct search and rescue operations One or more areas within a plant or facility can be designated as Muster Zones Area Control This feature shall be used to control the number of personnel cardholders that are allowed within a controlled area thereby allowing large j
325. o the terminals of he Loop Controller shall support up to 96 isolator bases e shall be capable of a each with a distinct operation The personality of the module shal to suit conditions and may be changed at any ty code downloaded at site time using a troller ROM or PROM t be acceptable Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 19 Communication Centre Two Stage 23 The single input module shall support the following circuit types 21 Alarm Latching Manual Station Conventional Heat Waterflow lt 2 Delayed Waterflow Non Latching Monitor 4 Supervisory 4 ground faults Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and 5 The input module shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind finished cover plate green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller A red LED shall flash to display alarm status The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes 6 Terminal connections shall be accessible from the room side of the assembly Devices which must be removed to gain access to the wiring terminals shall not be acceptable 7 The single input module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 1 2 64mm deep 1 gang 1 2 38mm deep 4 square box with 1 gang c
326. oard Page 3 Communication Centre eS Provision for installation of supply authority metering transformers 4 Customer metering instruments transformers and selector Switches as indicated on drawings 5 Distribution section 6 Hinged access panels with captive knurled thumb screws Utility metering section to have provision for utility seals 27 High conductivity aluminum bus 8 Bus from load terminals of main breaker via metering sections to main lugs of distribution section 9 Identify phases with colour coding 10 Sprinkler proof construction to suit local authority having jurisdiction which includes hinged door on distribution section 2 4 Busbars HE Three phase and full capacity neutral bare busbars continuous current rating as indicated on drawings self cooled extending full width and height of cubicle suitably supported on insulators F2 Main connections between bus and major switching components to have continuous current rating to match major switching components 43 Busbars and main connections 99 30 conductivity aluminum 4 Tin plated joints secured with non corrosive bolts and Belleville washers 19 Identify phases of busbars by suitable marking 2 55 Main Breaker Section 1 Type C 41 The main circuit breaker shall be a manually operable fixed mounted moulded case circuit breaker Breaker to be c w a removable ha
327. ocated on the front cover of the panelboard enclosure 6 Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria ERI Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less than 120kA 200kA 320kA per phase lt 2 Pulse life test Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI IEEE C62 41 Category C transients without failure or degradation 3 The clamping voltage shall not exceed the following VOLTAGE L N N G 120 208 400V 400V 277 480 800 800 347 600 1000 1000 7 The suppressor shall have a response time no greater than five nanoseconds for any of the individual protection modes Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum 8 continuous operating vol nominal RMS vol 9 operation 10 at 220A meth 12 unl tage tage MCOV less than 115 of of not Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and S major S 100 S imit shall be com kHz odology uppressors shal provided The indica which phase as well as which module is uppressors shal ponents shal uppressors shall be manufactured in the United States also be of American manufacture have a minimum tor lights shall indicate fully operable All EFI RFI filtering of 34dl with an insertion loss ratio of 50 1 have a five year warranty ted replacements of suppressor modules if they are using Mil
328. odule 5 All encapsulated suppressors shall utilize an encapsulant that is UL listed and holds a 94 V2 fire retardant rating No encapsulant compounds that incorporate epoxy shall be allowed 6 Suppressors shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge current modules has failed An alarm on off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an alarm push to test switch shall be provided to test the alarm The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the panelboard enclosure 7 Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria 24 Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less than 120 kA per phase calculated from component manufacturer s specifications 2 Pulse life test Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI IEEE C62 41 Category C transients without failure or degradation 13 The clamping voltage shall not exceed the following VOLTAGE L N N G 120 208 400V 400V 277 480 800 800 347 600 1000 1000 8 The suppressor shall have a response time no greater than five nanoseconds for any of the individual protection modes 29 Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage MCOV of not less than 115 of nominal RMS voltage 10 Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided The indi
329. of similar type and size 25 Subcontractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of UTP and Optical Fiber Voice and Data Communications Cabling Systems and shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment 6 Subcontractor shall not contract any portion of the Work out to other Contractors a manufacturer they represent hall ab 2 The following list of Voice and Data Subcontractors are approved for this project s Kingston Electric Ltd att Brian Allen 861 Cockburn St S Winnipeg Manitoba R3L 2N6 Phone 204 477 1405 Fax 204 474 0853 22 Len Andrews Enterprises Inc att Len Andrews 538 Templeton Ave Winnipeg Manitoba R2V 354 Phone 204 338 5174 Fax 204 338 5199 Eus McCaine Electric Ltd att Brian Hogg 630 Erin St Winnipeg Manitoba R3G 2V9 Phone 204 786 2435 Fax 204 783 2180 4 Saltech Computer Cabling Services att Ray Saltel 833 Dugald Road Winnipeg Manitoba R2J 0G7 Phone 204 237 1127 Fax 204 237 4887 5 Static Electric Ltd att Richard Robertson 936 Logan Ave Winnipeg Manitoba R3E 1 1 Phone 204 783 3236 Fax 204 786 4823 Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 4 Communication Centre Cabling 6 Tri Star Electric
330. of 100mm4in above the finished floor 29 Spare sleeves with no cables installed within them shall be fitted with an acceptable firestop 6 Raceways shall enter Communication Cabling Wiring Closets at a minimum height of 2 4m8ft AFF af Conduit runs shall not contain more than two 2 90 degree bends between pull points or pull boxes 8 Conduits shall have long sweep bends 9 Continuous conduit runs shall not exceed 30m100ft without a pull point or pull box 10 Conduits shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges 11 Conduit couplings and connectors shall be steel type 12 Steel connectors shall be terminated with an insulated bushing 13 Pull boxes shall be installed in such a manner that the conduits that enter the pull box shall be aligned at opposite ends f from each other the cable shall not have a bend within the pull box 14 Conduit runs shall remain clear of areas in which ammable material may be stored Conduits shall not be installed adjacent to sources of heat Ch CT Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 7 Communication Centre Pathway 15 All conduits shall be left with a nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90kg200lbs 16 Provide one 20mm3 4in conduit stubbed up to accessible ceiling Space from a single gang co
331. of communications as well as set up recovery actions to take place if a service fails If the Auto Start flag is enabled for a particular service that service will start restarted using t au application If t will not start au Control load by running only Manual Controls 21 The SMS shall coma al th uto Start flag is disabl tomatically and can be stopped or he Service Control or he A the Service Monitor d the servic tically and will not display in Service By managing the SMS services you can reduce system required services operated manually fro devices m a work Fo and panel unlock all doors at o al during off business h N Man Rule The SMS shall specific access contr function The N Man R who must present period of time in defined reader required visitors long as t Database Maintenance The SMS shal For ays nce ours u Visitor Definition The SMS shall al visitor and badge inf operators to enter vi user interface ormation shall be able to ent th system shall assign and time period of th manual low a guard to manually control station r example provide additional sec olled readers using le is based in a team of their badge as a group within order to gain access a
332. ogrammable at site any time using a the ZAS 2 Analog Loop uiring Eprom hall not be the following Initiating Device Circuits icating Device Signal Appliance B Circuit for 2 wire Smoke Detectors Verified or non verified 4 One Form Input O and ground 429 shall flash ED shal capable of s The mod red 14 46 u fa noo ults NO NC tput circuit wiring shall be supervised The universal Class A B m diagnostic 217 27 boxes ex of the assem the wiring 8 Te 64m rmin 1 u m al con flash le sh deep conn ections s bly Devices which must be removed to gain access to terminals shall not be acceptable ass m The universal C operation in the foll zl Temperature 32 F 2 Humidity 0 93 R EDs mounted behind finished cover plate firm comm uni to display alarm status toring up to 24 diagnostic codes all be suitable for mounting on North American 2 gang or hal tO H Dry Output Contact Relay for open odule shall have a minimum of 2 A green LED the loop controller A The module shall be cation with 1 2 38mm deep 4 square be accessible from the room side odule shall be suitable for owing environment 120 F 0 C to 49 C non condensing Project No 67 Altern
333. ommercial Telecommunications Wiring Standard 4 EIA TIA 606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building refer to CSA standard CAN CSA T528 93 5 EIA TIA 607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications refer to CSA standard CAN CSA T527 94 6 EIA TIA TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Twisted Pair Cabling Systems 477 EIA TIA TSB 72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines 8 EIA TIA TSB 75 Cabling practices for Open Offices 29 NBC National Building Code of Canada 10 CAN CSA C22 1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One 11 CAN CSA C22 1 Canadian Electrical Code Part One Section 60 Electrical Communication Systems 12 CAN CSA C22 2 No 0 M91 General Requirements Canadian Electrical Code Part Two 13 CSA C22 2 No 154 1975 Data Processing Equipment 14 NRC CNRC National Building amp Fire Codes of Canada Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 2 Communication Centre Cabling 15 IEEE STD 1100 1992 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering amp Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment Emerald Book 16 ISO IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises 17 ANSI X3T9 5 Requirements for UTP at 100Mbps 18 TBITS 6 9 Canadian Open System
334. on Detection System following information shall be submitted 1 Detailed bill of material submitted as equal to that specified 12 Manufacturer s catalog cut sheet piece of equipment The specification sub section shall be typed on cut sheet to aid in review The exact shall be highlighted if more than one is contained in the cut sheet 23 Line by line typewritten statement comparing each requirement against verifiable performance specifi proposed product s Signed by an executive officer of the HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum syste standard name brand personal computer with s or the intended purpo hardware replacement c third party sources U manufacturer S Th All access control hardware and software shall be of a controllers and Server system shall be omponents at 700 Assiniboine 1 system PC Pr PSB m Genuine Intel Pentium III or greater 582 1 GB RAM additional RAM req included 23 3 5 floppy disk drive 4 SCSI DAT drive 4 GB minimum 29 24X speed CD ROM DVD server computer configured with all software pre loaded and ie shall meet minimum d shall be approved by c P2000 only All all submit the the Division Access Control and Engineer for review prior to bid The for each piece of equipment X or each proposed section paragraph and the front page of the catalog mo
335. ons eL The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage or degradation of operating characteristics 41 Operating Ambient Temperature T UPS Module 32 to 104 deg F 0 to 40 deg C 2 Battery 77 9 deg 25 5 deg C v2 Storage Transport Ambient Temperature rel 4 to 158 deg F 20 to 70 deg C without batteries 22 26 to 104 deg F 32 to 40 deg C with batteries NOTE Maximum recommended storage temperature for batteries is 25 deg C for up to six months 23 Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non condensing 4 Altitude Operating to 6 000 ft 2 000 meters above Mean Sea Level Derated 5 per kilometer above 2 km Storage Transport to 40 000 ft 12 200 meters above Mean Seal Level 25 Electrostatic Discharge Withstand maximum 25kV spark discharge also withstand minimum 5 kV with 5A NS rise and 10A vertical transverse UPS shall continue to operate without damage Project No 674 2005 Uninterruptible Section 16610 Alternate Emergency Power System Page 4 Communication Centre 6 Audible Noise 57 dBA at 1 meter from surface of the UPS d Quality Assurance wil Manufacturer Qualifications 1 Minimum of five year s experience in design manufacture and testing of solid state UPS systems is required Manufacturer shall be ISO9001 certified 2 Factory Te
336. onstruction details and mounting luminaire orders and ensure that all rings and similar features are uired installation here luminaires are suspended from ceilings and additional ground wire tallation of luminaires wi that the necessary depths Luminaires which cannot be pipes or uitable location tor and or Designer produc unless specifical from the o All luminaires and assemblies shall be properly secured and luminaires independent of the ceiling raming and hangers as may be equired Do not secure luminaires to mechanical ductwork or ther vibration producing apparatus n the drawings ly detailed using self aligning utlet box to the th the Work of and mounting installed due to ductwork shall be as directed by the Connect luminaires to lighting circuits as indicated Adjust lamp position in adjustable lampholder type luminaires to the proper beam distribution for the specified lamp Project No 674 2005 Lighting Equipment Section 16505 Alternate Emergency Page 5 Communication Centre 3 4 Tests PI Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 Sau Cleaning Prior to take over of the project clean the lenses reflectors of all luminaires with a damp cloth to remove dust smudges and fingerprint CS END Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre
337. oprene vibration insulation pads Finish in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements Approved Manufacturers Schneider Hammond Rex Manufacturing Cutler Hammer Polygon Siemens All transformers shall be of same manufacturer EXECUTION Mounting Mount dry type transformers up to 75 kVA as indicated Mount dry type transformers above 75 kVA on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pad unless otherwise indicated Ensure adequate clearance around transformer for ventilation E Install transformers in level upright position Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and just before putting into service Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible Mount transformers with vibration isolation Connections Make primary and secondary connections indicated on wiring diagram Energize transformers immediately after installation is completed where practicable END Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Panelboards Breaker Type Section 16471 Page 1 GENERAL Related Work Specifie Electrical General Re Conduits Conduit Fas and Conduit Fittings Moulded Case Circuit Shop Drawings d Elsewhere quirements Section 16010 tenings Sectio
338. or alarm ons nput output point ormat F ormai MP JPEG WMF PCX or S are not acceptable he SMS map program ct H cons for all nd Up evels It shall of graphic maps zL Input icon flashes exits Each alarm input however he alarm graphics portion of graphic maps with shall support f most image file format graphics map attachments map display window shall have level buttons for rapid movement trouble conditions will the SMS shall provide the following to depict reader status and he importing of image s produced with any graphic drawing program in EPS format Vector file the importing to produce custom input output reader Home Previous among map also provide map selection and size 4 storing a 11 be limited y t includes the map icons input point input point computer s condition touno cy wy Users can respond by either clicking on the icon or moving directly to the alarm queue window icon has a pop up box to indicate its current state open short alarm active Secure suppressed unknown 2 Output a user defined output point located anywhere in the SMS Clicking on the icon will set Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre
339. or approved equal 7 Read range shall be dependent on model selected 8 The reader shall be rated for normal operation from 5 to 150 F 29 The proximity card shall be encased in sealed plastic with a surface suitable to receive an adhesive backed photo ID or shall be capable of direct printing 512 Long Range Proximity Readers Used for exterior Gate control 1l The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader electronics inside a single weatherproof polycarbonate enclosure 2 The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of surfaces including metal Maximum read range degradation when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50 percent e The reader shall contain an integral color LED and audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully read 4 The reader shall be 12 x 12 x 2 maximum 55 Read range shall be a minimum of 20 6 The reader shall be rated for normal operation from 5 to 150 To be H I D Maxi Prox or approved equal 39 Mullion Style Proximity Readers Not used on this project 1 The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader electronics inside a single polycarbonate enclosure 2 The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of surfaces including metal Maximum read range degradation when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50 percent SES The reader shall contain an integral color LED and audio tone to indicate if the card has been successfully read 4 The reader shall be 1 7 x 6 m
340. ordance ler s requirements etc as follows intercommunication systems etc as per ion instructions ty Control und con tinui Ly Administrator from the ts in accordance with Section 16010 ty and resistance tests using method appropriate to Site conditions and inspection authori to approval of the local report shall be submitted to the Contract testing agency Perform tests before energizing electrical system Disconnect ground fault indicator if provided during tests A ground electrode with an unsatisfactory resistance test result shall be altered as necessary until achieved reading is Perform all the required resistance tests as outlined in CSA 232 for patient care areas tz Project No 674 2005 Dry Type Transformers Section 16461 Alternat Emergency up to 600 V Primary Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 43 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426 120 208V amp 347 600V 4 Grounding Secondary Section 16450 1 2 Product Data zi Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Transformers Ventilated al
341. ource to feeder to hronize to t converter shall also b ate from the t shall sync rom the inpu pass Switch Input Current T tor correc Lorton to hall be co dis tor s Was tac power na e input 120 208V 3 P the static trans the input conver fer switch ter The the bypass source which may source The internal e fed from the alternate HD tion circuitry shall 3 maximum at all load rrected to 0 99 minimum gral transformer for 600V se 4 wire output The transformer shall be c w taps to raise lower the voltage if required Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Sectio Page 1 n 16610 2 6 21 21 22 relays tacts ut Con con Inp 1 8 be programmabl generated al of t Si 4 enclosure PRU Batt Low Accessories treated teScan Load on Communication interfaces wil boards installed in the slot Programmab e Relays A programmable rel double individ throw relays s the UPS The UPS EAC shal h rel ay s tact Isolato The Input Contac normally open cus EE e to act arms T he input alarm Interface The SiteScan produ External Accessories The Remote Status Panel s for wall mountin UPS indicator
342. out discrepancies and correcting discrepancies to ensure that records have a valid digital s 4 Reco be saved modified ature Persis ign rd in Th maintain 55 configura time Imaging on this project 74 vb every cardholder umber of elements ustom texi The captured and stored images can be viewed as data record on a workstation his project provide controls to operate the rming part of the CCIV system the system shall provide the controls to lowing an photo signa part CCTV d cameras and mon Addit defin This opti graphs tures of a card not requ This opti ionally e and run 1 Alar 42 Sequ we Pan light con 4 Patt tion and tence All original the SMS database e SMS shall generat audit trails report the original recorded information and th protecting all previous data Record Retention Through software a system administrator shall defin parameters to backup and retrieve records to ensure availability of all records for a specified period o ts records shall even if records are detailed time stamped assuring that all record changes ereby e the Badgi on 5 S holder s ired on t on shall itors fo the fol ms macro ences fro tilt zo erns ng hall provide a visual Badge layouts shall be defined to include uch as company logos
343. oved material or equipment without a change in the contract price 6 Equipment Installation 2d Provide minimum 1000mm 39 4 clearance and access space at all equipment access doors panels breakers switches control s etc 2 Equipment to be located away from pipe shafts and all fluid piping 3 Equipment and cable shall not restrict and or interfere i with necessary access space required to safely service mechanical equipment ventilation fans filters etc which are existing and or to be installed under this contract 4 Prior to equipment installation confirm proposed installation location with Consultant 5 Provide scaled drawings for approval showing layouts of electrical rooms Drawings shall include dimensions of actual equipment being used and dimensioned locations of equipment Submit these scaled drawings with shop drawings of electrical distribution equipment Submit these scaled drawings with shop drawings of electrical distribution equipment 1 8 Responsibility zi Be responsible for any damage caused the City of Winnipeg or their Contractors due to improperly carrying out this work 2 Install all components of this work promptly and where applicable in advance of concrete pouring or similar construction Provide and set in the proper sequence of construction all sleeves hangers
344. over 8 The input module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment 21 Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C 2 Humidity 0 93 RH non condensing 29 It shall be possible to address each module without the use of DI switches for addressing shal Dual 21 no Input Module The intelligent P or rotary switches Devices using DIP t be acceptable Dual Input Module shall provide two 2 supervised input circuits capable of a minimum of 4 personal we to suit persona Single ities each with The personality of the module d may be changed at any loaded from t tion modules or modules conditions an lity code down func changes or 23 types 4 ground fa 5 LEDs t S o conf hall flash to display al DIP switch The dual input m 21 Alarm Latch Waterflow 2 Delayed lt 3 Non Latchin 4 Supervisory Inpu ults The dual input mounted behind firm communication modul ing t circuit wiring shall inished cover plate a distinct operation shall be p he Analog L requiring jumper changes shall no odule shall 0 upport the Manual Station Vaterflow g Monitor be supervised rogrammable at site time using a oop Controller Eprom ROM or PROM t be acceptable following circuit Conventional Heat for open and
345. over neatly and close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum Arrange for holes through exterior wall and roof to be flashed and made weatherproof Field Quality Control Conduct and pay for following tests 41 Power distribution system including phasing voltage grounding and load balancing 2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels 23 Lighting and its control 4 Motors heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable 5 Systems Fire alarm system security system communication systems 6 Any other electrical systems Furnish manufacturer s certificate or letter confirming that entire installation as it pertains to each system has been installed to manufacturer s instructions All circuits shall be tested to ensure that the circuit numbers are correct and that the proper neutral conductors have been provided and installed Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Requirements Electrical General Section 16010 Page 11 28 Megger cir 500V instrument 122 1000V instrumen 23 Advise Contract with sufficient make arrangemen Provide instruments conduct tests d Submit test res Insert test res Manuals Co ordination S cuits Megger 350V 600V circuits f t Insulation resist
346. posed Electrical Contacts Clean Designation Indicatlons for Commor Control Indicators Are Glass and Door Clean e d Control Panel Lock Cleanliness The above tests have been completed in accordance with the manufacturer s literature REMOTE TROUBLE UNIT Trouble Lamp Trouble Signal ANNUNCIATOR TESTS Annunciator Alarm Lamp Operation Individually Tested Annunciator Alarm Lamp Designation Checked Trouble Lamp Trouble Signal Power on Lamp Lamp Test Lamp Supervision Signal Silence Lamp Annunciator Auxiliary Functions Cleanliness X X F NA NA CONSTRUCTION OF AN SMS ENGINEERING Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com File No Setup Date Detail Sheet 05 015 01 JAN 2006 ED 5 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG 7 SYSTEM REMARKS Note 1 Confirmation of wiring supervision to each Individual device is only required during installation verification or a complete building audit of the System and is not required at this time Note 2 Replaced detectors as noted in the report Note 3 Buildinp revisions have resulted in new storage areas Recommend new heat detectors be added tp these areas TECHNICIAN S AFTER TEST CHECKLIST Reconnect Ancillary Functions off site connections Reconnect Ancillary Functions Reconnect Time Limit Cut outs Reconnect Signal Power Advise Building Management Work Completed Advis
347. posi loop ing through BNC 1Vp p 75 oh RGI l VGA tpu S terminal ut jac Pin k Audio 24 2 2 ter Audio Audio Outp minals Input 10di m 2 B output Y 1Vp p 75 ohm B ut Pin jac EI interface 2 29 end stat emergency time adj ners External Storag approx 4 Terminal 480 Mbps Control Terminal us output output ustment input o input output unit recording mode select H 10 k e Terminal 80 Mbps Hig 2 terminal S DD utput front panel 10K ohm 600 ohm 1Vp 4 u te video signal terminals C 0 286Vp p p 75 ohm terminals nbalanced BNC 1 terminal Pin High speed serial 1 terminal h speed serial interface Emergency recording input emergency out emergency output put camera power off oul sequ power inspection input D sub n 2 ce select Disk tput external si 5 pin torage Project No 674 2005 Closed Circuit TV Section 16920 Alternat Emergency CCTV System Page 4 Communication Centre Zu 1 2 9 se 52 2 10 21 PART 3 1 342 SH A 4 Alarm Connector 1 8ch 3 alarm input 9 16ch 4 alarm input 1 16ch 5 alarm output alarm recover input alarm suspend input D sub
348. r 06 SIMS ENGINEERING SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting Engineers 770 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 sms smseng com GAELECTRIC STDISCHEDU LES MST_PNL XLS PANEL EG PART 1 LOCATION RM 131 FED FROM 2CDP EA LOCATION RM 115 Designation B a Q E 2 gt lS F 2 Trip 15A e gt 5 gt 8 LIGHTING RM 105 LIGHTING RM 105 LIGHTING RM 103 104 LIGHTING VESTIBULE 100 6 100 7 COUNTER RECEPTACLE 1 COUNTER RECEPTACLE 1 1R COUNTER PLUG RM 131 gt gt SESS a 8 gt Z 2 gt o gt N e e PLUS RECEPTACLE RM 104 a gt gt e e gt gt 0 e EU d 8 N e e gt gt TV RECEPTACLE RM 105 N 70 E Cc e EN e 2 e PLUS RECEPTACLE RM 103 15A e ce e e MICROWAVE 1 RECEPTACLE a gt Q o c m 2 m 3 gt r m 2 a d e N v rb Eh e N U w gt 2 10 800 T 2 m N 21 m m 5 gt r m 8 gt T w gt w e 8 2 2 10 1 ZA w e h a
349. r Section 16426 Alternate Emergency 120 208V amp 347 600V Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Section 16477 R2 Shop Drawings Product Data 21 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 2 Indicate on shop drawings 41 Floor or wall anchoring method and foundation template 2 Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations i Dimensioned position and size of bus 4 Overall length height and depth of complete switchgear 5 Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted components 23 Include time current characteristic curves for breakers as required for the coordination study 10 53 Maintenance Data 1 Provide maintenance data for secondary switchgear for submission to Contract Administrator and incorporation into manual specified in Section 16010 1 4 Storage 41 Store switchgear on Site in protected dry location Cover with plastic to keep off dust T5 Coordination and Short Circuit Study 1 Switchboard manufacturer to provide a coordination and short circuit study as per section 16010 and submit to Contract Administrator with switchboard shop drawings Project No 674 2005 Secondary Switchgear Section 16426
350. r database request is then forwarded mode Shared mode is ul when a controller s badge capacity is exceeded Fields imited number of user defined data fields which may be used to store Each field may be and Boolean The SMS shall h allow the operator to fields at anytime The SMS fined cardholder database shall remain online while user d fields are added or edited It shall be possible using standard SMS system menu commands user defined cardholder fields Event and Transaction History si The SMS shall maintain a rec transactions and system exceptio users to access this information Message Filtering Routing types of messages transmitted to remote servers thereby reducing X to report on all ord of all alarms card ns and provide a means for This log can either be viewed in real time or by printed report The SMS shall provide the capacity to control the local workstations and X the amount of network traffic by only providing filters that only allow a subset of messages to pass a specific criteria Filtering shall be applied based on the operator logged on to the workstation Filtering criteria shall include subtype Site name operator name query string and priority Anti Passback Control than one person from gaining acce recognizing when a car
351. r intervention Lly causes the other path ers lose communication with continue to control connected points 2 Should the controll the server the controllers shall access and monitor inputs for all Local history of all transactions shall be buffered at Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Security Management Integrated System Section 16902 Page 13 for alarm report 23 design of a sys The Contrac losses in evel converters or any power supplies for the f amplification of electrical the controller and automatically uploaded to the server ting and long term historical storage once communications is re established tor shall be responsible for the tem that will compensate for all signal the trunk wiring This shall include field devices and any signal repeaters for the proper signals communications between the server 2 Per and Legacy ed con meth primary reverse 12 with poin troll ts D620 taining to serial 620 11 Communications betw lers can optional communications path via odology Thus forward U D600 AP n th and 5320 the server control access and monitor inp Local history o 11 buffered at the controller path wi thout
352. r to ensure proper and complete installation Receptacles Where equipment has line cord and plug ensure cap is compatible with receptacle Provide cordsets to equipment where required Pushbutton Buzzers Provide weatherproof pushbuttons where shown Provide buzzers where shown Provide 120 24V AC transformer where required EXECUTION Equipment Supplied By Other Trades Wire and connect all equipmen connection Install disconnect requiring an electrical switches where required Provide a direct connection or receptacle and cord set to suit hook up requirements of each piece of equipment Confirm connection method with Contract Administrator END Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emerg ncy Communication Centre Work in Existing Building Section 16195 Page 1 PART 1 GE ERAL Electr Related Work Specified ical Cond and Spli and Outlet an Wiring Fastenings and Supports uits Condui ters Cabinets Fittings Junction P General Requirements Conduit Fastenings Elsewhere ull Boxes Boxes Conduit d Fittings Devices Coordination H ct S ut d hem nsure ubmit disruptio obtain tem down carry Car sound system th
353. ransist frequency r Each in pr he inverter shall be capable of supplying cu ted voltage for over A visual ate overload operation 100 and tor and audible For greater currents urrent limit ting protection walk in and UPS shall be This function be capable of producing e 95 of ischarge time charger shall maintain battery Battery rE pc hutdown Lo and battery to he led inverters or 60 hertz ors IGBTs ange and verter shall be oviding the rrent at up to 150 alarm shall the inverter to prevent of shall be self p outp the inver t to clear to bypass w to regu not cause ge to go outside th acement specified voltage regula ut overload rotecting Inverter ter from the protective hen overload late each the output tion or phase Project No 674 2005 Uninterruptible Section 16610 Alternate Emergency Power System Page 7 Communication Centre 4 Fuse Failure Protection 21 Each inverter unit shall be fused with fast acting fuses so that loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause cascading failures MS Inverter Shutdown sI For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load the inverter control electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors Simultaneously the static transfer switch shall be turned on to maintain
354. rawings and engineering ed for approval along with a point by ting Requests for urers must use factory programming testing model item by item of Equals in trained personnel verification ULC listed and labelled and supplied by Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fire Alarm Systems Section 1672 Addressable Page 6 Two Stage 3 Smoke alarms Visual alar ms Fire Alarm Design Features The Fire Alarm System shal electronically supervised Supply complete with all hardware and software installation networked s ystem or this a ll be a zoned two stage to CAN ULC S531 to CAN ULC S526 non coded ddressable microprocessor based necessary f Manual override switches shall have the ability to be software disabled to prevent unauthorized operation durin be automatically enabled during alarm condi horized person control by When all active events that to norm output have allowed to Visually in aut Ac tions Sequences g non alarm condition nel returned restore dicate at device or goes into extinguish pulsate Th the circuit the alarm condi LARM he red A the con of alarm initiation initiated the SET or RESET of an al only then shall the output be the addressable Vhen trol panel LCD
355. ray section or 3ml10ft interval maximum shall be grounded with a 43 0 AWG RW90 insulated green copper conductor installed within the cable tray 8 For double stacked cable trays the ground conductor shall be layed in the upper tray An additional 43 0 AWG RW90 insulated green copper conductor jumper shall be installed from the upper cable tray down to the lower cable tray at each interval 9 Within the Communications Cabling Wiring Closets the cable tray deck shall be located 150mm6in back from the equipment rack centreline Clearance of cable tray above finished floor as shown on drawings Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 6 Communication Centre Pathway 10 The cable tray shall be installed so that there is a minimum of 300mm12in clearance above the cable tray 11 Provide a barrier separation in the cable tray as shown on the detail sheets 12 Arrange for opening in walls and floors for width and depth of cable tray to pass through 13 Provide and install acceptable firestopping of floors and walls after cables have been installed 3 4 Conduits Electrical Code Section 12 sal Refer to Canadian 2 Refer to Section 16111 3 Conduit sleeves shall be installed with acceptable fire stop to meet local fire codes 4 Conduit sleeves shall extend a minimum
356. re Devices acceptabl The in a minimum o The personal to suit con personal Controller ROM or acceptable Th circuit 4 I u2 e Un DC One Class A Universal Class A I Lity code S ROM changes or iversal Class A B module shall support types Two C ca Circuit 55 One Class A eC 5 1 ingle func D ass B pable of Or IAC or gang 32 F 0 93 connections S B Module telligent Universal Class A B 15 distinct operations ty of the module shall ditions and may be changed at downloaded from B di ule shall cover uitabl relay module shall have a minimum of 2 mounted behind finished cover plate confirm communication with to display A green LED the loop controller A alarm status The module shall be agnostic codes be suitable for mounting on 1 gang 1 1 2 38mm deep deep for operation in the following shall hich must be removed not tion modules or modules req IP switch jumper changes s or one Class A delayed waterflow alarm operation Ind 120 F 0 C to 49 C non condensing be accessible from the room side to gain access to be acceptable to address each module without the use Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall Module shall be capable be pr
357. ring Devices Section 16141 Alternate Emergency Page 5 Communication Centre ed Flush floor mounted duplex receptacle to be as specified but mounted in Thomas amp Betts flush floor box complete with gaskets floor plate levelling screws and plate assembly 23 Coverplates gl Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are ganged 2 not use cover plates intended for flush outlet boxes surface mounted boxes 3 Provide a coverplate on each outlet 3 2 Identification 21 Identify receptacles with size 1 nameplate indicating panel and circuit number Nameplates to be mechanically fastened Refer to Section 16010 END Project No 674 2005 Wire and Box Section 16151 Alternate Emergency Connectors Page 1 Communication Centre 0 1000 V PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 References 21 CSA C22 2No 65 1956 R1965 Wire Connectors 2 EEMAC 1Y 2 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters 1200 Ampere Maximum Rating PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Materials il Pressure type wire connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors as required 52 Fixture type splicing connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AW
358. ring the above test 3 Each manual alarm initlating device has been individually tested Number of devicesI6 4 Each automatic alarm Initiating device has been tested Number of devices 103 5 Each audible and visual signalling device has been tested Number of devices 19 6 Correct annunciation has been confirmed for each device tested SUMMARY 1 The Fire Alarm System is now functional gt 2 The Fire Alarm System has minor deficiencies noted on report 3 The Fire Alarm System has major deficiencies noted on report 4 A copy of this report has been given to the owner or owner s representative Owners Representative Mr Jack Halstead DOCUMENT THE RESULTS OF TESTING PERFORMED CONSTRUCTION OF AN ALTERNATE EMERGENCY SMS Engineering Lid Consulting Engineers 110 Bradford Street Winnipeg MB Canada ON3 COMMUNICATION CENTRE Telephone 204 775 0291 Fax 204 772 2153 lee le QUT 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG _ Loo emen __ TEST RESUL TS Every line must have the appropriate marking in the space provided THIS 15 TO CERTIFY THAT THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM HAS BEEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE SECTION 5 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND TESTS OF CAN ULC 8536 M97 AND THESE RECOR SIGNATURE OF TECHNICIAN FIRE PROTECTION PLUS PH 204 888 1922 YESX YESX YES X YES X YES X Drawn By Approved By Referen
359. rk live parts LIVE 120 VOLTS or with an appropriate voltage in English Arrange for installation of temporary doors for rooms containing electrical distribution equipment Keep these doors locked except when under direct supervision of electrician 1 41 Scheduling of Work 1 Existing buildings will remain in use during construction Arrange work so that interruption of services is kept to a minimum Obtain permission from the City of Winnipeg prior to cutting into electrical services Where deemed necessary by Contract Administrator temporary electrical shall be installed and or work shall be carried out at night and on weekends 2 Contractor to maintain continuous and adequate all existing electrical systems and other services during entire time of this contract Provide temporary conduit wire equipment etc where necessary to meet this requirement 1 42 Examination of Documents and Site el Carefully examine all plans and specifications pertaining to this contract and become familiar with all details Visit the site and determine all factors affecting this section of the work include all costs for same in Bid Submission Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 22 Communication Centre 1 43 Demolition of Existing Electrical Remove all unnecessary existing electrical equipment wiring fixtures in those portions o
360. rm Systems 10 CAN ULC S537 Verification of Fire Alarm Systems 11 Manitoba Building Code l3 Description of System 1 This specification provides the requirements for the supply and installation programming testing commissioning and verification of a complete Addressable Analog Fire Detection System The system shall include but not be limited to control panels amplifiers DGPs Printer remote annunciators graphic annunciators input and control modules alarm initiating and indicating peripheral devices conduit wire and accessories Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 2 Communication Centre Two Stage etc required 2 System Includes ol X signals Microprocessor based fire alarm and protection unctions incl to furnish a complete operational system Provide 120V circuits for equipment as required addressable control panel to carry out oe initiating lt 2 OAD OB system co trouble s uding receiving alarm irst stage and general alarm supervising ntinuously actuating zone annunciators initiating ignals performing fire control Trouble signal devices Powe Manu Auto Audi r supply facilities al alarm stations matic alarm initiating devices ble sign
361. rocessor 1 14 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 SMS components shall be shipped to the job site in original manufacturer s shipping containers 1 15 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS All consoles terminals and controllers shall be factory wired before shipment to the jobsite 22 Cabinet doors shall open a minimum of 170 degrees to avoid blocking personnel movement Each door shall be equipped with a cylinder lock a tamper switch and a piano type hinge with welded tamperproof pins 3 Provisions shall be made for field wiring to enter the cabinet via standard knockouts at the top bottom and sides of controller cabinets 4 Each wire shall be identified at both ends with the wire designation corresponding to the wire numbers shown on the wiring diagrams ns All exposed wiring within the cabinets consoles and terminals shall be non metall ormed neatly wi ic flame resis th wires grouped in bundl tant wiring cleats or wir es using e ties Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 35 Communication Centre System 6 All ferrous metal Work shall be painted in accordance with the manufacturer s standards TESTING AND COMMISSIONING The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and commissioning the installation in accordance with all applicable documents in the Contract set zd Testing shall be comprehensive and
362. roject ol The reader housings shall be made of cast aluminum or molded plastic 22 The reader shall contain one green and one red built in lamp or LED to indicate valid and invalid card badging or a single multi color LED 3 The reader shall be available as card only and card PIN versions The readers shall be furnished and installed in the style and quantities shown on the drawings 4 The readers shall be manuf facturer certified for an ambient operating environment of 32 to 115 F 0 to 46 C and 10 to 90 RH non condensing For installations in environments below 32 F a cold weather kit shall be installed in the reader to ensure normal operation The kit shall consist of a heating element mounted inside the reader and a moisture seal gasket set to prevent moisture from entering the reader housing 5 The cards shall be constructed of top quality durable and resilient PVC plastic or a PVC Polyester composite laminated with a magnetic stripe of high coercivity material at least 2750 oersteds designed for use with magnetic stripe readers 6 Each card shall be encoded with a facility code unique to the security system an individual card number and one of 255 issue level numbers Provide Magtek MT 75 magnetic stripe card encoder or equivalent rated for 75 bpi 28 Standard cards shall be available permanently marked with the card number and reference code The cards shall be availa
363. rols to deal directly with Owner for this item Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 36 Communication Centre System ml Response to emergency service requests on site if required 12 Replace or repair defective components as required 3 Manufacturer s recommended preventive maintenance 4 Two year and five year Maintenance Contract with price terms and conditions shown for each year 5 The Service Contract shall be optional and the Owner shall have the right to accept or reject the Contract and accept only the warranty service as described above at no additional cost END Project No 674 2005 Closed Circuit TV Section 16920 Alternat Emergency CCTV System Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 General zu All drawings and all sections of the specifications shall apply to and form an integral part of this section 1 2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 41 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 21 General 1 Supply and install a closed circuit IV system with all conduit wire outlets and equipment as shown on the drawings and as herein specified to provide a complete closed circuit TV system in the building 2 2 System Overview and Functions wal The system shall consist of a series of
364. rovide a one person complete system or a tions shall be specified smo It a so S specified area orm time based control controll functions including ke detector sensitivity led by specifying time hall provide the ability to these functions on an exception basis using a holiday field test of either the maintaining full unction of areas not under test Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 11 Communication Centre Two Stage Field test shall be usable in a silent or audible mode When in the audible mode the signals shall audibly annunciate alarms troubles and device types 22 All field test activity shall be logged to the system printer and historical memory 21 The system shall be provided with eight levels of password protection with up to forty passwords 22 Provide a cost savings software verification Compare program The program shall instruct the technician as to what software changes have been made from one software revision to another and voy what points require verification 23 The system must be capable of reading and displaying at the trol panel the sensitivity of remote intelligent analog e n ionization and photoelectric detection devices Individual t J elligent analog detection device alarm threshold mu
365. rrfrhunarra Janitur Room By Janiter By Roc 324 B Th Room 301 Tila ream il 8 B 2334 1 471 f Technician C Kyle Date November 22 2004 SMS ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION OF AN CB ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Drawn By pee By Reference 700 ASSINIBOINE PARK DRIVE WINNIPEG 05 015 01 JAN 2238 Re
366. rs wo Bonding jumpers straps Pressure wire connectors EXECUTION Installation General Install complete permanent continuous system and circuit equipment grounding systems including electrodes conductors connectors accessories as indicated to conform to requirements of local authority having jurisdiction over installation Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury Make buried connections and connections to conductive water main electrodes using copper welding by thermit process or Burndy HyGround compression connectors Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs Soldered joints not permitted The main public metallic water service to a building shall be utilized as the main ground electrode where applicable Where such a service does not exist artificial grounding electrodes shall be provided to suit the requirements of the local inspection authorities Install bonding wire for flexible conduit connected at both ends to grounding bushing solderless lug clamp or cup washer and screw Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints where such bonding is not inherently provided with equipment
367. rt Two of NRC CNRC National Building amp Fire Codes of Canada 8 IEEE STD 1100 1992 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering amp Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment Emerald Book 14 3 Description of System 1 System to include 1 The communications horizontal cabling pathway shall consist of a cable tray system 2 The Voice Communications backbone cabling pathway shall consist of a cable tray system 63 The Data Communications backbone cabling pathway shall consist of a cable tray system Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16746 Alternat Emergency Communications Page 2 Communication Centre Pathway 1 4 m 1 5 jl 2 3 1 6 wal 432 4 All backboards cable support hardware clamps bonding clamps and grounding to provide a complete system as specified Standards The equipment and installation shall comply with the following current requirements E National Building Code 22 Manitoba Building Code 23 Canadian Electrical Code 4 EIA TIA and CSA Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards 5 Manitoba Fire Code 6 Local and Municipal By laws 24 Authorities having jurisdiction Submittals Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals Include 21 Cable Tray 2 Grounding termination connectors 23 Grounding bus bars This information is to be revised to as built after
368. rvices and be present Backfilling backfilling to supervise work excavated area to the original condition and s sodding or asphalt repair w Work to be in accordance with Include all costs for excavation and backfilling installation unless otherwise indicated here required fill as required for underground electrical Provide protective materials around and at all times during excavation and Backfilling shall restore the hall include the current CSA Bulletin for any underground electrical Fireproofing Where cables or conduits pass through floors walls and fire rated walls Series Fire rating Fireproofing of electrica Barrier System or seal openings with 3 M cables block or concrete Brand 7900 to maintain fire equivalent conduits trays etc passing through fire barriers shal ties authori Access Provide and install Doors access doors where electrical requiring access is built in teel pproved traps here it e at least 600mn located ceilings approximatel S a S plaster 1 manufacturer W b finished 1 In applied tile or exposed gl access doors shal tile patterns to suit Access doors located in Ei approved FLB Co ordinat te access door Administrator In masonry wal nasonry unit sizes no access doors are required Ly 300mm
369. s The manufacturer shall provide a full dispatch c One toll free number shall reach a qualifi 7 days week 365 days year response time hours day required The organization shall consist of regional and local entre y automated national to coordinate field servic for a return call personnel schedules ed support person 24 emergency service is from the responding field engineer shall be 20 minutes or less 29 An au resources 2 Replacemen 1 Parts ensure aro country tomated procedure shall be in place to insure tha manufacturer is dedicating the appropriate technical suppor LO ma tch escalating customer nee t Par und t 22 Customer 5 hours a day availability shall be available through an ts Stocking the Ct ct ds xtensive network to he clock parts availability upport Parts Coordinators s 7 days a week 365 days a yea 3 4 Maintenance Contracts 40 A complete offering of preventive and full Contracts for both the UPS system and batt provided An extended warranty and prevent shall be provided for a period of 2 years after warranty period Warranty and preventive maintenance servic factory trained service personnel throughout the hall be on call 24 r for immediate parts service maintenance ery system shall be ive maintenance package shall be p
370. s The system shall incorporate the necessary hardware and process alarm and firmware to collect trouble conditions with the security procedures of control the flow of secured areas of the facility The user interface at the operator workstation shall interface GUI windows simultaneously SUBMITTALS Contractor shall submit all items workstations transmit access requests the facility authorized personnel traffic through host computer be a mouse driven graphical user allowing the user to open and Work on multiple server in accordance wit not be limited to EL Model numbers 2 Manufacturers Input power requir 4 the following rrom a urnished job component catalog data sheets for all components ments for all SMS component indicating Complet ngineered drawings Manufacturer model Dimensions numbers and specifica layouts and installation the entire SMS Oo CS E SMS devices Interfaces with all sub systems or by increasing the software tamper and and advisories in accordance The system shall the and at the th the requirements of the Submittals sections and shall include but tions details Point to point wiring diagrams for all SMS devices Termination details for all Single line system architecture drawings representi
371. s 6 Ensure minimum cable bend radius and maximum pulling tension as recommended by the cable manufacturer is not exceeded Minimum bend radii for UTP cable is four 4 times the cable diameter manufacturers recommendations may be greater 29 Cables shall be bundled with Velcro cable straps No tyraps permitted Velcro cable straps are for bundling only Velcro Es cable straps shall not support the weight of the cable 8 When terminating cable in connecting hardware insure that the amount of untwisted wire of UTP cable at the termination does not exceed 13mm 9 Ensure cable is mounted terminated and managed to meet X manufacturers specifications rrom 10 Horizontal cabling shall not exceed a distance of 90 meters cross connect to information outlet 11 Provide 3m10ft coil of slack in the Telecommunications Closet in the cable tray above the equipment rack Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 15 Communication Centre Cabling 12 UTP cable at the information outlet shall be provided with 4153 300mm12in coil of slack in the cable tray prior to entering conduit stub All horizontal cabling shall maintain the following distances 14 from EMI producing equipment 1 2m48in motors or transformers 82
372. s Application Criteria COSAC Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in 4 Government Owned and Leased Buildings Informatio Treasury Board n Technology Standards Description of System 1 System to include zd A centralized network for the Voice Communications cabling system 2 A Category 6 centralized network for the Data Communications cabling system v3 Information outlets c w faceplates recessed enclosures located in the Work area for connection to communications devices 4 Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP enhanced Category 3 copper cable for the Voice Communications horizontal cabling system 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP enhanced Category 3 copper cable for the Voice Communications backbone cabling system 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP enhanced Category 6 copper cable for the Data Communications horizontal cabling system aT All patch panels troughs labeling clamps bonding clamps and grounding to provide a complete system as specified 8 All connector cables splices and miscellaneous material to provide a complete system as specified 29 Wiring connections to the Local Telephone Servic Provider shall originate at the demarcation point The cross connect and disconnect links shall be provided by Voice and Data Contractor System Per The Category 6 System shall prov
373. s Horizontal 1 8 lbs Vertical 7 Insulation resistance 100 ohms 8 Dielectric strength 2 0kV at 60 Hz 23 The patch panels for the enhanced Category 56 cabling system channel shall meet the electrical characteristics of the cabling system as specified in Clause 1 4 System Performance The channel shall meet the r panels provided quirements specified with the patch Designation strips shall be provided for each jack All cables shall be terminated in numerical sequence and labeled as per approved labelling scheme Project No 674 2005 Voice and Data Section 16747 Alternate Emergency Communications Page 11 Communication Centre Cabling Category 6 Patch Cables A T Shall meet EI 24 AWG stranded tinned copper plyethylene data grade cordage flame retardant PVC Shall modu ar plug Capable of high data rates to support voice applications DC resistance per lead DC resistance unbalanced 5 Mutual capacitance Characteristic Impedance hall meet th cables provided Horizontal Cabling Horizontal cabling shall 1 four pair 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair 100 onms IA 568A standards 94 ohms 100n maximum 6 6nF 100m maxin ystem as specified in Clause 1 4 System zl CSA or ULC certified 2 The horizontal cable cabling system channe
374. s the SMS Central Site and within the enterprise become SMS S lt M p e PX e al Jo 78 lding Man tation simple nhance comm ture Option Arch web based itecture op technology running the th alarms generated integration shall require no special upgrade their worksta unications with via tion the hall to the tion s agement ons ontrol events uire no special hardware s via software option shall allow customers h each other t Cardholders can be l assigned sites within th e SMS ration on all other SMS regional Site synchronizes its da Database replication shall be imp SOL Server database technologies Redundancy Option 79 or eliminate occurs it shall be automa of the defective component redundancy componen The are tica shal two red ly 1 Cl redundant compu capabilities using HP Prolia to provide system dupl a2 Remote Redundancy A di with failover and fail Double Take sof backup functions SOFTWARE R R EM EQUI ENTS The software shall have an installed c following at a minimum zl A central database on the server 200 000 badges maximum v2 Unlimited number o 3 Up to 16 000 2 sta 4 state alarm input points 4X
375. sed during nter stand alone mode with the network master When in the shall be capable of performing all it s Time Controls Guard Patrols The DGP shall have 4 Digit even internal Eac The DGP shall e shall be RS 485 9600 BPS up to a over a minimum 18 AWG twisted pair cable All exte rnal connections of the slave controller shall withstand 6 Kilovolts voltage transients to chassis ground Alarm Signalling Provide a programmable tone module programmable for any one of 9 tones whoop sl bursts per min select al low siren fas ute t si temporary code 3 3 3 It shall be field 1000 Hz slow whoop fast shutter tone pulsed at 120 System software shall ren beep lert or evacua tion used as primary or standby Provide a 4 bit frequencies d 2nd stage tones Provide amplifiers sized plus 25 spare capacity circuit y suitable total of output connect frequency adjust switch to allow ined by this project 4 required tones as required Tone modules may be tones for other signal sources custom tone Owner to select 1st stage or the speaker horn load connected rovide one amplifier for each speaker Each amplifier shall have a in the related area strobe circui Provide standby amplifier programmed to automatically take over the
376. select from a list of database fields A User definable reports that can be saved and re run as required without redefining the report fields and format each time the report is run lt 2 The SMS report feature shall provide access to all data in the system from entire databases to specific system transactions or configurations Reports shall be reviewed on screen 8 Online or printed Help System The SMS shall provide online help which shall be available at anytime from any active screen by pressing xI Operator Access VT The SMS shall provide operator password controls to be assigned to individual users The system administrator shall be able to define a n umber of parameters to set up strong passwords passwords that are hard to break such as password validation maximum consecu length number of letters numerals required in a password The SMS shall provide added 1 ty by requiring opera tive invalid logins minimum uppercase and lowercase or tors to enter their password when Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 9 Communication Centre System performing certain system critical functions Stored 310 passwo 2 T with which assign message fil transactions the rds shall be encrypted he system administrator shal
377. set trigger events files Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Security Management Page 8 System Air Crew PIN Number Mes Remote Server sage filters and message filter groups ocal Site Service St Application Panel Card Format Security Level Range Audit Transaction History Redundancy Intercom exchanges and stations Audio Visual AV elements such site camera Req uest Approvers FASC N CCC 4 Input Point Monitoring T 2 T alarms he SMS shall collect from all monitored points Alarm Annunciation 1 he SMS shall audibly and visually annunciate all advisories and tamper and trouble conditions 6 Input Point Supervision T tartup Configuration monitor preset input to camera dry contact and process status information he SMS shall electrically supervise all 2 state and 4 state input point circuits as specified or shown on the drawings 27 Reports zu The SMS shall fully integrate with a dynamic report module allowing users to create custom reports The dynamic report writer shall writer Writer be Seagate Crystal Reports 9 0 professional version with the following features as 21 Mouse driven graphical user interface with the ability to
378. setting 12 Can be installed in existing electronic junction box 13 24V AC 12V DC compatible power source operation to suit the wide variety of applications 14 The 3 dimensional hinge Pan Tilt and Azimuth allows the camera to be rotated as well as moved horizontally and vertically WEATHERPROOF AND VANDAL RESISTANT COLOUR DOME CAMERA To be Panasonic 4WV CW864A or approved equal Pan tilt zoom 64 presets Zoom ratio X22 plus 10X digital CCTV Monitors 17 CCTV monitors shall be Panasonic WV LD1500 or approved equal 21 15 diagonal Refer to Plans for Locations 2 640 x 480 VGA 3 3 channel video inputs composite A B or S video 4 Built in Panasonic security data link connector V5 1 5W speaker output 6 7 8 Rack mount adapter 19 rack 120V 73W NTSC PAL CCTV Monitor Mounts CCTV monitor mounts to be Pelco MR4050 c w all options and accessories as required or approved equal JA Steel black powder coat finish 2 150 lbs capacity 23 19 to 31 adjustable width 4 Mounting adapter Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre Closed Circuit TV CCTV System Section 16920 Page 3 DVR to be Panasonic General 22 Ambien 113 F Ambien Drive Provided 9 3
379. shall not exceed 0 1 during a 24 hour period Total frequency deviation including short time fluctuations and drift shall not exceed 0 1 from the rated frequency 2 4 Static Bypass Switch A General sL A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS That static switch shall be a naturally commuted high speed static SCR type device rated to conduct full load current continuously The switch shall have an overload rating of 110 rated load continuously 150 rated load for ten minutes 200 rated load for 30 seconds and 2 000 Project No 674 2005 Uninterruptible Section 16610 Alternate Emergency Power System Page 8 Communication Centre rated load for two cycles The static bypass shall shut down if these overload conditions are exceeded The static transfer Switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control Circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and operating and alarm conditions This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source or normal input source Transfers shall be made when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS without exceeding the transient limits specified herein 2 Uninterrupted Transfer mI The trans
380. sieq J9j81 1304 SSH uo pied Jo pue uong usng 4006 ULUNJOD 1ueneg uo 5 5 8 5 Joop sejnuiui 0 dn xoo iejuir uognqusnd SIOOP 5 sseooy uonouny se exiis WT Jopeos st uedo se samas 10 09 9q 1000 waysks 55802 10 uonouny 0 5 se samas osje usng ony gor 14 S9JON junoeg 1000 This Guide to be read in conjunction with Door Security Schedule Project Project No uopng euo puooes oj Joud 100P 154 BABY 0 sJoop Aes uo 8 510 seseo 180 c xoopeyu 2 8 low AeuoH Aq Joop jo Buisues Joop aq
381. six pole disconnect switch for each two speed motor 2 2 Equipment Identification s Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 22 Indicate name of load controlled and voltage on size 6 nameplate Project No 674 2005 Disconnect Switches Section 16440 Alternate Emergency Fused and Non Fused Page 2 Communication Centre Up to 1000 V PART 3 EXECUTION 24d Installation wil Install disconnect switches complete with fuses as indicated 2 Install additional brackets supports etc required for mounting the disconnect switches Install six pole disconnects at all two speed motors END Project No 674 2005 Grounding Section 16450 Alternate Emergency Secondary Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Wires and Cables Section 16122 3 Service Entrance Board Section 1642 4 Dry Type Transformers up to Section 16461 600V Primary 1 2 References 41 Ground equipment to CSA C22 2 No 41 2 Copper grounding conductors to CSA G7 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2s Equipment wil Grounding conductors system circuit and equipment grounding to be bare or green insulated if indicated required stranded copper sized i
382. st be justable form the control panel 24 The detection system must remain 100 operational and capable of responding to an alarm condition while in either routine operator maintenance mode or during programming by the manufacturer 25 Dynamic supervision of system electronics wiring detection devices and software must be provided by the control system Failure of system hardware or wiring must be indicated by type and location on the alphanumeric display 26 The control mode must permit the arming and disarming of individual detection or output devices Status of these devices must be displayed upon command from the control panel 27 The address type of device and sensitivity setting of each addressable device must be field setable by simple programming device and stored in the addressable device in non volatile memory Loss of both A C power and batteries in the control panel will not affect the system device programming 28 The system must be programmed in the field only via laptop computer Burning of EPROMs is not acceptable System programming must be password protected The final system program must be available on hardcopy and included in the owner s manuals 29 The printer or alphanumeric display must be capable of listing upon request el Alarms and troubles with time date and location X Status of output functions S
383. sting e Before shipment manufacturer shall fully and completely test system to assure compliance with specifications PART 2 PRODUCTS Beet Fabrication zl Materials el All materials shall be new of current manufacture high grade free from all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing 22 Maximum working voltage current di dt of all solid state power components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75 of ratings established by manufacturer Operating temperature of solid state component sub assemblies shall not be greater than 75 of ratings Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and be operated at no more than 95 of their voltage rating at maximum rectifier charging voltage 2 Wiring zi Wiring practices materials and coding shall be in accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code NFPA 70 All bolted connections of bus bars lugs and cables shall be in accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code and other applicable standards All electrical power connections are to be torqued to required value 22 Provision shall be made for power cables to enter or leave from both top and bottom of UPS cabinet 23 Construction and Mounting 1 UPS unit comprised of front end coverter battery charger high frequency isolat
384. sting of 41 Open short testing 2 Polarity testing 23 Pair transposition testing 22 Signal Attenuation test 53 Near End Crosstalk NEXT at both Telecommunications Closet and information outlet 4 DC loop resistance test 5 length in meters 8 Tests shall be performed on the to TSB 67 Vinnipeg for 100MHz or passing TS to the Contract Administrator include replacement at no addi individual links Link test 29 Cables not complying with EIA TIA 568A Category 5 standards B 67 test guidelines shall be identified for corrective action which may tional expense to the City of Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Intercom System PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere wl Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 a2 Conduits Conduit Fastenings Section 16111 and Conduit Fittings 13 Wires and Cables Section 16122 4 Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes Section 16132 and Fittings 5 CCTV System Section 16920 1 2 Care Operation and Start up m Provide instructions in accordance with Section 16010 1059 Product Data 21 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 2 Include riser diagram talk paths of complete intercom system 1 4 Operation and Maintenance Data M Provide data for incorpora in Section 16010 2 Include description of syst
385. sufficient to demonstrate compliance with each requirement 2 proposed test plan shall be submitted to the Consultant at time of shop drawings for approval before commencement of final test 33 Final tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner s representative TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION Operator training shall consist of a two day course conducted X on site by a factory trained professional instructor Training conducted by unqualified personnel is unacceptable X Training materials shall consist of the following I Formal course outline and agenda 2 Operator training student guide for each student 23 Hands on practice with online equipment 4 Written examinations The training course shall be for at least two continuous business days Additional video imaging training sessions shall be made available to the Owner if necessary WARRANTY All equipment furnished under this Contract shall be warranted for a period of twelve 12 months from the date of final Owner acceptance of the system El Respond to service requests on site if required within 3 hours 365 days year 42 Replace or repair defective components as required SERVICE CONTRACT PROPOSAL The bidder shall include an optional service Contract proposal at the time of bid The proposal shall include NOTE Johnson Cont
386. t an this option to work the terminals are to operate in Central mode to gain access at an N Man rul heir sponsor presents the badge after the visitor low an easier and faster way to en by allowing authorized Sitor and badge data using a single Prior to a visitor s arrival ly trigger an event access The SMS ow some system functions to be Operators with the appropriate permissions can manually control doors rel output an operator can or to a specific door urity measures for the N Man rule f cardholders a defined N Man Rule shall enable defined reader as provide several functions to help customers maintain their database Cer the operator appropriate visitor data into the visitor sponsor scheduled visit shall enter the dat and shall assign Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Security Management System Section 16902 Page 23 access privileges using Access Templates from t Badge zr F cardho when c badge anothe badge 65 he sam Resync screen acilities that use entry and exit terminals req to enter and exit an area in sequence lders ardholders badge in at an entry out at the next badging If for r cardholder out will remain in the In state out attemp access adjust state badge next b b 2 all MS S t
387. t can be shall ully Project No Alternat 674 2005 P2000 Inte Emergency Communication Centre System Security Management Section 16902 Page 24 grated 68 69 T0 14 412 Request Approval Badge Activities Guard Services Emergency Access Disable MIS Interface Option This option shall provide receive cardholder informati such as a Human Resources interface and standard ODBC badges shall be added modifie database cardholder informati wildcards or MI protocols and data imported and Validation the capability for the SMS ion from an external source S system Using the MIS cardholders and their d or deleted from the SMS on can be queried using from ASCII files Such import export sessions can occur in either batch or real time mod Intercom Interface 21 Intercom fr u X from the Intercom Call Monitor trigger host ac call requests ar to select a call tomatically hen incoming tions ls shall be monitored and connected to and shall be used to such as CCTV activities e displayed the operator f and onnect the master intercom st ntercom calls shall he real time map system a W shall be abl 3 The forwarded to multiple master s Database Partitioning Option d Multi
388. talled in switchboard 3 Store fuses in original containers in storage cabinet PART 2 PRODUCTS 2s Fuses General Plug and cartrige fuses to CSA C22 2 No 59 2 Fuse type references L1 L2 J1 etc have been adopted for use in this specification 455 Fuses product of one manufacturer Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Fuses Low Voltage Section 16478 Page 2 HRC L fuses formerly Class L motor loads time delay capable of carrying 500 of its rated S minimum ast acting HRCI J fuses formerly Class J Panel loads time delay capable of carrying 500 of its rated S minimum _ fast acting e storage cabinet manufactured from 2 0 mm thick aluminum 750 high 600 mm wide 300 mm deep hinged lockable front access door finished in accordance with Section 16010 2 2 Fuse Types 21 1 11 current for 1 2 Type L2 2 E Type Jl current for 10 lt 2 Type J2 2 3 Fuse Storage Cabinet 21 Fus mm PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation vx Install fuses circuit V2 Ens devices 1 2 3 4 Electrical General Requirements in mounting devices immediately befor nergizing ure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mounting Install Class R rejection clips for HRCI R fuses Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circ
389. tarters not acceptable Provide NEMA rated st arters only IEC rated starters are ual motor starters of size type with components as quick make and break trip indicating handle d as indicated type and colour as indicated padlocking in ON or OFF position ted type in public areas or as indicated tic Star size type ra ts as follows Contactor solenoid operated ters ting and enclosure type as indicated rapid action type lt 2 Motor overload protective device in each phase manually reset from outside enclosure 3 Power and control terminals 4 Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in visible location 5 Identify each wire and terminal for external connections within starter with permanent number marking identical to diagram 6 Control transformer 427 Starters to be two speed where required type to match requirement of motor provided by Division 15 Accessories sh Pushbuttons and Selector switches labelled as indicated 2 Indicating lights type and color as indicated 3 2 N O and 2 N C spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise indicated 4 HOA selector switch Two speed single winding starters shall have individual Red run pilot lights for LOW and HIGH speed run indication 6 An adjustable 20 sec 3 min time delay relay set at 3
390. te and time 8 Executive privilege enabled or disabled 29 Active Disable badge toggle button 10 Trace enabled or disabled 11 Overrid nabled or disabled 12 PIN code 4 or 5 digits 1 3 4 Badge event privilege level 0 7 1 Security level 0 99 15 Special access privileges to satisfy requirements for assisted access according to ADA 16 Assign a minimum number of 10 badges per Cardholder 17 Assign 32 Access Groups and Time zones per badge 27 Image Recall 1 The SMS shall allow the system to display a cardholder s picture whenever he she badges at a specific Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Security Management Page 16 System 28 29 terminal or group of terminals a terminal under one of the following filtering conditions the cardholder image linked to the badge number shall displayed a terminal The SMS shall windows whenever a badge meets one or all of When a cardholder badges at be long with their name date time badge number r defined fields and the transaction message allow the display to pop up in front of other the following us defined filtering criteria Access Grant Access Deny Invalid Card Invalid Issue Level Invalid PIN ti Passback On nvalid Card Timezone Invalid Reader Real time S
391. ted Square D 2 All manufacturers shall provide their industrial quality product line commercial quality starters are not acceptable Project No 674 Alternate Emerg Communication Ce 2005 ncy ntre Motor Starters Section 16811 to 600 V Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 Installation wl Install starters connect power and control as indicated 52 Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements installed 23 All starters for two speed motors to be provided with six pole disconnect switches and wired with six conductors Refer to motor schedule and drawings for two speed motors 32 Tests 44 Perform General v2 Operate Ces Req Swi s3 Perform relays 4 Check t related indicat 25 Ensure ts in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical uirements and manufacturer s instructions E tches contactors to verify correct functioning starting and stopping sequences of contactors and hat sequence controls interlocking with other separate ed starters equipment control devices operate as motor rotation corresponds with the direction required by the driven equipment Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 1 Communication Centre System
392. ted to surface mounted EMT conduit sized as required for the installation 4 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets 2 3 Masonry Boxes al Electro galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls 2 4 Concrete Boxes wal Electro galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required 2 5 Floor Boxes RE Concrete tight electro galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with gasket floor plate levelling screws and adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex receptacles 2 6 Conduit Boxes 51 Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory threaded hubs and 4 mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle where exposed to moisture 2 Moulded Vapour Barrier Boxes 4 Moulded box vapour barrier factory moulded polyethy flange for use with recessed electric switch and out 29 Fittings General 221 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats 2 Knock out fillers to prevent entry of debris 3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm and pul larger conduits 4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal lene box c w let boxes 11 boxes for
393. tegral Surge Suppressor re 1 Suppressors sha be component recognized in accordance with UL1449 Standard for Safety Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors and UL 1283 Electromagnet ic Interference ilters 2 Suppressors shall be independently tested with the category C3 high exposure waveform 20 kV 1 2 50 us 10 kA 8 20 us per ANSI IEEE C62 41 1991 53 Suppressors shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path Small round wiring or plug in connections shall not be used in the path for surge current diversion 4 Suppressors shall be constructed using surge current modules MOV based Each module shall be fused with user replaceable 200 000 AIR rated fuses T shall be monitored on the front cover enclosure as well as on the module he status of each of the panelboard module Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Section 16475 Page 4 55 Suppressors shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge current modules has failed An alarm on off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an alarm push to test switch shall be provided to test the alarm The switches and alarm shall be l
394. tenant building con database partitioning Each te their own user partition capab monitoring their own cards do owners still retain overall co commands if necessary Buildin workstation seats on generating additional revenue whil satisfaction In a configured as a per partition campus envi Each partition separate security system without cost Guard Tour Option 1 This option shall provide security personnel Selected tours may be either r Users shall be abl maximum of FDA CFR Part 11 Compliance AE The SMS shall provid also be monitored multi exchange station calling A call tations request from the list ation to the selected station and responded to from l support request can be SMS shal trol shall be supported via nant may be provided with le of controlling and ors alarms etc Buil ntrol and can override owners are free to 1 ding tenant ease the security system thereby e enhancing tenant ronment each building can be separate partition with several operations the user as a additional shall appear to incurring an the ability to monitor by time frame and tour definition andomly selected or fixed e to define up to 256 guard tours with a three guards per tour facilities that may be subject Federal Regulation CFR Part records and signatures
395. tended including lt 1 all main control circuits 2 remote annunciator circuits 23 all manual and automatic initiating devices 4 all audible and visual alarm signals Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 25 Communication Centre Two Stage 9 all ancillary controls including fan shutdown door release etc 6 All existing systems functions such as alarm Signals ancillary controls etc that are not modified but are required to operate from any new zones added shall be verified for correct operation m When fire alarm system is verified Contractor shall measure and record all loop or circuit resistance values at the fire alarm panel when end of lin resistor is shorted Contractor shall highlight all values which exceed the manufacturer s recommendations and report them to the Consultant for action to correct this deficiency 53 Any necessary changes required to conform to the above shall be completed by the electrical contractor with technical assistance provided by the system manufacturer 4 During the period of this inspection the electrical contractor shall assist the manufacturer with the services of electricians so To assist the electrical contractor in preparing his bid the manufacturer shall i
396. ter fault 34 Inverter failure 35 System shutdown loss of control power 36 Over temperature shutdown 37 System output overloaded 38 Bypass overload 39 Fault load transferred to bypass 40 Bypass power supply failure 41 Bypass out of sync 42 Bypass SCR open 43 Bypass SCR short 44 Bypass sensing failure 45 Load on bypass 46 Excessive retransfers attempted 47 An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above alarm conditions RS 232C Interface Port I An RS 232C interface port s display of UPS status information at a computer terminal others The format of the remote display shall alpha numeric display panel located on the UPS LAN Interface Port 24 A DB25F interface port shall be provided signalling of UPS status information to a computer others using software for unattended shutdown shall include power fail on battery bypass Event Logging ERI The UPS monitoring shall have the capability of capturing the following 1 Input brownouts blackouts and transients Frequency variations 2 UPS alarms 4 UPS external on and off commands 25 UPS total ON time 22 Information will bee categorized into two sections 441 Alarm History Event type 22 Event date and time 22 Input disturbance counter resettable 1 Sum number of brownouts 2 Sum number of blackouts z3 Sum number of transients
397. the control a polling pa opera to the server for alarm reporting and historical storage once comn re established 285 eve The design of Contra x losses in evel C the any power supplies that wil trunk wiring nunications transactions sh and automatically uploaded long term er is tor shall be responsible for th a system compensate for all controllers Server and the Legacy Lly support a redundant a bi directional the loss of communication th automatical communications to be established via the oth tor intervention Should the Legacy controllers lose comm Llers shall continue uts for all connected all be ing 5 on the Causes unications signal This shall in for th fi lt converters or repeaters for the amplification o ectrical signals ld devices and an proper clude y signal 25 Pertaining to communication modes the SMS shall communicate with controllers that provide reader interfaces input points or output relays Communication shall bi directional some messages shall be sent from the server to the field controllers other messages shall be sent from the controllers to the server and then can be distributed within the system e
398. the job until completed unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Require Electrical General ments Section 16010 Page 5 12 L3 14 SLS All tradesmen shall carry all tools on their person at all times Any tool not in use shall be under lock and key in an area authorized by the Contract Administrator Cleanliness and Cleaning This division shall crates and construction shall be neatly piled out removed at least weekly during construction areas shall Before the project will b lighting fixtures lamps receptacles cover plates be clean and free of dust debris side t be kept e accep lens and o plast maintain a clean tidy job site this portion of the work he construction area and shall be he construction period All due to clear o ted by panelboards All boxes f debris he City of Winnipeg al switches er ther electrical paint equipment shall etc Any equipment which is scratched or damaged shall be replaced or refinished if So designated by the Contract Administration Modifications Locations of all light fi xtures conveni or similar outlets t to modification by the Contract the right to move these up to 3000 mm to the contract price nce recepta
399. tion of testing 2d Enclosure Genset 24 A steel enclosure shall electrostatical metal incl shal be zinc pl they shall be terminated with a locking accessible from the exterior of the be mounted on located to allow easy access weather protect minimum ambient capacity of 43 C be paint ated or si breaker and control panel shall of the enclosure and shall be control and power wiring be mounted on the inside of the enclosure y winterized and insul Sound attentua enclosure shall include mot with 15 degree snow hoods 120 240 Volt combination panel and breakers full steel liner include a 60 amp heater lamps one light switch receptacle The bl connected by suppl a lier ted wi tion s torized The in 110 F Doors the edge of the Genset capped enclosure The th terior of the to ensure all Coolant shall be loc t baseframe w tive sound attentuated enclosure with a shall be provided The ted dark bronze utilizing an ly applied power baked polyester paint All sheet shall be painted prior to assembl uding edges are fully painted to prevent rust A tainless steel and utilize stainless steel hinges and locks drains shall be piped to surfaces 1 hardware kable and oil NPT pipe fit The circuit A super critical grade silencer s ure sh
400. tions and connect to alarm circuit wiring Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit wiring Do not mount detectors within 1 m of air outlets Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling below and around detectors Locate duct type detectors in straight portions of ducts co ordinate with Division 15 Connect alarm circuits to main control panel or DGP s Connect signalling circuits to main control panel Install end of line devices where required Install main control panel annunciators etc and connect to AC Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 24 Communication Centre Two Stage 8 Install remote annunciator panels and connect to annunciator circuit wiring 9 Locate and install door releasing devices 10 Locate and install relay units to control fan shut down etc 11 Locate and install intelligent modules required 12 Fire Suppression System wire alarm switches supervisory Switches solenoids etc and connect to control panel 13 Connect sprinkler switches 14 Connect to Building Management System alarm trouble 3 2 Verification Data and Testing eL System Verification 44 Upon completion of all wiring and installation of all equipment devices etc do complete verification of the fir
401. to 90 RH non condensing For installations in environments below 32 F a cold weather kit shall be installed in the reader to ensure normal operation The kit shall consist of a heating element mounted inside the reader and a moisture seal gasket set to prevent moisture from entering the reader housing 412 The cards shall be constructed of top quality highly durable and resilient PVC plastic or a PVC Polyester composite material for use with Wiegand readers 6 Cards shall manufacturer encoded using the Wiegand pulse generating effect with a highly secure encryption algorithm Each card shall be encoded with a facility code unique to the security system an individual card number and one of 255 issue level numbers sd The encoded information shall be highly secure from alteration by external magnetic fields 8 Standard cards shall be available with a hot stamped facility code and card number The cards shall be available from the manufacturer without hot stamping if requested by the Owner lt 9 Cards shall be ISO standard credit card size 10 Cards shall have the capability to be slot punched at the top eu equipped with a strap clip to attach the card to the user s clothing NOTE If using video badging badges should be E printed before punching slots 43 Magnetic Stripe Technology Not used on this p
402. tor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt smoke temperature and humidity The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop for retrieval using a Laptop Computer controller The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for area protection and direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 feet Project No 674 2005 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16723 Alternate Emergency Addressable Page 17 Communication Centre Two Stage 0 91m high and 3 feet 0 91m wide with air velocities up to 5000 ft min 0 25 39 m sec without requiring specific duct detector housings or supply tubes and meet the following standards 1 ULI Smoke Sensitivity Range 0 67 3 77 Obscuration ft 305mm 2 ULC Smoke Sensitivity Range 0 67 3 77 Obscuration ft 305mm 3 Provide a lamacoid nameplate which describes the new fan System for all duct smoke detectors 4 The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment Temperature 32 deg F to 120 deg F 0 deg C to 49 deg C Humidity 0 93 RH non condensing Elevation no limit 5 The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 foot 9 1m centers and be suitable for wall mount applications 6 Each detector shall be capable of Intelligent Analo
403. ttals Electrical General Req Specified Elsewhere Conduit Boxes uirements Section 16010 Section 16132 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 PRODUCTS Switches Toggle operated general purpose AC Switches 15A and 20A 120Vac ingle pole double pole three way and four way indicated with the following features and 347Vac s switches as d Terminal 22 Silver i3 Urea mo 4 Suitabl 9 Brown t power 6 Fully r and up to 80 Switches of Switches to l holes approved alloy contacts lding for 10 AWG wire e for back and side wiring oggle for normal power red toggle for emergency ated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps 5 of rated capacity of motor loads one manufacturer be premium specii Acceptable manufacturers Manufacturer 120 Volt Hubbell Bryant Leviton Pass amp Seymo Smith amp Ston Slater throughout project fication grade 1200 Series 4800 Series 1200 Series ur AG 1 Series e 4 4800 Series 710 Series Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Section 16141 Page 2 Wiring Devices Communication Centre Receptacl es Duplex r with 01 ceptacles CSA type 5 15 R 125 Vac owing features 15 A U ground m Nylon face brown or ivory for normal power red for
404. uction dime weights and electrical performance cha or material Where applicable include actual wirin Schematic diagrams of each component Include all techni work of other sections Shop drawings of all equipment must be Administrator for review in sufficient retain them for at least ten 10 work data and samples in specified herein and to nsions capacities racteristics of equipment g Single line and cal data and full details Include wiring drawings or diagrams showing interconnection with submitted to the Contract time to enable him to ing days One print and one reproducible sepia of each shop drawing shall be submitted Cross out or eradicate all non related Shop drawing submi Bind each system separately eg P A Intercom Fire Alarm etc One common binder from one supplier will not be acceptable ssion shall include applicable specification sections show non compliance listing Refer to spec Compliance List Sample for example Division 16 shall changes or cause to submission to t be reviewed by the required Division have been changed Administrator for to comply before ret check all shop drawi the supplier to make items CCTV Nurse Call a photocopy of all ing a complete compliance detail sheet Shop Drawing ngs and make necessary necessary chang
405. ues T 66 Req 1 t to badge back into the The SMS shall provide the capa ing the state of a badge to retu The operator shall also be able as Undefined to clear the Entry adging The SMS shall all area without swiping their ow badges terminal example 4 f sync O they will be denied ty of manuall bili Exit s Cardholders to resync the g to all or specific cardhol Badging Terminal elon at th sta ders selected t they m they follow badge to reconfigure t tatus until to be resync by tus of badges badges last presented Last Badging Terminal f all badges las terminal group tatus o he selected t Queue View he SMS shall provide a Req tha such a adding Reques securi record 22 T reques lettin reques the SM shall archiv Web Ac m variou compat permis 67 S Web Access requests y measures in the request uest Queue database tabl t contains requests originated from external sources Since external requests invol deleting or modifying data in the SMS database Queue shall be designed to provide additional processing by checking al S before they are allowed to en ts for the purpose of reviewing request data enter the SMS dat ts shall be packaged as XML doc S Requ
406. uilding Management System OPC server BACnet e ce across s Metasys In th artSight 3000 series e kstations utput func T an ude time date playback interface shall irst frame The AV integration shall including presets ll support at a minimum the following with alarm f to view and tions from his shall allow the user to vent g AV recording real from any place alarm at go to last orwarding versions 4 4 and 4 5 Vision Network DVN 5000 the Johnson shall further acknowledge up to five M3 or P2000 Project No 674 2005 Alternate Emergency Communication Centre System Integrated Security Management Section 16902 Page 27 elect the Johnson Controls Metasys works M Alarm graphics to view and interact wi from the SMS 2 The BACnet hardware subset but rather be a oftware to allow SMS users to e erations by integrating BACnet tasys server tasysr System Extended Architec The Metasys System Extended low the SMS to interface using hnson Controls Metasys Bui shall allow the Metasys workstati certain SMS alarms send access c reports and to create interlock 2 The option shall req but rather be a simple upgrade Enterprise Option 41 The Enterpris multiple sites to communicate wit Cardholder Badge information access to doors at al system In the Enterprise Configu become
407. uit Provide a fuse cabinet in each main and sub electrical room wh re fuses ar installed END Project No 674 2005 Contactors Section 16485 Alternate Emergency Page 1 Communication Centre PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere 21 Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 1 2 Product Data ib Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 241 Contactors PR Contactors to EEMAC No 1CS 2 Electrically held or Mechanically held controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for type of load controlled Half Size contactors not accepted 3 Complete with 2 spare normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts unless indicated otherwise 4 Mount in EEMAC 1 Enclosure unless otherwise indicated D Include following options in cover 411 Red indicating lamp Open 22 Green indicating lamp Closed 23 Hand Off Auto selector switch 6 Control transformer in contactor enclosure 2 2 Equipment Identification zi Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Requirements 2 Size 4 nameplate indicating name of load controlled as indicated 2 3 Manufacturers d Acceptable Manufacturers Allen Bradley ASCO Cutler Hammer Square D Siemens Proje
408. uit interf Each circuit that e initiating o tes a de detectors normal sen ts to determine if tor cleaned sitivity setting an alarm and indicate 5 in i face panel shall In this mode an alarm from any ligent device It shall ac or auxiliary connect 22 The degrade mod alarm condition e Detector operation in th the alarm detectors to a common default acceptable The system shall system shall indicate operation and s be capable of repor te local circuits operation ailure or the loss of system communications to the ace panel inter ts own degrade mode inte tiva in the event be capable of operation the system shall receive analog or conventional indicating appliances and remote initiating a trouble condition during hall give a visual indication of an degrade mod threshold previously programmed Systems returning value in degrade mode s shall continue at hall not be ting alarms from devices whether programmed or not Alarm reports from these devices shall activa The system shall per te indicating appliance circ 43 uits automatic changes of settings adl Time based func periods or actual dates control schedul e The system shall p
409. unication Centre 5210 Aluminum bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains Mains suitable for bolt on 25mm wide breakers Trim and door finish baked grey enamel Sprinkler proof to meet code requirements when located in sprinklered areas Custom Built Panelboard Assemblies 450 mm relay section on one or two sides of panels as indicated for installation of low voltage remote control switching components Double stack panels as indicated Contactors in mains as indicated Feed through lugs as indicated Isolated ground bus as indicated Metering as indicated logging type c w max min values for Volts Amp KW KVA KVAD KWD PF Meter to be by PML ION 7300 Series or approved equal As manufactured by J R Stephenson Breakers Breakers to Section 16477 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwis Lock on devices for 5 of 15 to 30 A breakers installed as indicated Turn over unused lock on devices to the City of Winnipeg Lock on devices for fire alarm emergency lighting door supervisory intercom paging stairway exit night light circuits and similar circuits Branch circuit breakers to be 15A single pole unless otherwise indicated on drawings Project No Alternat 674 2005 Panelboards Emergency
410. utpu rent f nce By Coverter with 3 Added dynamic power fac reduce the input curren Input The maintenance bypass shall have in 3 phase 3 wir ttery to supply power to ied power in the nor have the following rom the LCD panel and DC bus voltage threshol Interval between tests Duration of test 30 to ult is 30 seconds Date and time of ha E initia Fras d pushbutton switch for Line all ensure the capability the inverter while the mal mod The battery test user selectable options or RS232C port d pass fail value 2 to 9 weeks 900 seconds factory 1 test Enable disable tes s the lowin load he battery fail tes g Transfer the o by Restart the rectifier c Display a warning messa Sound an audible alarm Retransfer the load bac pass Switch pass Switch 3 Ph tput y opera ted to input 600V ted three phase m into the UPS cab the input AC powe converter inverte a ce bypas d isolat ternal maintenan cally barrier an ternative sh t the system shall pass harger ge k to normal mode ase Input 120 208V ain ine tenance bypass switch t to directly connect r source completely r static transfer swi nd all printed circuit S Switch and its terminals ed from these components all provide input s
411. vanized code gauge painted steel EXECUTION Inspection Inspect instrument transformers for damage and verify characteristics nstallation nstall instrument transformers and ensure accessibility Project No 674 2005 Disconnect Switches Section 16440 Alternate Emergency Fused and Non Fused Page 1 Communication Centre Up to 1000 V PART 1 GENERAL ll Product Data will Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 Disconnect Switches wal Fusible and non fusible disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure and size as indicated To suit the environment i e weatherproof watertight dust tight general purpose etc 2 Provision for padlocking in on off switch position by three locks 3 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position 4 Fuses size as indicated to Section 16478 Fuses Low Voltage 29 Fuseholders suitable without adaptors for type and size of fuse indicated 6 Quick make quick break action heavy duty industrial grade 24 ON OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover 8 Disconnects used for service entrances shall be approved service entrance switches X 9 Disconnects for two speed motors to be six pole Refer to motor schedule and drawings for two speed motors and provide a
412. ver surfaced protected by arc disruption means including separate arcing contacts arc splitters and blow out coils for load current Copper buswork Project No 674 2005 Automatic Lo Alternat Emergency Transfer Equ Communication Centre ad Section 16627 ipment Page 3 10 Switch and relay contacts coils spr accessible for inspection and mainten without removal of switch panel or di linkages and power conductors Auxiliary contact to initiate emerge failure of normal power that the transfer or re transfer only normal and emergency sources are with Short circuit withstand rating 42 kA voltage Inrush current rating minimum 20 time Sprinklerproof Controls Selector switch four position Test start 1 Test position Normal power fai starts and transfer takes place Retu engine 22 Auto position Normal operation failure of normal power retransfers and shuts down engine engine will not start 4 Engine start position Engine s transfer unless normal power supply f ing and control elements ance from front of panel Sconnection of drive ncy generator start up on The transfer switch shall have an in phase monitor to ensure takes place when both the in tolerances RMS symmetrical at rated S rated current Auto Manual Engine lure simulated E
413. visory Operation Input Circuit Trouble Operation Output Circuit Alarm Operation Circuit Trouble Operation Coded Signal Sequences Confirmed Coded Signal Sequences are not Interrupted by Subsequent Alarm Input to Output Circuit Operation Confirmed including Ancillary Devices _ Lamp Test A Reset Operation Main Power Supply Transfer to Emergency Power Data Communication Link Supervision ard Operation Control Unit Interconnection to Monitoring Station Are Glass and Door Clean Control Panel Lock Cleanliness Battery Type amp Rating alaini elits g BATTERY TESTS 2 Battery Inspected for physical 12 0 AH lead acid Dumage Good 2004 Baitery Terminals cleaned and Buttery Voltage AC power lubricuied N A Battery Charge Current Battery Terminals Clumped Tightly mc Battery Voltage AC power off Supervisory condition 264 VDC Electrolyte Level Checked N A NA NEN 268 Battery Volioge AC power off Specific Gravity of Electralyte as per General Alarm Condition full load 255VDC Manufacturer s Specifications Alarm Lond During Test amp Disconnection Causes Trouble Signal Yes Fuil 300 1 494 s de Ero ERES ALTERNATE EMERGENCY Approved By Reference Drawn By SMS Engineering Ltd Consulting
414. w circuit numbers in black felt marker on inside of covers Project No Alternat 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Emergency Requirements Page 9 Communication Centre Wiring Terminations Lugs terminals screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors Manufacturers and CSA Certification Labels or equivalent after Visible and legibl quipment is installed Warning Signs As specified and to meet requirements of Electrical Department and Contract Administrator Inspection Decal signs minimum size 175 x 250mm Single Line Electrical Diagrams Provide single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass as follows al Electrical distribution system Locate in main electrical room or as designated by the City of Winnipeg s representative Provide fire alarm under plexiglass at riser diagram plan and zoning of building fire alarm control panel At each remote annunciator provide a small an c w room numbers numbers scale floor pl Device tags shall utilize the as built room Drawings 600 x 900mm minimum size Location of Outlets Do not install outlets back to back in wall allow minimum 150mm horizontal clearance between boxes Change location o distance does not installation outlets at no extra cost or credit
415. wer feeders All testing is to be done after cables are bent and formed within panelboards but before the cables are terminated on breakers or lugs All insulation resistance values to be 50 megohms or more Any cables with values less than 50 megohms are to be re terminated and re tested At completion of all testing and verification submit a final report to the Contract Administrator The report is to include test results for each cable confirmation that all cables and terminations have been installed according to manufacturer s installation instructions and confirmation that there are no outstanding deficiencies in the installation 2 Division 16 shall arrange for and shall pay all necessary charges for Pyrotenax to provide the testing services and to verify all terminations have been done correctly Division 16 shall provide sufficient advance notice to Pyrotenax to allow them to be present at the required time to provide training prior to start of cable installation and to perform testing 2 All mineral insulated MI cables shall be spaced and installed to manufacturers recommendations Continuous lengths of M I cable without joints shall be used Mineral insulated cable shall be clipped on minimum 1m centres All cables shall be terminated with the self threading sealing end pot inside the brass gland body In no case shall the copper sheath and sealing end pot extend beyond the brass gland body Complete installation to m
416. wil Install exit lights as indicated a2 Connect fixtures to designated AC exit light circuits as indicated i3 Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in on position 4 Connect fixtures to remote battery banks circuits as indicated END Project No 674 2005 Unit Alternat Communication Centre Equipment for Emergency Emergency Lighting Page Section 16536 1 GENERAL PART 1 1 1 wil 1 9 4 12 id 22 T3 21 2A 14 il 22 TS 21 Conduits Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings Wires and Cables Outlet Boxes Conduit Boxes and Fittings Exit Lights Product Data Related Work Specified Elsewhere Electrical General Requirements Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec tion 16010 tion 16111 tion 6122 tion 16132 tion 16519 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 Data to indicate system components power and special attachments Operation and Maintenance Dat Provide data for incorporation int in Section 16010 a Operation and Maintenance Manual Operation and maintenance instructions for comple mounting method to include system to permit effective operation and maintenance 2 Technical data illustrated parts lists with part catalogue numbers 33 Copy of approved shop drawings Maintenance Materials Provid
417. wo 4 ho together with vendor s representative Communications Cabling System maintenance of system copies to t provided at The Contractor shall Winnipeg in throughout dem Contractor personal necessary to video he City of Winnipeg a time convenient provide a Cross conn the facility connecting of the stat Winnipeg s servic Co ordination with Local IA TIA ur on site training sessions for Voice and Data tape CO to operational personal in use and shall provide all training session and submit two Training sessions shall be the City of Winnipeg equipment and technician to assist the City of ecting the voice and data services Contractor shall also perform cross Telephone Util ion assignments between the City of arcation ity Contractor shall provide and install patch cords required at demarcation local connects with telephone utility 11 cross connects and Co ordinate all cross Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Voice and Data Communications Cabling Section 16747 Page 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS Material Equipmen is no al certified Inspection Depart All cabl Submit of shop of orders Approved The fol for Contract ing and manufacturer x drawings for for same
418. x 300mm prime coat only ock and without screws locks to be flush type is necessary for persons to enter through door n x 600mm ll take the tile and be sized and loca lls access doors to be sized and types fire rated ceilings or walls s rated doors and frames ll conform to local codes and inspection equipment Access doors to be 2 5mm 12 ga 12 x 12 minimum or as with concealed hinges anchor all equal to Milcor Screwdriver operated doors to lazed or unglazed structural tile ted to suit tic tile In removable acous hall be locations etc with Contract Project No 674 2005 Electrical General Section 16010 Alternate Emergency Requirements Page 21 Communication Centre 1 39 Security Fasteners and Hardware 1 Refer to other sections of the specifications for Security Fasteners Division 16 to install security fasteners required for Division 16 work 2 This shall also include security tamperproof screws that are exposed such as in light fixtures coverplates system devices outlet covers etc 43 Refer to other sections of the specifications for security hardware 1 40 Protection wall Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety 42 Shield and ma
419. xit Lights 2 16536 Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting 4 16610 Uninterruptible Power System 16 16622 Power Generation Diesel 13 16627 Automatic Load Transfer Equipment 7 6692 Lightning Protection 2 16723 Fire Alarm Systems Addressable Two Stage 29 6746 Voice and Data Communications Pathway 8 6747 Voice and Data Communications Cabling 18 6761 Intercom System 3 6800 Electric Heating 2 6811 Motor Starters to 600 V 4 16902 P2000 Integrated Security Management System 38 16920 Closed Circuit TV CCTV System 6 Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Electrical General Requirements Section 16010 Page 1 General This Section covers items common TO Sections of Division 16 This section supplements requirements of Division 1 All drawings and all sections X to and f Time Date Sensitive orm an integral part of t Electronic of hi E Eq the specifications shall apply S section uipment and Software All time date sensitive electronic equipment and software provided on this project be based on the use of f time and date codes itis Codes and Standards wher specified otherwise C22 3No 1 except wher Abbreviations for electrical The electrical installation s of the Canadian Electrical Code wit Rules and Ordinances and to having jurisdiction over
420. y like in led ternally be able to program the name D panel or RS232 port provide communication SiteScan or to disable battery charging when contact input from the ATS EMA 1 Project No Alternat 674 2005 Emergency Communication Centre Uninterruptible Power System Section 16610 Page 13 PART 3 Sal zt al 42 EXECUTI ON Field Quality Contr ol The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by factory trained field service personnel during the UPS startup 1 Visual Inspection 2 Inspect equipment for signs of damage 2 Verify installation per drawings 3 Inspect cabinets for foreign objects 4 Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured s5 Inspect battery cases 6 Inspect battery for proper polarity zd Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly 12 Mechanical Inspection Check all control wiring connections for tightness 2 Check all power wiring connections for tightness 3 Check all terminal screws nuts and or spade lugs for tightness 23 Electrical Inspection 21 Check all fuses for continuity 2 Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct 23 Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltage being used 4 Assure co string s nne
421. y the cardholder used tation to a card reader ts in a value of either Sys carried Tu the cardholder ts a badge tity tained on or within to Cardkey CK7xx series controllers taken by an SMS operator to remove an ueue after it has been acknowledged and to This term refers to Cardkey CK7xx series network panels or 5321 and D600 AP These connect to terminals and communicate with the Server S are also called tem command 5320 and P900 serial panels 5320 legacy panels that intentionally places a typically for maintenance the memory of the controllers as badge records and access contact 17 Elevator Cabinet Con readers associated with a set of input points The of elevators and cabine bu trol ree electrical Elevators and cabinets are set field ts using ou ttons or unlock cabinet doors and inpu utput points and an optional troller interfaces with t points to enable car call t points to monitor their con tpu Project No 67 Alternate Emer 4 2005 Communication gency Centre P2000 Security Management Integrated Section 16902 Page 5 System statu door when eleva opera floor defin E tor cab The tor S cabinets ition Events 18 that may be ac basis he
422. ylene RW90 90 deg C 4 Configuration Multi conductor as required c w a separate bare CU ground wire Project No 674 2005 Alternat Emergency Communication Centre Wires and Cables Section 16122 Page 2 20 Colour Code Black red blue and white in 4 C cable Cables of more than 4 C to be number coded 6 Voltage Rating 1 5 or 15 as indicated 237 Inner Jacket 21 Black polyvinyl chloride PVC A Low Flame Spread LFS 3 Low Gas Emission LGE 8 Armor Inter locked aluminum 9 Outer Jacket 3 Black polyvinyl chloride PVC 40 deg C 2 Low Flame Spread LFS 23 Low Gas Emission LGE 10 Flame Rating FT4 11 Certification CSA C22 22 No 131 or latest revision 4 Electronic Cables Conductors 21 Minimum 18 AWG STC Solid Copper 2 Insulation polyvinyl chloride PVC 3 Configuration twisted pairs No as indicated 4 Shielding Copper braid 5 Voltage Rating 300V 6 Certification CSA 7 Suitable for use with VFD and DDC controller 8 Ground the shield as per equipment manufacturer s instructions Mo Fire Alarm Cable E Conductor Solid Copper minimum 18 AWG 12 Insulation 105 deg C Flame retardent PVC 9 Configuration Multi conductor minimum 4 conductors per cable 4 Voltage
423. yoo 6 0 4 14 uiejs g 0 sseooy Aq suado Joop oneuBeW 02 pz 1e 55 pJeo WOJ JOOP JO 6 UJeje sjunus uoyAs Aay wee uo sesee e1 pexoo Ajeuuou 100q pajeAnaeep usnd aindes OL uo usnd 8 jo Jo Bulouenbas pue suopnq usnd sdee SS929 0 JO 40119 X9 320 55900 Aq pL JOOP puooses uo sJojeJedo JOOG sejeAnoe Jaye pue JOOP 15 UO YOO uopnq eseeje1 Joop Jeuddng Aq uoynq 21 5 sseooy 4xe oj jsenbou se soAJes 10j29jep uorjouu Joo 8 00 eAnoedsai uedo episui suopnq suomoeuJip eAnoedsai ui eouenbes sJepi s SJoop 10 Sjes uo uonoui JO usnd uo Jey os sJepiis s100q 0 OLVG
424. ystem Activity Window ERE monitor window workstation terminal scr on display on and off The SMS shall provide a real time system activity which can be displayed on any operator n whenever the SMS server is This window shall have the capability to toggle the as well as to selectively display the line fol 2 for each of the above transaction types to recognize a specific type of transactions associated with cardholders llowing items at the operator s discretion Alarms Access grant Access denied Badge Trace Audit trail Panel Host Elevator Cabinet Area Mustering Guard Tour The SMS shall provide color configuration capabilities help operators In addition in the real time transaction system shall display cardholder information including image and System Status Display badge transaction history 11 The SMS shall provide a dynamic system summary display that graphically indicates the following status information filtered by panel or terminal All status display information shall be summarized in a single window Status Unknown Panel or Terminal Up Panel or Terminal Down Terminal Mixed States Input Secure Input Alarmed Input Open Input Shorted Project No 674 2005 P2000 Integrated Section 16902 Alternate Emergency Security Management Page 17 Communication Centre System

674-2005 Bid Opportunity

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents